Work Text
"Have you guys ever thought of making a photoshoot before a play?" Kim Taehyung's professor asks his class that like it's something completely usual, and the boy catches himself squinting and looking around to check on other people's reaction. His best friend, Park Jimin, simply contorts his face, clearly not pleased by the idea. There are only two or three students who seem interested, and even them don't dare to pronounce a word. "Honestly, no, professor," Taehyung finally speaks, getting a few nods from the rest of his classmates. "Well, there always must be a first time for everything," the professor says, coldly opening a smile, "I want you all to hire a photographer, professional or amateur, to make a photoshoot of each of you for the begining of your new project. Of course, hiring is just a technical term, because they are not going to be paid. It's going to be volunteer work. I'm giving you three months to prepare the perfect photoshoot for yourselves, and then you will have one more week to prepare a monologue of the character you created for the photoshoot." Taehyung groans in frustation. He is definitely not a bad-looking guy, but his profile in pictures isn't the best. He can already see it: his tanned skin being whitewashed "for the sake of the image", his dark brown eyes being covered with contact lenses and all the imperfections being masked. He looks at Jimin, who also seems bothered, although Taehyung doesn't think he should. Park Jimin is the most handsome guy in his class - the fact that they were best friends never stopped Taehyung from saying that out loud. The fact is that Jimin has perfectly smooth skin, deep dark brown eyes and all his features would easily conquer anyone. Taehyung doubts that anyone would dare to photoshop his friend. "The studio of pictures that will be used is rented by the University during the entire three months. Seeing that getting a photographer might be a little difficult, I'm giving you the last twenty minutes of class to get in touch with any photographers you know and also help your friends with no one in mind to find one. You have three days to find a photographer." Taehyung turns in his chair to look at Jimin like his whole life depends on it, but a small smirk is already playing on the older boy's face. "Sorry, Taetae," he says, taking his phone out of his pocket, "I'm the one getting Yoongi-hyung in this one." Min Yoongi is also one of Taehyung's best friends - even though he's more friends with Jimin than with Taehyung - and an ex-student from their University. He left college as soon as he got a job as a professional photographer, because the man who hired him was smart enough to know that the fact that Yoongi hadn't graduated yet didn't decrease his talent. He was the best photographer Taehyung knew in person. "That's not fair, Jiminie!" Taehyung complains. "At least let me call him first and try!" "No," Jimin says, frowning, the cell phone on his hear, waiting for Yoongi to pick up "Yoongi-hyung's pictures are the best and I need a good grade in this- Oh, hi, Yoongi-hyung." "Don't listen to him, he's a liar!" The younger boy tries to yell to the cell phone, receiving a death glare from his professor. "No, hyung, that's just Tae being desperate," Jimin tells Yoongi, winking at Taehyung and being forced to dodge from a eraser as result, "Listen, hyung, we are going to make a photoshoot for our new project, and we need to find ourselves one photographer each. Would you like to be my photographer?" Taehyung knows what answer he would have gotten. He also knows what answer Jimin is going to get. "It's for free!" He screams in a last attempt to convince Yoongi, but Jimin puts his arm in front of his body, stopping Taehyung from getting any closer. "Really?" Jimin says, his face lightening up, and Taehyung knows he lost, "Thank you so much, Yoongi-hyung! And, by the way, since I'm a really good friend, you wouldn't have another photographer to make Tae's photoshoot, would you?" Taehyung fixes his glance on Jimin while the older boy waits for Yoongi's answer. He raises an eyebrow with the answer and hands Taehyung his cell phone. "Yoongi-hyung wants to talk to you." Taehyung squints, but complies, "Hello, Yoongi-hyung. To what do I own the honor?" "Don't get me started, Taehyung, I'm not in a good mood," Yoongi answers, his voice sounding slightly tired, "I've got the name and number of a good amateur photographer, but I need you to agree with me in a few things before I give it to you." "Proceed." "First of all, I need you to be entirely professional during the photoshoot," the elder starts, "He has no patience for people who joke around while working. Second of all, you cannot, under any circunstances, flirt with him." "I am offended," Taehyung says, pulling out his actor side, "How could you think I would flirt with my photographer?" "After you assure me those thing won't happen, I will tell you." "Okay, you have my assurance. Now, tell me." "There are a few things you need to know about him. Full name: Jeon Jungkook. Life dream: becoming a renowned photographer. Fact: incredibly handsome. Curiosity: loves to break people's hearts." Taehyung blinks, a crooked smile on his face, "How about we re-do that conditions of what I can't do?" "Taehyung." "Is he into guys?" "Taehyung, pass the phone to Jiminie, will you?" Taehyung raised an eyebrow, "Why is he Jiminie and I'm Taehyung?" In front of him, Jimin opens an evil smile, which Taehyung only ignores as Yoongi's voice reach his ears again, "Pass the phone, Taehyung." "Wait, answer my question first, hyung," Taehyung asks, "Come on." He hears as Yoongi sighs heavily on the other side of the line as a sign of giving up before he answers, "Yes, he is into guys." "I'm gonna need his number now." "I'm talking to him first, checking if he's available to help you," Yoongi says, "As soon as I get an answer, I will let you know. Now, pass the phone to Jiminie, please." Taehyung complies, not even surprised by the fact that Yoongi accepts to be Jimin's photographer so easily, and neither for the fact that he doesn't trust Taehyung close to his photographer friend. After all, Taehyung might or might not have a habit of flirting with handsome people, but that's not something he feels ashamed for, not even for a bit. Jimin and Yoongi's friendship is way less complicated than Taehyung thought it would be. They have known each other for years, but, in the begining, Jimin had a huge crush on Yoongi - which was unfortunate, because Yoongi had, and still has, a huge crush on his best friend, Jung Hoseok, who also happens to be a really nice person. Years after Jimin assured Taehyung that his crush was gone, though, Jimin and Yoongi had a moment away from their friends, and something happened between them. A kiss happened. In the begining, Taehyung felt kind of betrayed, because he didn't find out about the kiss from Jimin, but from Yoongi. He remembers hanging out with Yoongi, Jimin and Hoseok and talking about Jimin's new random crush. Taehyung was joking, talking about how his best friend was way too afraid to confess because he couldn't even be a good kisser, and then, next thing Taehyung could remember, Yoongi was muttering a low "uh, sorry, but he is" and they were breaking in a chaos of yells about how Yoongi could possibly know that. However, that happened almost two years ago, so Taehyung wasn't worried about Jimin having or not feelings for Yoongi anymore. It would be hopeless, even if he did. Yoongi had eyes for Hoseok, and for Hoseok only. As soon as Jimin hangs up, he turns to Taehyung, an eyebrow raised, "So, Yoongi-hyung told me that your photographer will possibly break your heart." "He won't break my heart," Taehyung protests, "I haven't fallen in love for, like, forever, and I'm not falling now. Not for my photographer." "Whatever you say, Taetae," Jimin says, smiling a little bit, "I'll be here to pick up the destroyed pieces of your heart." "He won't break my heart." "What if he's cute?" "Still, Jiminie." Jimin shrugs, a playful smile dancing on his lips, and Taehyung doesn't even bother to make another comment. Everyone in class seems focused on talking to someone by the phone or typing in their cellphones, possibly searching for photographer who might live near them. Taehyung is happy that he knows Yoongi-hyung, otherwise, it would be clearly difficult to find someone to take two months of pictures for free. They only have one more class together during the next hours, but they do meet each other very often in the corridors, and, then, at the end of the day, they return to their shared apartament, which has started to become a little too small for both of them, but that still seems good enough. "Yoongi-hyung texted me," Jimin says at some point, when Taehyung is turning the kitchen cabinet upside down, searching for something easy to make so he can eat fast, "Jeon Jungkook-ssi accepted to be your photographer. He's meeting you in two days. Here's the number so you can talk to him." He hands Taehyung his cell phone and the younger boy takes a look at it, laughing at Yoongi's message. Right after the number, there are the words "stay away from trouble, stay away from flirting with jeon jungkook. he's younger than you, so behave". Taehyung doesn't call Jungkook until the next day. When he does, the voice that says a calm "hello" on the other side of the line sounds younger than him, but not that much younger. "Hi," Taehyung says, "It's Kim Taehyung, Yoongi's friend." "Oh, hello, Taehyung-ssi," the boy answers, "I see Yoongi-hyung has told you I accept to be your photographer already." "Yes, he did." "I have to warn you about one thing, thought," Jungkook says, and Taehyung frowns. "Yeah?" "I'm used to taking pictures of the nature, and not of human beings. It might sound strange, but it's my comfort zone," he explains, "I'm leaving it, though, because Yoongi-hyung said you have no one else to call, and he's your friend, so there's no reason for me not to accept." Taehyung presses his lips, "Uh, okay? Can I- uhm, can I see a few of your pictures?" He hears the boy stopping, "Why? To prove they're good?" "No, I'm just curious," Taehyung confesses, "Every photographer I met took pictures of people. I'm kinda wondering how pictures of pure nature would look like." "Oh, well," Jungkook says, "I guess that's okay. Where do you want to meet tomorrow, anyway, Taehyung-ssi?" "Call me hyung," Taehyung first asks, "And I know a good coffee shop nearby. I suppose you're okay with meeting me there?" "Yeah. Text me the address. I'll send you my pictures." "Alright, Jungkook-ah." He hears a sharp breath, "Bye, Taehyung-ssi." "Hyung." Taehyung corrects him, and he can almost imagine a boy one or two years younger than him rolling his eyes. That's usually his effect on people." "Bye, Taehyung-hyung." "Bye, Jungkook-ah." The next day, Taehyung finds himself in his favorite coffee shop. He takes a sip of his coffee, restlessly drumming his fingers on the table and taking fast glimpses at the door. He wonders how Jungkook looks. Yoongi said he's just younger than Taehyung, and his voice didn't sound too young. The pictures that he had sent Taehyung were still in his head, all the work it must have damanded since he wasn't even a majoring amateur. He was just an amateur, and his pictures were pretty good for one. The door bell ring while Taehyung takes another sip of his drink and he glances up. There's a guy entering, a brown-haired boy with brown eyes and dressed up with a blue jeans, a simple grey t-shirt and a leather jacket. Around his neck, hanging next to his chest, Taehyung can see a professional camera. That's Jungkook. And he's gorgeous. Taehyung swallows hard, feeling the coffee burning up his tongue and throat. He coughs a bit, covering his mouth with his hand for a second. The small movement is enough to attract Jungkook's attention to him. Taehyung waves with his hand, telling him to come closer, and he notices a short grin in the younger male's face as he approaches a Taehyung who's still trying to recover from the sudden swig of coffee. "Ugh," he mutters to himself before Jungkook is close enough to hear, "You're ridiculous, Kim Taehyung." "Taehyung-ssi?" Jungkook asks as he gets to the side of the table. "The one and only," says Taehyung, getting up to shake Jungkook's hand, and his voice sounds too hoarse for his own taste, "It's nice to meet you in person, Jungkook-ah." "Equally, Taehyung-ssi." "Hey, haven't I told you that 'hyung' is fine?" The elder questions him, and Jungkook wrinkles his nose a bit. It's adorable. "Okay, hyung." "Here, let's have a seat." Jungkook sits in front of him and Taehyung supports his elbows on the table, looking at him. He tries not to be too obvious about the fact that he finds the boy way too gorgeous to be on the behind the camera. "So, Jungkook-ah," he starts, pretending he doesn't notice as Jungkook raises an eyebrow, "I really liked your pictures. They are some of the best I've seen, a few of them being better than Yoongi-hyung's." A small smile drafts on Jungkook's face, "Now, that's just too much, Taehyung-hyung." "And why is that?" "Yoongi-hyung's pictures are literally my favorites," Jungkook says, "He's one of the most talented photographers I know, even among the famous ones." Taehyung squints slightly. He remembers the exact description given from Yoongi about Jungkook: someone who shouldn't be messed with, whose personality wasn't easy to deal and who loved breaking other people's hearts. It almost makes Taehyung laugh out loud. The boy in front of him is the exact opposite of all of that. "Well, let's make you better than him with this photoshoot, then," Taehyung suggests, opening a boxy smile, "The theme is fantasy. The scenarios and costumes will be available for us to choose tomorrow. The ones who get to the class early get the best ones, so we should go a few minutes before the class actually starts-" "Wait," says Jungkook, "You study there. How come you're going to go early from one class to another?" "I'll just ditch the last ten minutes of my Corporal Conscience class." Taehyung explains. He sees a fast glimpse of something that he doesn't know going through Jungkook's face, but it goes away just as fast as it comes. He nods slowly, putting a hand below his camera and placing it on the table. "My camera might just be our biggest problem," Jungkook says, "It is professional, but it's not even close to being good enough for a photooshot. I hope you don't mind me borrowing Yoongi-hyung's camera." "Yoongi-hyung would borrow you his camera?" Taehyung asks, widdening his eyes. Yoongi had two cameras, a new one and an old one, but he took equally care of both of them, and he would always try to cut Taehyung's hand off if he tried to touch it. Borrowing the cameras was something that Taehyung couldn't imagine Yoongi doing. Jungkook shrugs, "He did it before, I don't see why not again." "Wow," Taehyung laughs, "He must trust you a lot. And I, trusting those who Yoongi-hyung trust, am looking foward to working with you." The younger male smiles softly, "Thanks for the trust, Taehyung-hyung." "Now," the elder starts, friendly, "Since I took your time for you to come here, order whatever you want. I will pay for it." "It isn't necessary..." "Come on, Jungkook-ah," Taehyung insists, "It's nothing much, just the first step for the actor- sorry, model, in this case, and photographer to connect." Jungkook's eyes are fixed on him in a way that would make a lot of people uncomfortable, but Taehyung is quite resistent. Finally, Jungkook's expression softens and he nods, letting out a low, fast laugh, which Taehyung can't help but find adorable, "Okay. But I will pay next time." Taehyung resists the urge to bite his lower lip at the words "next time", calling the waiter without making any comments. When he asks what Jungkook wants, the younger boy looks at him and smiles, "Suggest something." "Pardon?" "You've choosen this place, I suppose you came here before," Jungkook explains, "So suggest something, I'll take any coffee you say it's good enough." Taehyung blinks, turning to the waiter, "A Cappuccino, please." "I must say I'm surprised," Jungkook comments, smiling kindly as the waiter nods and moves away, "That you're the Cappuccino kind of guy." "Yeah?" Taehyung asks, finding the comment incredibly funny, "What coffee kind of guy do I look like?" "I don't know," the younger male says, shrugging a bit, but Taehyung's glance tells him that he won't take that for an answer, therefore, he proceeds, "Don't take that as an offense, okay? You just really look like the kind of person who would order a Frappuccino." Taehyung gasps, "I am offended." "Hyung..." "Offended that you think I would be offended by that," the elder completes, smirking, "Yes, Jeon Jungkook, I am the Frapuccino kind of guy. You just don't seem like someone who would order it, so I went for the second best of the house." Jungkook doesn't say anything, because his Cappuccino arrives at this moment, and he quietly thanks the waiter and looks down at his cup of coffee, but there's the trail of a smile on his lips. Taehyung finds himself slightly staring, and he looks away as soon as he can, not wanting to seem creepy and scare the photographer away. His coffee is already forgotten in front of him. "So, Jungkook-ah," he starts, discreetly, "How did you and Yoongi-hyung meet?" "He's friends with my best friend, Kim Seokjin," Jungkook tells him, taking a sip of his coffee, "Ever heard of him?" "Uh, I guess not?" "Well, Yoongi-hyung must have forgotten," he says, "Anyways, Jin-hyung and Yoongi-hyung met a while ago, when Jin-hyung attended to the same University as you do now. They have been friends since then." Now, that's interesting. Taehyung and Yoongi don't hang out all the time, so the younger male always kind of wondered who were Yoongi's other friends. "So, you're friends with him too?" Taehyung asks, "Or you two only know each other because of your other friend?" "I'm friends with him too, I guess," Jungkook says, "He treats me the same way he treats Seokjin-hyung, at least." Taehyung has to contain the urge to ask a few more questions. He has known Yoongi for long enough to know that he isn't the kind of person who would be friends with bad people, so it simply didn't make any sense that he was friends with Jeon Jungkook after everything he told Taehyung about the boy. In the following minutes, Taehyung and Jungkook only talk about the phothosoot. Taehyung tells the boy his ideas and listens to every tip Jungkook has to him, quite enjoying talking to him and settling everything so nicely. He must admit he was waiting something rude and closed, but Jungkook is really open-minded and friendly. Taehyung decides he likes him. After one hour, Jungkook gets a text. He checks the phone quietly and frowns. "Is something wrong?" Taehyung asks. "No," Jungkook answers, "It's Jin-hyung. He's studying in America for a while because of a scholarship and he was supposed to come back in three months, but the trip is going to happen in a week. Change of plans." "Is that a bad thing?" the elder asks. Jungkook looks up at him, and, for a moment, Taehyung thinks he's going to say yes, "No, it's not. Just a surprise." Taehyung nods, not convinced, but not meaning to push, "Is he an Art Major?" "He's majorying in Art, yeah." "And what about you, Jungkook-ah?" he finally asks. "Are you majorying in something?" "No, I'm not," Jungkook answers, moving his fingers in circles on the table, "I was going to be an Art Major as well, but I decided to leave this for the next year." "So, you take amateur pictures for living?" The younger boy laughs softly, "I wish I did. Actually, no. My amateur pictures get me enough money to do nothing, so I work part time at a flowerstore nearby." "Where is it?" A smirk appears in Jungkook's lips as he supports his back on the chair, glancing at Taehyung by behind his eyelashes, "Curious much, hyung?" Taehyung can't help but smirk as well, "Is that a bad thing, Jungkook-ah?" "I suppose not," Jungkook says, and he moves away a bit, getting up, "I have to go now, hyung. Thanks for the coffee. I will be at the University by the morning." The elder blinks, a tiny glow of amusement in his eyes, "I will see you there, Jungkook-ah."
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Taehyung wakes up the day next with the sound of Jimin's voice telling him that he is late. It's not a surprise, really, because Taehyung might have turned off his phone during the night just so the alarm wouldn't ring by the morning. His Drama Class isn't going to happen before ten a.m, and it's still seven a.m when Jimin wakes him up. "You're not ditching the first classes, Kim Taehyung," Jimin says, removing the pillow that Taehyung tries to use to cover his face, "You have to wake up." "Why?" Taehyung asks, his voice thicker than ever. "Because you chose those classes." "I'm un-choosing them." "You're ridiculous. Get up, come on." Taehyung opens one eye, "No." Jimin squints, but he turns around and moves away. Taehyung sighs in relief, burrying his face back in the blankets and closing both of his eyes. He hears the distant sound of the water tap being turned on and freezes. Jimin wouldn't dare, would he? Taehyung doesn't need to bother to think about it for too long, because, in the next seconds, he feels a cold amount of water overruning the blankets and touching his skin. He yells, jumping out of bed and widening his eyes to Jimin, who is currently looking at him with a satisfied grin. Taehyung's hair hasn't been hit, but his neck and shirt are wet now, and the cup in Jimin's hands is empty. "I will give you three seconds before I go running after you," Taehyung tells him. Jimin smirks, "Does that include the seconds I will take to put the cup somewhere safe?" Taehyung squints, "Why are you in such a good mood? Got a text from Yoongi-hyung or something?" "You suck, Taehyungie," Jimin says, and it's Taehyung's turn to smile, "Actually, I'm in a good mood because of a text, but not for me. For you." The younger boy frowns, looking at the chair by the side of his bed, where his cellphone should be. It isn't there. He looks at Jimin again, only to find the phone in his best friend's hands. "Park Jimin, what did you do?" "You got a text, I told you to wake up, you didn't," Jimin explains, calmly, handing Taehyung his phone, "So I answered your crush." "My-" Taehyung starts, widening his eyes, "Oh, no, you didn't." He doesn't bother to send an evil glance to Jimin as he hears his friend laughing. He clicks on his phone, opening the texts, and searchs for Jungkook's chat, reading the messages quickly. From Jungkook-ah: good morning hyung To Jungkook-ah: morning jungkook-ah i'm looking foward to seeing you today ;) "Oh, yeah, and I'm the one who suck, right?" Taehyung asks out loud, causing Jimin to burst out in laughs. He knows very well that Taehyung's way of flirting isn't that. He's subtle and he definitely doesn't text people saying "I'm looking foward to seeing you today" with a blinky face. He notices, with some worry, that Jungkook didn't answer. He might not have seen it, but he might have ignored it as well. If Jimin screwed his chances with Jungkook, Taehyung is ready to eliminate him from the face of the Earth. "Relax, Taetae," Jimin says, "You're gonna meet with him in a few hours, anyway. Now, come on. We have to get ready for class." This time, Taehyung doesn't protest - not because Jimin is telling him to go, but because he suddenly feels anxious for the next few hours, and an anxious Taehyung isn't a sleepy Taehyung. "Fine," he says, "You do realize I'm going to do worse with your texts, right?" Jimin sticks out his tongue, raising his cellphone in front of his face, "I challenge you to reach this little thing without me near it. Taehyung knows it's truth - he can never find Jimin without the damn phone in his hands -, but he will find a way. He quickly moves to brush his teeth, take a fast shower and get dressed. Somehow, the fact that he is going to meet with Jungkook leads him to choose better clothes than usual, which brings him to his best collar V shirt, his favorite blue jeans and his newest coat. Right when he emerges at the outside of the room, where Jimin is already waiting for him, his best friend checks him out for a few seconds and has the decency to hide a laugh by covering his mouth with his fist. "You're the worst best friend ever," Taehyung states, walking by Jimin's side by the corridor. There are multiple rooms whose doors are opening as the rest of the students leave, but there are also those who won't be opened in the next hours because their owners will be sleeping, and Taehyung envies them. "Or am I the best?" Jimin questions, smiling. "Nah, definitely the worst." They walk a few more time talking about random stuff, because, as Taehyung came to know with time, he can never run out of things to talk about with Jimin. Perhaps their friendship reached that point where everything is interesting since it's the two of them talking. Taehyung's first classes don't have Jimin on it, so, yeah, he might get bored and half-sleep in half of them, but he never completely closes his eyes, too afraid that, if he do, something actually interesting is going to happen. He actually loves Art, but now, as a sophomore, the classes that seemed nice when he was a freshman suddenly start to look like a blurr of nonsense. He wants to feel the actual art, the emotion of acting or painting, and there's only a limited number of classes that can give him that, so he keeps all his energy to them. During one of his classes, he receives a text. He doesn't even thinks it might be from Jungkook until he checks and sees the younger boy's name on his screen, followed by a very different text from what he imagined: From Jungkook-ah: equally, tae-hyung :) Taehyung catches his breath, bitting the inside of his cheek. He can tell that Jungkook is either going to be the death of him or the best thing that happened to him in months. Hours pass and, then, finally, he leaves his Corporal Conscience class to find Jimin waiting for him on the corridor. They head to the spot of the college that seems closer to the stairs, where Jimin said Yoongi will meet with them, and wait. "They've arrived," Jimin says, checking his phone, "Yoongi-hyung said they're coming upstairs now." Taehyung glances from the top of the stairs, finding Yoongi and Jungkook arriving in less than three seconds. Jungkook is wearing the same leather jacket from the day before, but his new shirt is a lilac t-shirt and he's wearing black jeans. Taehyung recognizes the camera in his hands as Yoongi's old camera. "Hi, Yoongi-hyung," Jimin greets happily as they approach, turning to Jungkook with a friendly smile, his eyes small, "Hi, you must be Jungkook-ssi. I'm Jimin." "Hey, Jiminie," Yoongi says. "Hi, Jimin-ssi," Jungkook says, "It's nice to meet you." "It's nice to meet you too!" Jungkook turns to look at Taehyung, who raises an eyebrow with a smirk threatening to break into his face, "Hey there, Jungkook-ah." Something about Jungkook's smile changes as he answers, "Hi, hyung." Taehyung can see Yoongi contorting his face with the minor interaction, but, as the elder mentions nothing, neither does he. If Yoongi didn't want Taehyung to flirt with Jungkook, he would have to tell Taehyung the real reason, because his history didn't seem at all truthful so far. Taehyung and Jimin calmly lead Jungkook and Yoongi to the class. They can already see other classmates appearing with photographers by their side. Taehyung notices the slow blink of hesitation in Jungkook's eyes as he sees them. "Something wrong, Jungkook-ah?" Jungkook shakes his head, smiling weakly, "No, hyung, I'm fine." "Are you sure?" Taehyung insists, not trying to push, but also not willing to let go that easily, "Because, you know, these guys might look like they're a bunch of badass photographers, but I would bet all my money in the fact that you're better than half of them." The younger boy glances at Taehyung with an expression that the elder can't quite tell what means, though he should admit he is kind of hypnotized by it. Jungkook's eyes hold a tiny shine and his lips are pressed in a line, like's he's wondering wether he should or not answer. "Thank you, hyung," he finally says, and Taehyung simply nods before they enter the class. The desks and chairs are all put together at the right corner of the class, because, at the left one, there's tables with lots of outfits on it. It's a bunch of ecentric colors, a mix of every color Taehyung would never put together. There are already some of his colleagues who are taking a look at it, choosing their favorite things. Taehyung walks slowly to the tables with Jungkook by his side, his eyes moving carefully as he observes every piece of outfit. Yoongi, who is now just a bit away from him, leans to grab something on the edge of one of the tables: a small accessory made of velvet, with circles drawned all over it. A choker. Taehyung expects him to handle Jimin that, but all he does is turn towards Taehyung and stretch it to him. "You can't be serious, hyung," Taehyung says. "I thought you said you trusted my judgment a while ago?" Yoongi questions, raising an eyebrow, and Taehyung can't deny that. "Yeah, but a choker-" "I don't know, hyung," Jungkook interrupts, and Taehyung takes a second to notice that he is talking to him, "I think Yoongi-hyung is right. It might look really good." Taehyung sighs. He never thought the day would come where he would accept wearing a choker, mainly to a photoshoot, but he finally takes the accessory from Yoongi's hands, who returns to helping Jimin within a second. Taehyung doesn't really take a big amount of time to pick his outfit. He must admit he's got a large mesure of vanity inside of him, but not enough for him to procrastinate while selecting the things he's going to wear at a photoshoot that he doesn't even want to do. Jungkook's help is really useful, seeing the fact that the younger boy's sense of fashion is admirable. "I think you will look good with it," Jungkook says, pointing at a pair of earings, and Taehyung laughs softly. "You think way too highly of me," he accuses. Jungkook shrugs, "I don't think so. It's not my fault you look like someone who can pull off anything." Taehyung smirks, but he doesn't say anytyhing. Somehow, he is unsure about how to react when Jungkook flirts with him, and he must assign the responsability of that to Yoongi. Perhaps, if the elder hasn't made him so certain that there was something wrong with Jungkook, he would be able to act normal - which, for him, meant flirting, actually flirting, and not simply smirking lightly or exchanging a few words. He doesn't take much of his time to pick the rest of the clothes. It's not that hard, really, because he has some idea of what he's doing. His fashion sense isn't the best, but it also isn't the worst. When he's done with it, his professor puts a note on each one of the outfit pieces with his name, making sure it will be reserved. Surprinsingly, Taehyung and Jungkook are the second duo to finish picking up the outfit, therefore, they still have to wait for the others. Jimin and Yoongi seem to be having a nice arguing, trying to find out what will look better for camera. "So," Taehyung starts, trying to find something to talk about with Jungkook, "I didn't want to say anything, but you look like someone who could easily be in front of the camera, instead of behind it. What made you like photography rather than modeling?" Jungkook shrugs, "I just like it. Capturing things with the camera, marking some things till forever, you know? You can erase beauty in person, but you can't erase the beauty of someone or something in a picture. Once the picture is ready, you can't change it. It will be there forever, just like that." "Like immortality." Jungkook glances at him, blinking, "Yeah. Like immortality." "Kind of like plays," Taehyung tells him, "Like Romeo and Juliet. The actors aren't the same ones that acted the first time of Romeo and Juliet, and even the history suffered changings, but the history? The point? It won't die. It will go down on time and it won't be forgotten." "It's a nice way to think," the younger male says, smiling lightly, "So, modeling isn't your thing either?" "Not in a million years." "You look like someone who would do better in front of the camera than in the front of an audience, though," Jungkook says, and Taehyung is too distracted into talking to him to notice the venom that scapes within that words. "I guess it's just not my thing." They don't talk much after that. They discuss the theme of the phothosoot and the pictures model, but that is only up until the professor tells everyone the time is over and the photographers have to go away so the students can head to their next class. "I will see you tomorrow, Jungkook-ah," Taehyung says. "Okay, Tae-hyung," Jungkook says with a smile, "I will see you tomorrow." The elder pretends he doesn't see Yoongi's disapproval look as he leaves, because that's just easier for him.The next morning arrives fast. First day of photoshooting goes basically like every other day. Taehyung procrastinates for a few time before being literally dragged out of his bed by Jimin, and then he gets himself dressed and walks to class. His first classes could be a lot more interesting, but then, he has a free period before break, and his photoshoot session won't begin until the next class, so he takes his time to walk through the hallways and kill some minutes at the cafeteria. There's other students gathering around tables, studying, and he must admit he feels a little bit bad for not using his free time for academic purposes. Therefore, he takes his cell phone out of his pocket and starts looking for tips for someone who's about to participate of their first photoshoot - and he finds himself amazed that there are actual answers to that. At some point, his cell phone emits a buzz and Hoseok's name appears on his screen. From Hobi-hyung: taeeeeeeeeeeeee Taehyung smiles lightly before typing an answer. To Hobi-hyung: hobiiiiiiiiiiii From Hobi-hyung: honorifics tae To Hobi-hyung: hobiiiiiiiiiiii² From Hobi-hyung: okay fair listen i heard jungkookie's taking the pics for your photoshoot To Hobi-hyung: yeah he is Taehyung is about to type something else, actually excited to talk about that with Hoseok, who won't judge or warn him about Jungkook like he is some kind of criminal. Before he gets the chance, though, another text from Hoseok arrives - that one causing him to frown. From Hobi-hyung: yeah that's not a good idea That does it. Taehyung is officially annoyed. He is aware that he is their youngest friend, but he most definitely isn't a child, therefore, he can very well make his own decisions, not needing the aproval or warn of anyone, thank you very much. He doesn't type his annoyance, though, because he is not one to get Hoseok mad over something like that. To Hobi-hyung: he's a heartbreaker, huh he's going to tear my heart apart From Hobi-hyung: yoongi-hyung wasn't lying when he told you that To Hobi-hyung: don't worry hyung it is only professional He clicks on his phone, turning it off quickly, because he loves Hoseok and all of his friends, but he isn't exactly in the mood for that much drama. Happily, Jimin hasn't been affected by their warnings, and is the one friend Taehyung can count on to talk about Jungkook, although he almost everytime gets provoked because of having a crush. The rest of his free time goes just as it comes; faster than he thought it would. He goes back to class, just so he can find all of his excited class mates waiting for their professor. Jimin is already there, but not one photographer. Just students. Taehyung goes to his best friend, raising an eyebrow. "Hi, Jiminie," he says, "Where are the photographers?" "You mean where is Jungkook?" Jimin teases, and Taehyung looks blankly at him, "They are waiting for us at the studio already. The equipment took a bit of time to be placed, so the professor told them to go first." Taehyung nods, "What about the professor? Where is he?" Just as he ends up asking his question, the professor shows up at the door. He looks in a bad mood, but maybe that's just his natural face; Taehyung can't really tell. It doesn't take much time before they head to the studio. Taehyung and Jimin talk on their way, never running out of things to say. After all the time they spent being friends, finding something to talk about turned into something not only easy, but spontaneous. It was during one of that conversations, simply taking a look at the town, that Jimin told Taehyung about his crush on Yoongi. It was also in one of those that Taehyung told Jimin about his first - and last - one night stand. And it was also in one of those that Jimin told Taehyung "you're my best friend" for the first time, and it never stopped being truth. At the studio, Taehyung kills a few minutes just to take a look around. The cameras are all placed, and everything seems ready for a quality photoshoot - at least for one that can be afforded by an University. There are cabins for each photographer and model, each one containing a scenario and a clothe rack with the proper outfit. In a few moments, his eye catches the movement of Jimin going to talk to Yoongi, whose camera seems to be ready, just like himself. Yoongi's posture looks different, but it isn't the first time Taehyung sees him like that: like a professional who's ready to do his work. "Good morning, Yoongi-hyung," Taehyung sings, excitedly. "Morning, Taehyung," Yoongi says, waving with his head to another cabin, "Jungkook is there. He's ready." Taehyung isn't surprised that Yoongi greets him with nothing but that. His friend was never one to be exactly affectionate, and it was fine. Taehyung is pretty much used to being the one Yoongi didn't have a soft spot for. He finds Jungkook waiting for him at the cabin, his camera hanging around his neck, his eyes cautiously analyzing the outfit, like he's trying to figure out how it is going to work out to Taehyung. He finds it kind of adorable, Jungkook's wrinkled nose, his curious and thoughtful expression, his squinted eyes. It almost makes him want to take the camera and take pictures of his photographer. "Hi, Jungkook-ah," he finally says, and Jungkook widdens his eyes as he turns his attention back to him. "Oh, good morning, hyung," Jungkook greets him, smiling a bit, "You ready?" "I guess so," Taehyung answers, "Do you know where I should change?" "I think I heard the staffs of the place saying something about a fitting room right there." And there Taehyung goes, changing his clothes to the ones of the photoshoot. He looks at himself in the mirror and frowns. It's not that he isn't good-looking, but something about the fantasy style makes him feel smaller, like it's just not his thing. He did not put the choker yet. It lays alone on his hand, unconsidered, but Taehyung is starting to think that perhaps it could be a good idea, just to add something to the visual. He decides to wait for it. With the choker still between his fingers, he goes back to the cabin. He walks by a now fantasy-dressed Jimin, who, as expected, looks a lot better than him in that concept. When he gets to his own cabin, Jungkook is already waiting, and he pouts as he sees Taehyung. "Where's the choker?" he asks. "Right here," Taehyung shows his hand, "I don't think it would look that nice, though?" "Oh, come on, hyung," Jungkook insists, "You can trust me. It will look really nice." Perhaps Taehyung is already biased. Perhaps he is being influenced by the fact that Jeon Jungkook isn't only cute, but also really nice. Anyway, he sighs, handing Jungkook the choker, "Help me to put it on, then." Jungkook nods, moving so he stands behind Taehyung and raising his arms to circle the elder's neck with the choker. His fingers slowly find it's way to the buttons on the fabric as he settles it. "Done," Jungkook says, maybe a little too close to Taehyung's ear, before moving away, and the elder pretends the small movement doesn't affect him at all. "Thank you, Jungkook-ah. Shall we start taking the pictures?" Jungkook smiles, "Of course. Let's begin."
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Having Jungkook taking his pictures turns out to be easier than Taehyung thought it would. He is quite pacient, as he photographer, to tell Taehyung everytime something is off place, and, as soon as it gets fixed, he takes the most advantage on that pose, causing them to have an incredibly large amount of pictures before the end of the work day. Happily, Taehyung's professor had explained to his coleagues that the students were in no condition to return to the rest of the classes, since they had a lot of work to do on their first day of photoshooting. On the other hand, that was going to be their last day to spend all of the classes taking care of the pictures; in the following ones, they would have to go all the way to the studio and back in time to attend to the rest of the activities. They are photoshooting for two hours, leaving only one left, when Taehyung's outfit starts to feel a little bit too hot. The air conditioner is turned on; still, it feels like there's nothing but a low ventilator above him. A few hair strands on the roots of his head are starting to stick on his skin with sweat. He watches as one of his classmates, Jung Yerin, walks to the middle of the studio, her hair tangled in her hand as she lifts it up, and he can hear her telling the makeup artist about the heat. The woman nods, calling out someone who must be part of the makeup team, which wasn't exactly needed today, but is still there, and the man arrives with a hairdryer in hands. "Pause," Taehyung calls, and Jungkook puts his camera down, "I'm sweating, I think I have to fix my hair." "Okay," Jungkook agrees, and it's not until he pushes his hair back with his hand, the tips of it slightly wet with sweat, that Taehyung realizes that the heat is actually getting into his skin as well. "Make yourself comfortable, Jungkook-ah," Taehyung tells him, pointing at his clothes - the same as ever, leather jacket, tight pants, "Take off that jacket before you pass out." Jungkook smiles tenderly, "Don't worry, hyung, I'm just fine. Go fix your hair, I'll wait." "Nah," the elder says, walking until he is behind Jungkook and pinning his fingers to the collar of Jungkook's jacket and pulling it slightly down, "Take it off, Jungkook-ah. Seriously. I don't want you to faint just because of a hot look." The younger male looks at him for above his shoulder, a small smirk appearing on his lips, "You saying I look hot with this jacket?" Taehyung half smiles, half winks, "If that's what you heard." He turns around to go fix his hair and his smile gets widder as he hears Jungkook's soft laugh behind him. The hairdresser finishes fixing Yerin's hair just as soon as Taehyung approaches, and quickly tells Taehyung to sit on a small bench. Taehyung tries not to frown too much as the hot air of the hairdryer hits him, but it's a bit too hard. His hair is getting way more fluffy than it was before, and it might even look nicer to the photoshoot, but he is wondering to think if it wasn't a bad idea seeing how in even more heat he feels now. When he gets back to the cabin, he finds Jungkook with no jacket on, leaving his simple, grey shirt at sight. Taehyung smiles at him, "I see someone followed my advice." "Perhaps you should follow one of mine, now," Jungkook says, "Is your choker bothering? Because of the heat or something?" Taehyung blinks, "A little bit. Why?" Jungkook smiles, "Come here," he says, and, as Taehyung complis, he moves his hand to the height of the choker, tangling his index finger on the fabric, pulling it gently, loosening it's gap around Taehyung's neck. The elder keeps his eyes focused on Jungkook, seeing the fact that the movement made them stand pretty close, and observes as the photographer smiles, satisfied, "There," he lets go, "Looks good this way as well, don't you think?" Taehyung can't resist the urge to smirk, "You like it?" Slowly, Jungkook lifts up his chin and his eyes lock with Taehyung's, "I do." "Then I do think it looks good as well." Jungkook gives him one last smile before grabbing his camera once again, "Let's keep this going, then." And so they do. The last hour of the photoshoot goes by just like the first ones, with Jungkook as an example of profissionalism and Taehyung s strenuously trying to keep up. When he takes a look around, he notices that a few of the photographers and students have already given up for the day, sitting on the floor by each other's side and talking. There are about five cabins where people are still working, Jimin's included. Yoongi's eyes are focused and he works like a true professional; it's not for nothing that he got to quit college to wear his job like a glove. It fits him perfectly. Finally, the first day of photoshooting comes to an end, as Taehyung's professor informs them with a satisfied expression, and Taehyung hurries himself to exchange his clothes, going back to his own, which won't cause him to die due the heat. As soon as Jimin and him are over with it, they return to the entrance of the place, where Yoongi and Jungkook are waiting. Most of the photographers and students are already gone, since they no longer have to return to the Universiy today. "I'm tired, I need a drink," Taehyung complains as he approaches his two other friends, and Yoongi raises an eyebrow to him, "Not that kind of drink, hyung. Water, juice, anything." "There is a really nice café nearby with this kind of drink," Jungkook mentions. "You're a life saviour," Taehyung exclaims, lifting up his arms with drama, and he turns to Jimin, "You coming, right?" "Sorry, Taetae," Jimin says, "Gotta go finish two projects for tomorrow." Taehyung groans, fakely hitting on Jimin's arm, "Why haven't you finished this before, you irresponsible-" "Aigoo, stop," the older boy complains, grabbing Taehyung's wrists and moving him away, trying not to smile, "Really, I gotta go. I'll see you later, Tae. Bye, Yoongi-hyung, Jungkook-ssi!" "Bye, Jiminie," Yoongi says, almost at the same time as Jungkook shyly says 'bye, Jimin-ssi'. Jimin turns around and looks above his shoulder one last time, winking at Taehyung, causing the younger male to roll his eyes. He knows his best friend is a lot more dedicated than he is in college, but he kind of wishes that he could be there, because distracting Yoongi without his favorite around is a little bit more complicated. They head to the said café, which contains a really pleasant look, at least at first sight. Taehyung isn't one to expect for great places, and it actually turns out to be one. Mainly because, just when they are about to get inside the place, he hears two familiar voices calling his name. "Hah," he laughs, "Look who's still alive." Walking their way, with smiles on their faces, are the other two best friends of Taehyung, Jung Hoseok and Kim Namjoon. Both of them go to a different University due the courses, but they met way before leaving High School, so it never stopped them from keeping in touch. At the sight of both of them - but, mainly, Hoseok - Yoongi's posture gets more receptive, and he even cracks a smile, "What are you two doing around here?" "We were hopping to get a coffee," Hoseok says, smile all over his face, throwing one of his arms around Taehyung's shoulders, "Happily, now, with the rest of our friends. Jungkookie, it's been a while since I last saw you!" Jungkook smiles timidly, "How you doing, Hoseok-hyung?" "Joyful as always," Namjoon is the one who answers, rolling his eyes, though he still looks happy, "Where is Jimin, though? It's kind of illogical to Taehyung to be somewhere without Jimin." "Hey!" Taehyung complains, too entertained to notice Jungkook's narrowed look as a reaction to Namjoon's phrase, "I'm not glued to Jiminie." "You seem like it." "Aren't you two, too?" Yoongi asks, an eyebrow raised, gesturing to Hoseok and Namjoon, and, if Taehyung didn't know his friend any better, he would think he was standing up for him. "No, we are not," Hoseok pouts, "We separate from each other all the time. Namjoon-ah doesn't care about my anymore, even." "True story," Namjoon says, and moves away as Hoseok tries to hit him, "Anyway, should we get that coffee together?" "Let's go inside!" Taehyung exclaims, excited, and they laugh softly while following him to the interior of the café. In general, the place is quite comfortable, and they settle each other at one of the first tables, grabbing the menus and checking what they can. Taehyung runs his eyes through the pages, looking for the his favorite juice flavor and asking for it with all the possible ice. Namjoon, Hoseok and Yoongi order coffees, and Jungkook simply gestures with his head, claiming that he isn't thirsty. "You were the one to suggest the place, though," Taehyung argues. "Yeah, because you guys were thirsty," the younger male explains, "I'm really not." "Well, if you say so," Taehyung says, "Anyway, if you feel thirsty later on, we can share mine." Jungkook nearly smirks, nodding, "Okay, we can do that," he agrees, standing up slowly, "I'll go to the bathroom and be right back." "Okay." Hoseok and Yoongi's eyes are on Taehyung, full of reproval due the way he already is treating Jungkook, but he decides to ignore it, mainly because Namjoon isn't looking at him weirdly, which means they probably didn't even tell him, and, if it was really that bad, he would know. "So, Namjoon-ah," Yoongi says, raising an eyebrow, and it almost seems like there's a glow of amusement in his eyes before he speaks, "Did you hear who's coming back to Korea?" "No, who-" He stops suddenly, his eyes widening, "No." "Yes," Yoongi affirms, grining, "Kim Seokjin is coming back, Namjoon-ah." Taehyung blinks as he watches Namjoon hiding his face between his arms and groaning, "What is wrong with Kim Seokjin?" "Remember that one night stand that pissed the life out of Namjoon?" Hoseok asks, and Taehyung nods, "It's Kim Seokjin." "No way." Taehyung remembered hearing about that person. Once, Namjoon, who wasn't the kind to have one night stands, headed home with a guy from an opposite University - which ended up as Taehyung's University. The morning after, that guy had looked at one of Namjoon's paintings and told him that it looked lame. When Namjoon told him it was his, he expected the guy to at least try and fix what he said by explaining that he thought it was from another artist or something, but all he did was look into Namjoon's eyes and say "well, I'm sorry, but your art is lame." From that day on, Namjoon hated Kim Seokjin, and Kim Seokjin wasn't quite biased of him either. Namjoon took a few opportunities to pass by the University, since Yoongi also happened to be friends with Hoseok, who was his friend, and watch a few parts of Seokjin's plays, only to clap fakely and smile while saying "that was boring" or anything related. It was so childish it made Taehyung wonder how annoying his enemy had to be. "If that jerk comes near me," Namjoon starts to warn as he lifts his head up, "I'm gonna end him." "I'm right here, remember, Namjoon-ah?" Yoongi asks, "Min Yoongi, Kim Seokjin's friend." "I don't get how you're friends with that thing, hyung," the younger male points out, "He's terrible." "Perhaps it's because I didn't sleep with him." "Didn't you, really? Because you sound biased." "Now, you brat-" "Enough, kiddos," Hoseok says, laughing, and Yoongi raises an eyebrow to him, "What, Yoongi-hyung?" "I'm older than you." "It never mattered and never will," the brown-haired boy says, "Now, I'm sure Seokjin must have changed." Taehyung shrugs, "I guess we will find out soon." "What?" Namjoon asks. "He's Jungkook's best friend," Taehyung tells him, "Therefore, he's probably going to pay us a visit at the photoshoot or something. Besides, since he is also Yoongi-hyung's friend, it becomes more likely." "Well, I'm not visiting you guys anytime soon, then." Namjoon finishes saying. At that moment, Jungkook returns to the table and sits beside Taehyung, who can only hide a grin. He likes that Jungkook is the one to choose to sit with him, without him actually having to ask the younger male to. "What are we talking about?" Jungkook asks. "Your best friend is Namjoon-hyung's most hated one night stand," Taehyung informs him, and Jungkook widdens his eyes, looking back at Namjoon. "It's you?" He questions slowly, and Namjoon's mouth drops. "You've heard of me?" Jungkook shrugs lightly, "Never heard your name, but, yeah, I presume I have. The arrogant artist whose art shouldn't get anywhere near Jin-hyung's acting?" Namjoon takes a deep breath, "Is that how that dumbass talks about me?" "The most light part, yeah." Taehyung can't help but laugh at the anger that takes over Namjoon's face. His friend isn't one of getting mad quickly, but talking about the guy who dismissed his art was always a way to bring out the worst in him. "I don't get it, though," Taehyung comments, "If Seokjin is that much of a dumbass, why did you even sleep with him? I mean, you must at least have talked to him for, what, thirty minutes at the club?" "Now, you respect me, you child," Namjoon pointed at him, rolling his eyes, "We talked for more than a hour. We just never mentioned art or anything like that in our talk." "Besides," Yoongi proceeds, smirking lightly as he raises an eyebrow, "Jin-hyung is hot." Hoseok chockes on his coffee and Namjoon widdens his eyes in horror, causing Yoongi to show off a satisfied smile. He turns back to Jungkook, supporting his elbows on the table. "Jungkook-ah," Yoongi says, "You're Jin-hyung's best friend. Am I wrong about him?" Jungkook smiles, looking at Namjoon with an apology in his eyes, "He's hot. Sorry." Namjoon raises his arms in defeat, "I give up. Let's change the subject before I throw up." They do change the subject after that, and it goes by everything - from college to old times to people they know in common. At a certain point, Taehyung notices Jungkook's discreet dry swallow and pushes his juice cup in the younger's direction with his elbow, winking friendly when their eyes meet. He turns back to the conversation after that, but he can't help the smile that spreads his face as he notices the slight decrease of liquid in his cup as Jungkook pushes it back to him. About thirty minutes later, Yoongi sighs, glaring at the clock on the wall, "I gotta go. There's still a lot of work to be done today." "Really?" Hoseok asks, concerned, "I thought they would let you be focused on Jiminie's photoshoot." Yoongi gives him a kind smile, the type of smile that no one but Hoseok gets from him, "They let me use everything to Jiminie's photoshoot, but it results in no money to us, and they need me to gain money. Since I've made no money during the morning, it's my duty to make some during the afternoon." "Aish," Namjoon says, "They're harsh on you." Yoongi shakes his head, "They're really not. I still got time to eat and sleep, and that's all I need. Anyways, I should get going." "We should go too," Hoseok comments, looking at Namjoon, "Professor Kim wanted to talk to us today, remember?" Namjoon groans, causing Taehyung to smile before asking, "What did you do?" "Our project was completely wrong, we have to re-do all of it," Namjoon explains, standing up with boredom, "I must have this time returned one day." "Who knows? Maybe one day." They get up, one by one, pay quickly and head to the entrance of the place. Right when they're saying bye, Taehyung bites his inner lip and talks, "I don't feel like going home yet, though," he says, smirking lightly, "I guess I'll take a walk. Bother to make me company for a few minutes, Jungkook-ah?" Jungkook's eyes get filled with a flash of amusement and interest. It's so attractive that Taehyung almost doesn't notice Yoongi's disapproval glance. "Not at all, Tae-hyung," Jungkook answers, and Taehyung's smirk turns into a full smile, "I've got some free time." "Good," the elder says, turning quickly to look at the rest of his friends. Jimin grins - to what Taehyung only reacts by rolling his eyes, "Bye, everyone." Namjoon laughs, waving his hand, "Behave, Taehyung." "When don't I?" His friends ignore the question, turning around and leaving one by one. Then, finally, it's just Taehyung and Jungkook, and the elder is glad that the weather looks so nice and everyone on the streets still has that healthy and young energy of the middle of the semester. "It kind of reminds me of your pictures," Taehyung comments, starting to walk in the park's way side by side with Jungkook, "The weather and everything." Jungkook smiles as he looks arounds, "It does, doesn't it? I wish I could capture all that. The nature and everything about it." "Just the nature?" Taehyung aks, not bothering to look away after glancing at Jungkook, "Not people?" The younger male smirks lightly, "Who knows? Maybe I could make an exception." "Yeah? To who?" "Don't know," Jungkook comments, not allowing his smirk to disappear, "Who do you think?" Taehyung smiles, "No idea." Jungkook shrugs, "Guess you'll have to figure that out, then." They are walking side by side, near one of the ice cream trailers, when Jungkook's cell phone buzzes, and Taehyung thinks he might have seen a glimpse of the name "Yugyeom" in the screen before the younger male simply rolls his eyes and puts the phone back in his pocket. "Nothing important at the moment?" Taehyung asks. Jungkook smiles, "Not at the moment and not ever. So, did you like the begining of the photoshoot?" "Yeah," Taehyung affirms, "Serving as a model is nicer than I thought it would be, you know? It's like being in a play, but without having to decorate a script and a lot of movementes. You just move according to what your photographer tells you to do and doesn't question it." "Sounds a lot like a sad marriage when you say it like that." Taehyung blinks, staring blankly at him before bursting out in laughs. Jungkook's expression dissolves in a smile as well, seemingly satisfied by making the elder laugh. "You're funny, Jungkook-ah," he says, "I like it." More like "I like you", which he clearly won't say, because, again, Taehyung's way of flirting is more subtle than that. Taehyung's cell phone is the one to buzz this time, and he quickly takes it off his pocket, checking the screen. He sees Jimin's name above the words "come home the projects are going to destroy me i need help" and laughs softly at the text, not even bothering to type back before putting the cell phone back in his pocket. "I have to go, Jungkook-ah," he says, lips still curved on a smile, "But I'll see you tomorrow, right?" "Yeah," Jungkook answers, and he smiles widely as well, "You will."
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
For a week, things go as peacefully as they could. Jungkook takes Taehyung's pictures, and they casually flirt, although not during the photoshoot, because Jungkook does take his job seriously, and Taehyung respects that. Then, finally, at the end of the week, when Taehyung is wrapped by a blanket while watching a movie with Jimin, his best friends receives a text from Yoongi. From Yoongi-hyung: remember jin-hyung? he arrived yesterday he wants to meet my friends get your ass out of that couch and come to the main café you and taehyung Jimin raises the cell phone in front of Taehyung's face and smiles slightly, "Do you think he's gonna call Hoseok-hyung and Namjoon-hyung?" "Most definitely," Taehyung answers, also smiling, "Yoongi-hyung doesn't like stupid fights, he will probably try to force them to make amends." "Which won't come to any results," Jimin says, "I know Namjoon-hyung, he rarely gets mad at someone, but, when he does, he isn't one to forgive easily." Taehyung nods, "Well, anyways, let's get going, we can finish our movie later," he says, "That's gonna be a lot more interesting." Taehyung and Jimin usually don't take a lot to get themselves ready, and today isn't an exception. Taehyung imagines that Jungkook might be there, so he doesn't exactly leaves his place looking bored or anything, he keeps himself as attractive as he can, thank you very much. He isn't one to live to please his crush, but he can definitely use some effort. They leave and walk together to the café. At some point, all the warnings that Yoongi and Hoseok are giving Taehyung about Jungkook come up as a subject, and Taehyung can't help but frown as he notices Jimin's slight concern. "He's not going to break my heart, Jiminie, you know that," Taehyung says, one eyebrow raised. "It's just— We both trust Yoongi-hyung a lot, Taehyungie," Jimin argues, "What reason does he have to lie to us?" "Well, I don't know, but maybe he does have one, you know?" Jimin looks down while walking, shaking his head, "Don't know. Perhaps Jungkook did something and regretted it. It's possible." Taehyung bites his inner lip, "I can ask him." "What?" Jimin asks. "No, Taehyungie, you can't just tell him that Yoongi is saying that. He'll get mad." "You don't know that." "Neither do you," Jimin states, "Don't ask him, okay? Leave things be." Taehyung doesn't want to leave things be. In the begining, it was kind of entertaining, having his friends acting like he was some kind of movie character who needed protection from a really bad villain, but it's slowly starting to grow annoying. Yoongi can either tell him already what Jungkook did, or Taehyung is going to ask it for the search itself. The main café is not far, so they get there pretty soon, and it's the first time Taehyung and Jimin arrive somewhere without talking excitedly. No one notices that, though, because, inside the place, in a table next to the door, Yoongi, Jungkook and a blonde, tall guy who is incredibly handsome and must be the said Seokjin are now having coffee and gesturing while having a conversation. "He didn't call Hoseok-hyung and Namjoon-hyung," Jimin says, weirdly. "No," Taehyung answers, "He did." Just a few meters away, Hoseok is dragging Namjoon to near them, the younger male clearly being taken there against his own will — probably because he wouldn't actually dare denying something to Hoseok and Yoongi, both at the same time. "Look who's here," Taehyung mocks, "I thought you didn't want to see his face, Namjoon-hyung?" "Do you want to die?" Namjoon asks, raising an eyebrow, "I'm here because of this brat of a best friend; nothing to do with that thing in there." "Whatever helps you sleep at night, hyung," Jimin says, and, Taehyung can swear that, if it was him saying that, Namjoon would have murdered him. With Jimin, there's no more than a sharp look. "Let's get inside already, before Yoongi-hyung comes to drag us." And so they do. Yoongi doesn't take long to notice them, and he gestures for them to approach. Jungkook also lifts up his chin, and a small smile appear on his lips as he sees Taehyung. The elder tries really hard not to be affected by that. "Hey, everyone," Taehyung says, happily, turning to the guy sitting beside Yoongi, "You must be Kim Seokjin." "That's right," the guy smiles, and his smile turns out to be really friendly, "But you can call me just Jin. Now let me guess, you must be Taehyung, and you must be Jimin, and you are Hoseok, and you— oh, well, you still exist." Namjoon's eyebrows arche, "I'm not that glad to see your snobbish face once again, either." "How old are you two, twelve?" Yoongi hisses, and Taehyung knows that tone — it's the tone he uses when he's supposed to be respected. "Just sit down and talk like two adults, will you?" Seokjin complies first, eyes still shooting Namjoon with all he has. He sits between Yoongi and Jungkook, leaving an empty seat beside each one of them. Taehyung discreetly slides himself to the seat by Jungkook's side, elbow slightly brushing the younger male's, and they smile quietly to each other. Hoseok sits beside Yoongi, and Jimin sits beside Hoseok, and Namjoon sits beside Jimin. "I heard you were travelling," Taehyung starts talking to Seokjin, anxious to undo the tension among them, "You must be really talented." "Well, not exactly," Seokjin starts, and Taehyung might've heard Namjoon whispering 'he isn't', but Seokjin either decides to ignore him or simply doesn't hear that, "I studied a lot, and I tried all the big roles they offered, until, finally, one worked out, and they liked it. Might as well have been lucky." "Aish, I don't believe that, though," Taehyung argues, "I'm just going to take it like your declaration for being too humble, and understand that you are, indeed, quite talented." Seokjin smiles, "You mustn't be that bad yourself, if you say that with so much conviction." Taehyung shrugs, smiling, "Well, I try." "So, how's the photoshoot going?" Seokjin asks. Yoongi takes a sip of the coffee in front of him before asking, "Quite well, so far. Jiminie has been doing a good work and I haven't heard Jungkook complaining about Taehyung or vice-versa, so the other team must be just as good." Jungkook laughs, "No reason to complain, hyung. Taehyung-hyung is really nice to work with." Taehyung wants to focus on that phrase, he wants to appreciate and thank Jungkook's words, but his friends are getting him so freaking paranoyed that he keeps his gaze on Yoongi, searching for the elder's reaction. Yoongi simply nods. "Bet he is," Yoongi says, and Taehyung can't tell whether he is being serious or mocking him, "Have a lot of good pictures so far?" "I think we have a good amount for the first week, yes," Jungkook answers, jokingly colliding his shoulder against Taehyung's and smiling, "Hyung didn't want a few of the accessories in the first day, but we made it through." "No one likes chokers nowadays, you can't blame me," Taehyung argues, still smiling. Seokjin watches them quietly, and Taehyung nearly thinks he looks more concerned than Yoongi and Jimin. Well, how great. One more. Jungkook's cell phone starts ringing, causing his little play with Taehyung to come to and end, and, when he puts his cell phone in front of his face so he can read the screen, Taehyung sees the name "Yugyeom" once again. "Aish," Jungkook curses lowly. "Who is it, Jungkook-ah?" Seokjin asks, and Jungkook looks at him through his eyelashes. "No one, Jin-hyung." "Oh, No One, my best friend," the elder says, gesturing to the door, "Go pick up, we'll wait." Jungkook looks like he's about to fight back, but there's a lot of looks on him already, so he simply stands up and leaves to the door, picking up his cell phone and almost hissing against it. Taehyung hesitates before speaking, "Who is Yugyeom?" "Jungkook's ex," Seokjin answers, "A good kid, if you ask me, but they didn't work out. Jungkook and other people usually don't." There's a warning in his voice as he says that, and he looks away almost immediately. Okay, now, they're definitely getting under Taehyung's skin. All that drama is starting to make him wish he could just kiss Jungkook in front of everyone and laugh at their faces when they actually work out, but that's not how life works, unfortunately. "If it didn't work out, why does he keep calling Jungkook?" Taehyung asks. "Jungkook broke up with him, Taehyung-ssi," Seokjin says, lifting up one eyebrow, "That's all I can tell you without breaking his trust." Taehyung wants to laugh at that. "Well, for all I know about friendship, you've spoken a lot already," Namjoon says, and he sounds toxic. Seokjin frowns, "Mind your own business." "Why, love?" Namjoon asks, and he almost drips poison, "Got something to hide?" "Don't know, sweetheart," Seokjin strikes back, looking extremely pissed, "Might as well tell you in case you accept to buy a coffe and burn your tongue." "Enough!" Yoongi says, and there's so much authority in his voice that gets them both backing down immediately. Yoongi rolls his eyes, standing up and grabbing his mug of coffee. "I'm going to order one more coffee, and, when I return, I better be sitting on a table full of adults, and not children, or I'm leaving." Most of them can barely blink as Yoongi storms in the balcony's direction. Hoseok jumps out of his seat and patiently follows his best friend, giving his other friends a last pitful look. Jungkook returns to the table in a bit, and he frowns as he notices the table's mood, "What did I miss?" "We just got Yoongied," Taehyung says, "It's an expression for incredibly busted by incredibly mad Yoongi-hyung." Jungkook smiles a bit, "Yeah, been there." "So, what was the call about?" Taehyung asks, supporting one of his elbows on the table. Little by little, Namjoon starts talking to Jimin, and Seokjin starts checking something in his cell phone, "Anything important?" "No," Jungkook answers, clicking his tongue, "Just an ex." Oh, well. He didn't lie. One more reason for Taehyung to trust him. "What did he want?" "He wants me to get back with him," Jungkook explains, rolling his eyes, "Which won't happen, because I'm no longer interested." "No longer interested in him?" Taehyung asks, "Or in dating in general?" Jungkook's eyes travel through Taehyung's face and he smirks softly, "Just him. Not in general." Taehyung hums, "Good." When Yoongi returns, peace is suddenly restaured. They all talk, with the exception of Namjoon with Seokjin or vice-versa, but, somehow, everyone is always included in the subject. At some point, Taehyung believes seing the ghost of Jungkook's hand above his, like he's hesitating before touching him, and, for his sadness, it seems like Jungkook decides that it's too soon, because he brings his hand back to his own lap. After a hour talking, Taehyung stands up to go to the restroom. And, just as he is about to leave it and go back to the table, Yoongi enters. He only gives Taehyung a sided look, and, just because of that, Taehyung waits for him at the sink, his glance sharped. "So, Jungkook isn't exactly a bad person, huh?" Taehyung comments, and Yoongi simply rolls his eyes, "Is that all I'm gonna get? A roll of eyes?" "What would you rather me to do, Taehyung? Or, say, in this case," Yoongi strikes back, "Go, date him, you've got my blessing? How since when do you need anyone's blessing to do anything, huh?" Taehyung frowns. He is used to Yoongi being irritated at him, yes, but that treatment is just too much even for him, "I've known him for a week, it's not about dating him. I want you to be honest with me, tell me exactly why you want me away from him." "I've said it," Yoongi says, "And this is the last time I'm saying it again. Jeon Jungkook is going to break your heart, Kim Taehyung." "I understood that, but— Ugh, tell me why, tell me how you know that, tell me what reasons would you have—" "I've said what I had to say, Taehyung," Yoongi cuts him, "And that's all you're gonna hear from me. I'm sorry." Taehyung shakes his head, incredulous, as he watches Yoongi calmly returning to the table, like their small talk simply didn't exist. He feels annoyed and slightly betrayed. If someone is trying to break his heart, shouldn't his friends start being honest to him about it? How is he supposed to believe that Jeon Jungkook is a bad person, if everything so far has only showed him the opposite? When he goes back to the table, he doesn't sit. He supports an arm on Jungkook's shoulder and leans to talk in a low tone to the younger male, "I bet you like ice cream better than coffee." Jungkook looks at him from the corner of his eyes, "Well, look who already knows me." "Jiminie," Taehyung calls, still not loud, "You're gonna walk back home with Namjoon-hyung and Hoseok-hyung, right?" Jimin frowns, but he nods, "Yes, I am." "Okay. Jungkook and I are going to take a walk, I'll meet you at our place," he says, and he can see the concern in his best friend's eyes, and it hurts to ignore that, but it's what he does as he turns to Seokjin, "It was really nice knowing you, Jin-sunbae!" "Equally, Taehyung." Taehyung turns to Jungkook and smiles, "Shall we go?" "Taehyung—" Taehyung hears Yoongi calling him, but, for the first time in his life, he doesn't pay attention to that. He waits outside while Jungkook pays for the coffee he ordered before Taehyung arrived, and, as soon as the younger male leaves as well, he gives Taehyung a curious look. "What was that about, hyung?" Taehyung sighs, "Let's go grab that ice cream and I'll tell you." The park isn't that far, so they walk. Taehyung asks Jungkook to point out all the things he would take pictures of, and Jungkok walks while pointing. First, a tree that is specially high; then, two squirells sleeping next to each other near the tree; then, one of the clouds on the sky, that is now on the shape of something really looked like an airplane; then, Jungkook turns around and points at Taehyung, smiling. "I like to take pictures of you, hyung," Jungkook explains, "Reminds me of taking pictures of all the other things that matter." And Taehyung is totally not blushing. The ice cream trailer is soon to be seen, and, as soon as Taehyung and Jungkook do their orders and sit together, calmly, at a bench near it, Taehyung starts talking. "I don't know if you know that," Taehyung says, unsure of how to tell it, "But a few of our friends have warned me about you." Jungkook's eyebrows arche, "Warned you about me?" "They say you're gonna break my heart, Jungkook-ah." Jungkook lets out a surprised, incredulous laugh, and stares at Taehyung like he is insane, "Do you believe that?" "No," Taehyung hurries to say, "I just— I don't know, I thought I should let you know. Besides, I was wondering whether you've got an explanation of the reason why they would think something like that." For a few seconds, all that Jungkook does is look at him, his dark, deep eyes starting to burn a hole into Taehyung's head. Then, finally, he lets out a sigh and nods. "It depends. Was it Yoongi-hyung who told you?" "Yes." Jungkook takes a deep breath, "A while ago, Yoongi-hyung and I had— well, something." Taehyung's eyes widden, "Something?" "Something that didn't end well," Jungkook proceeds, "It was kind of heartbreaking in a lot of ways, you know? He was my friend before that, and it was all really awkward for a couple of weeks of finally going back to normal. Fortunately, Yoongi-hyung is an amazing person, and we are like best friends today. It's like nothing ever happened most of time, but— wow, if he's come to the point of telling you that I'm going to break your heart, I guess he fooled me on the 'everything's fine' part." It takes Taehyung a few moments to try and digest that. Yoongi had once kissed Jimin, it wasn't impossible for him to have been in a relationship with someone else while in love with Hoseok, or even before that. "But I thought Yoongi-hyung was always in love with Hoseok-hyung," Taehyung says. Jungkook smiles weakly, "He was," he explains, "Always, right? You're his friend too, you know what I'm talking about. Let's say it was one of the reasons why things simply didn't work." Taehyung nods, gulping, "And— I'm sorry if that sounds like I'm looking in too deep in your life, but how long after Yoongi-hyung was this Yugyeom guy?" "A lot after," Jungkook assures him, "Yugyeom and I broke up six months ago." "Well, that's a small period of time," Taehyung comments, looking down for a second, "Do you still feel something for him?" "No," Jungkook answers, shaking his head slightly, "Guess I haven't in a long time. Look, I know that, with all that Yoongi-hyung must have told you, and the way I'm saying this things, you might be thinking something bad, but, for real, hyung, I've got no mean intentions with you. I want to be your friend, and I won't do anything bad, I give you my word." Taehyung looks into his eyes, and, well, he sees truth. Jungkook is an incredibly photographer, and a really good-looking guy — it isn't even logical for him to be such a good actor as well. Besides, what he says explains it all. Yoongi would have plenty of reasons to want Taehyung away from his ex who didn't work out very well, and so would Hoseok, as Yoongi's best friend. "Okay," Taehyung says, "Okay, I trust you." Jungkook opens a smile full of relief and enthusiasm and stretch out his hand in Taehyung's direction, "Friends, now?" Taehyung smiles, forces his worries to go away — because Jungkook told him what he wanted to know, and it would be stupid of him to still be doubting — and shakes the younger male's hand. "Friends, now."
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
After three weeks receiving Yoongi's death glares, Taehyung decides he screwed up. Actually, he decided so days ago, but, at each time he crosses Yoongi's way and notices how incredibly mad he is, things get worse. Taehyung might not always show it, but Yoongi's friendship is actually really important, and that kind of treatment is slowly getting him worried and down. Jungkook realizes that during their photography session, because he stops taking the pictures and puts down the camera, and there's a mix of concern and confusion in his eyes when he looks at Taehyung. "Hyung," he says, "Is there something wrong? You seem to be somewhere else." "I'm sorry, Jungkook-ah," Taehyung says, rubbing his face, "I'll try to improve it, I just—" "Hey, I'm not giving you a reprimand or anything like that," Jungkook cuts him, smiling gently, "Is there something you need to talk about? We are pretty much advanced in our pictures, ten minutes off won't change a lot." Taehyung chews on his own lips, "There's no need to." Jungkook blinks, and then he lets go of his camera on the ground, and lowers himself until he is sitting on the scenario's cloths, patting the space by his side and gesturing for Taehyung to sit beside him. With a sigh and a small shine on his eyes, Taehyung does so. "What happened?" Jungkook asks, tilting his head a bit. "Yoongi-hyung," Taehyung answers, low tone, and Jungkook frowns, confused, "He won't talk to me since that day, and I'm going from guilty to super guilty already." Jungkook's mouth forms an "O" before he speaks again, "Well, that explains that glares he sent you all week. I don't know if that's a stupid question, but can't you just— I don't know, talk to him?" "I'm not sure if that's a good idea," Taehyung admits, "I've never made Yoongi-hyung that pissed off, and I'm not sure I want to see how he gets when someone talks to him like that." "Isn't Jimin okay with him, though?" Jungkook asks, and Taehyung nods, "Hasn't he told you anything?" Taehyung shakes his head, "I didn't ask. I don't want Jimin to be forced to take sides between his best friends." Jungkook frowns, nose wrinkled, "I though you were his best friend. I mean, he does seem like your main best friend. Isn't that a bit weird that he would have to pick a side, and not simply, don't know, stand by you?" The idea of Jimin not choosing Taehyung was, indeed, ridiculous, but that's the main fact. Jimin shouldn't be forced to choose. "I'll just leave it, for now," Taehyung decides, "If Yoongi-hyung doesn't go back to normal in a few days, I'll talk to him." "Okay, if that's what makes you feel better," Jungkook says, standing up, "If you need me to talk to him, too, I will." Perhaps that would make things easier. If only Jungkook talked to Taehyung instead of the confrontation, that would happen. But Taehyung knows that there is a big chance of pissing off Yoongi even more, seeing the fact that his initial problem was Taehyung and Jungkook's friendship. "It's fine," Taehyung says, "Let's leave it, for now. Let's go back to the photoshoot." Jungkook nods, stretching out his hand to help Taehyung to stand up, "You're the boss." The rest of the photoshoot is a blurr, because Taehyung can't take Yoongi out of his head, mainly when he and Jimin pass by Taehyung's cabin and all that Yoongi does is give Taehyung a cold glare. Something seems to be off place inside Taehyung, like his whole body is telling him to forget about this new friendship with Jungkook and apologize to Yoongi, but how unffair would that be? Jungkook didn't do him any harm; if there's someone wrong in this history, it's Taehyung, not his friends. As soon as the photoshoot comes to an end and Taehyung says a brief "see you tomorrow" to Jungkook before going back to the college with Jimin, he takes a last look at Yoongi. This time, the elder doesn't spare him a glance, simply saying bye to Jimin and leaving. On his way to college, Taehyung snorts and tries to support his head on Jimin's shoulder while walking, which turns out to be less easy than planned, since Jimin is a lot shorter than Taehyung. Jimin laughs softly due his best friend's efforts, "What is it, Tae?" "I'm stressed," Taehyung says, sounding way too spoiled for his own good, "Really, really stressed." "Because of Yoongi-hyung?" Taehyung's lips apart, "How do you—" "Come on, Taehyungie, I'm not an idiot, I've been seeing the tension, okay?" Jimin says, "If it's stressing you so much, just talk to him. You guys talk all the time, what's the difference now?" Now, that's not really truth. Taehyung barely talks to Yoongi — the thing is that, when he does, their conversations can last for hours, but that's the least of his thoughts at the moment. Yoongi won't want to sit with him and talk about starts or galaxies or music while he's that mad, that's something he's sure of. "He won't talk to me," Taehyung states, "You know he won't, Jiminie. I'm literally the only friend of Yoongi-hyung for who he doesn't have a soft spot." Jimin's lips press in a thin line, "You're wrong, Taehyungie." "You know I'm not," Taehyung argues, "He cares about you guys more than about me and that's fine but it also means that he won't listen to me." "Do you want me to talk to him?" "No," Taehyung practically exclaims the words, "I'm not going to drag anyone else into this. Jungkook is a nice person and I've come to realize that, and Yoongi-hyung is just going to have to accept that." Jimin clearly isn't fond of the idea, but he says no more, simply nodding and proceeding to walk by Taehyung's side. The subject changes multiple times before they arrive at the University, and, when they do, they are teared apart by their two different classes, and Taehyung's thoughts of Yoongi follow him from the middle to the end of the class day. Once they get home, Jimin throws himself into their comfortable couch — a little, at least — and takes a deep breath. While so, Taehyung heads to the kitchen, opening the freezed to seek something sweet to withdraw the bitter taste in his mouth. That's when their phone rings. "You're picking it up!" Jimin yells from the couch, and Taehyung grumbles to himself, letting go of the sweet idea of getting a candy and running so he can reach the phone in time. It has rang about six times when he finally picks up. "Hello?" "Taehyungie!" Taehyung smiles against the phone, "Yes, Hobi-hyung?" "Are you and Jiminie busy this weekend?" "We're usually not, why?" "Namjoon and I noticed that we have a tendency of doing a lot of things together— yes, Namjoon, I am aware of the fact that the decision was taken by you, thank you very much— can you believe him, interrupting me while I talk? Anyways, we are going to watch a movie and grab some snacks at Saturday and we were wondering if you and Jiminie wanted to come?" Taehyung smiles to himself. He knows very well the feeling of doing everything with someone, because he and Jimin basically invented that. He looks at Jimin, thrown on the couch, eyes curious on him, and smiles. "Why not? We're going, yes. Your place or Namjoon's?" "Mine. You guys get here are six and nobody gets hurt." "Are you not going to invite us to sleep over as well?" "I've got a job and an University to attend to, Taehyungie. Can't stand visitors no longer. Besides, there's no space." "All apologies because you don't want to find two extra mattresses." "Yeah, like we need two of them for you and Jiminie." "Are you implying that you would put me to sleep in the same mattress as him?" Taehyung forces his best incredulous tone, and Jimin, who has already understood the whole situation, rolls his eyes. "Who would've thought, right? It's not like you have a whole comfortable bed and still crawls into his—" "I had a nightmare that night." "Whatever, Taehyungie. You guys can deny that you're life-twins as much as you want, won't change a thing. Now, gotta go. See you at Saturday." "See you, Hobi-hyung." As soon as Taehyung hangs up, Jimin supports his own weight on his elbow and lifts up an eyebrow, "So, did you just accept going somewhere in my name without asking me?" Instead of answering, an evil grin spreads through Taehyung's face, and he runs to the couch, practically throwing himself on Jimin, getting his best friend to cry out due the sudden weight on him. It's not that he is not used, but Taehyung's jokes never get old or normal. "Get off of me, Taehyung!" "Or what, huh?" "Or I'm going to hand you to the ghosts and the monsters and the killer plants the next time you tell me you had a nightmare!" Taehyung freezes, blinking while he looks down at Jimin, "You wouldn't." "Try me." Taehyung rolls off the couch, receiving a satisfied look from Jimin, and they both pretend they are not resisting the urge to laugh. "So, are we actually going somewhere Saturday night?" "Yes." Jimin nods, jumping from the couch and pointing at his room while he walks to it, "See you Saturday afternoon."*** Saturday arrives pretty fast. Nothing has changed, which means Taehyung is still unsure of how to act with Yoongi — which is too bad, because there is no way on Earth that Hoseok didn't invite him — and things are still upside down. He isn't even sure whether he would like Jungkook to be there or not. Well, he would, but all the odds pointed at that like something that wouldn't get nice results. During the day, he does basically nothing. Jimin goes out to a dance class, so Taehyung spends the day on the couch, watching TV, checking his cell phone from time to time, because Jungkook hasn't texted him today and, well, it's not like they text everyday, but every weekend, so far? Yes. It's about four o'clock and Taehyung is already sleepy of boredom when his cell phone rings, and, well, isn't that the text he was thinking about. From Jungkook-ah: hi hyung He sighs. To Jungkook-ah:hiiiii jungkook-ahhow are you today From Jungkook-ah: 'm fine you? To Jungkook-ah:fine as well Taehyung is about to type something else, just so the subject won't die, but then another text from Jungkook arrives. From Jungkook-ah: so are you going to hobi-hyung's place tonight? There. Of course Hoseok invited Jungkook too. Taehyung wants to feel bad for it, because it's maybe one less step for him to make amends with Yoongi, but he can't help a wave of happiness spreading through his chest with the new information. To Jungkook-ah:yes (:are you? (: Usually, Taehyung wouldn't use smiley faces. Unfortunately, after Jimin's infamous text to Jungkook with Taehyung's name, it has become a habit, mainly because it doesn't seem to bother Jungkook at all. From Jungkook-ah: now i guess i am Taehyung nearly giggles, and then he curses at himself. What a teenage thing to do. To Jungkook-ah:well isn't that a nice coincidence From Jungkook-ah: our whole life seems to be yoongi-hyung will be there btw i was just thinking maybe it's your oportunity to talk to him? It's cute, Taehyung thinks to himself, the way that Jungkook seems to care. To Jungkook-ah:u think i should? From Jungkook-ah: definitely To Jungkook-ah:well then i most likely will From Jungkook-ah: glad for being helpful Taehyung smiles. To Jungkook-ah:you're a natural at it It's already five and a half hour when Jimin arrives, and Taehyung is still texting Jungkook, so they have a run a bit to get dressed fast enough. Jimin complains something about the time Taehyung takes to pick a shirt, but he doesn't exactly bother to answer. He does love his best friend, but his best friend after dancing is a skippable best friend. Hoseok's house is not far, and Jimin and Taehyung take a taxi, which only makes things even easier. In the car, Jimin tries — not only once, not only twice — to talk about Yoongi and about how he can talk to him if Taehyung wants him to, but Taehyung keeps on denying it. He needs to fix his own problems, doesn't matter which one the problem is. Finally, they arrive, and Hoseok receives them with opens arms — literally. Happily, Jimin and Taehyung are both fans of skinship, so Hoseok being clingy all the time isn't a matter. It would be to Yoongi, probably, if he wasn't on his knees for Hoseok by now. In Hoseok's living room, there's four people. Kim Namjoon, the obvious; Min Yoongi, the expected; Jeon Jungkook, the one Taehyung knew would be there; and, then, the surprise, Kim Seokjin. Taehyung's eyes widden a bit as he bows politely to greet each one of the hyungs and Jungkook, "Jin-sunbae, I didn't know you would be here." "Who would have imagined, right?" Seokjin jokes, eyes narrowing to Namjoon's direction, "Hoseok told Yoongi to call me, because, happily, he is nice." There is humor in his voice, but there is also a bitter point: Hoseok is nice, someone in the room isn't. Namjoon isn't. Damn, Taehyung thinks, that's a rivality of a lifetime. "So, you guys are about ten minutes late," Hoseok says, supporting his elbows on Taehyung's shoulders from behind. Taehyung is so used to that he doesn't even notice Jungkook's eyes on him at the moment. "Jiminie had practice today." "Aish, it wasn't my fault only," Jimin says, sitting beside Yoongi, who opens space for him without having to be asked to, "You were pretty busy yourself." "I wouldn't even doubt that," Namjoon jokes, and Taehyung sticks out his tongue. "Okay, then," Hoseok says, moving away from Taehyung so he can place himself in front of all of them, "What are we watching?" Everyone has a suggestion. Jimin is up to anything, but terror movies. Taehyung and Jungkook share the will of watching action. Yoongi agrees with basically anything, because he is pretty sure he will fall asleep during the movie anyways if it isn't his style — and his style is now forbidden by Jimin. Hoseok wants comedy, and, finally, Namjoon wants a documentary. Seokjin doesn't have an opinion. "We won, then, right?" Taehyung asks, pointing at himself and Jungkook, "Two votes for action. Everything else has one point only." Hoseok nods, "Right is right. Everyone, get your asses on your places and I will be right back with our movie," he says, leaving for his room. Yoongi doesn't even move. He lifts up his chin for a second, and then his eyes meet Taehyung's, and Taehyung could swear he never saw something look away that fast before. Jimin keeps his place as well, beside Yoongi, and, right beside him, there's Namjoon. There is one place left on the couch and one armchair. Seokjin silently takes the armchair, and Taehyung isn't fond of the idea of getting the house owner out of comfort, so he bends down and sits on the ground, back against Jimin's knees, and pats the empty spot beside him so Jungkook can go there, and so he does. As planned, Hoseok takes his seat beside Namjoon, who pretends to be mad about it, and the movie starts. It's a nice movie, with nice scenes from the begining, the kind of action that Taehyung actually likes, and not simply watches because it's his duty as an action enthusiastic. Jimin kicks Taehyung's back slightly a few times as a way to warn him to move forward a bit so Jimin can adjust his position and not get uncomfortable, and it works. This time, Taehyung catches a glimpse of Jungkook's expression watching them, and it doesn't seem exactly pleased. He takes the oportunity to make a small move. He sinks a little, back still pressed against Jimin's legs, but now allowing his head to simply brush Jungkook's shoulder. Jungkook looks at the him by the corner of his eye and Taehyung sees the ghost of a smile on his lips. "If you want to rest your head, hyung," Jungkook whispers, "You can feel free to use my shoulder." Taehyung smirks, "Really?" "Really." At that moment, something explodes on the movie, and Taehyung is almost caught flirting as he covers his mouth because of the surprise. Jungkook laughs softly, a sound that Taehyung is growing fond of, and goes back to watching. Then, for the next one and a half hour, that's all they do. Watch a movie, enjoy together, share the snacks that Hoseok brings from time to time. And it's really nice, like they're meant to be like that, all of them. Then, the movie comes to an end, and so does the moment. "What do we do now?" Namjoon asks, stretching his arms and moving his shoulders in circles as he stands up, "Or is it just the movie?" "No," Hoseok says, "How about we play something?" That strikes all of their heads. The first one to talk is Namjoon, and he already seems please with the suggestion, "Truth or dare." "Not in a million years," Jimin protests, shaking his head, "I've screwed up enough with that." "Spin the bottle," Taehyung says, a playful smile dancing on his lips. "Shut up," Hoseok requests. "How about Never Have I Ever?" Jungkook suggests, and all the heads turn in his direction, "Not with the drinking. We can put fingers down each time we lose a point, or something like that." Taehyung blinks, face blank for a second, and then, slowly, a grin appears on his lips, "Let's do this." That's how they end up in a circle in the middle of the living room, ten fingers raised for each one, and with Hoseok explaining the game, rule by rule, just to make sure no one is going to kill each other. When he finally does, he looks around, clearly thinking of himself as the referee. "I'll start," Hoseok says, proudly, "Never have I ever kissed someone I just met." Seokjin and Namjoon roll their eyes before putting one finger down, and so does Taehyung, to what Jungkook barely reacts, except for a small frown. Namjoon looks at Jimin and raises an eyebrow as he younger male keeps all his fingers up, "Do you need me to remind you of Taehyung's last birthday party?" Jimin widdens his eyes, shaking his head quickly before putting one finger down. The rest of them can't help but laugh. "My turn," Yoongi says, and he's got that arrogant smile that makes most of people in the room shiver, "Never have I ever flirted with someone who didn't flirt back." That's supposed to hit Taehyung, he knows it. Taehyung pretends he isn't upset as he puts a finger down, more disappointed at the person than at the question. "I've got someone else in this one, didn't I?" Yoongi asks, one eyebrow raised. He looks at Jungkook as he says that. Taehyung can't help but feel incredulous as Jungkook puts one finger down, an almost irritated look on his face. "Me, now," Jimin says, and he lowkey glances between Yoongi and Taehyung before his next phrase, "Never have I ever broken someone's heart." Taehyung watches as Jungkook tenses, his eyes slowly travelling all the way to Yoongi. The elder bites his inner lip, gulping lightly, and he seems to think for decades before finally talking, "One finger down, Jungkook-ah. You too, Seok-ah." Hoseok opens his mouth to protest, but then Yoongi shoots him a serious look and he imediately complies. Jungkook sighs like he is somehow disappointed as his finger comes down, and he lifts up his head to look at Taehyung. The orange-haired boy looks confused, but he shakes his head and glances away. "Now, I'm going," Taehyung says, and he looks almost evil as he does, "Never have I ever kissed someone who is in this room." "Oh, come on," Namjoon groans, frustrated, as another finger goes down. Seokjin does as well. Yoongi clicks his tongue, seeming annoyed as he loses one point. Taehyung smiles at Jimin, who only squints as he lays one finger. Hoseok sighs, losing it as well. It's almost sad like Taehyung and Jungkook are the only ones not to lose at that phrase. "I'll go again, I have a good one," Hoseok starts, and no one stops him, so he proceeds, an evil smirk dancing on his lips, "Never have I ever kissed someone and regretted it." Jimin is the only one to put a finger down imediately. Everyone's eyes fall on both Seokjin and Namjoon, waiting for it. Seokjin looks at his mortal enemy, lifting one eyebrow up and challenging him, "Gonna lose that one point?" "Why would I?" Namjoon provokes, "You think that poorly of yourself, love?" "I think that poorly of your taste, sweetheart," Seokjin answers, dripping poison. "Well, that's too bad," the younger male says, "Because I have no reasons to put down a finger this time." Things don't actually grow a lot after that. Jimin is the first to lose, then Taehyung, then Namjoon. Hoseok loses next, leaving Seokjin, Yoongi and Jungkook. Finally, Jungkook loses, and then it's just Seokjin and Yoongi, and it's Yoongi's turn to shoot. He grins, and everyone knows Seokjin is screwed, "Never have I ever insulted someone who I slept with." "Cruel, Yoongi," Seokjin says, rolling his eyes while putting his last finger down, "Really cruel." Yoongi smiles, "Sorry, hyung." "Ah, I'm tired," Jimin says, and receives a few nods from the rest of them, "We should probably get going." "Who's going home with cars?" Taehyung asks, because an idea appears on his head, and he is incredibly glad to hear Namjoon's voice echoing "me", "Jiminie, how about you go with Namjoon-hyung, and I will walk Jungkook-ah home?" Jungkook nearly freezes, "Hyung, that's not necessary." Jimin's eyes meet Taehyung's, and he knows what he has to do, so he simply nods, "Fine by me. Namjoon-hyung still has a few things about his course to tell me, anyways." Taehyung nods and smiles at Jungkook, "Please, Jungkook-ah? I'm not comfortable with you going back alone." Jungkook blinks, flustered, "What about you going back alone afterwards?" "I'm fine," Taehyung assures him, "I like it. You're our new friend, gotta treat you right." After a few moments of ponderation, Jungkook sighs, "Okay, I guess." Taehyung says bye to each one of them after that, and, when Yoongi is about to move away from his reach, he stretches his arm and holds Yoongi's shoulder carefully, getting the elder to glare at him. "What, Taehyung?" "Can we talk?" Taehyung asks, eyebrows furrowed. Yoongi clicks his tongue, "Perhaps tomorrow or another day, when you're not trying to get Jungkook in love with you." "But hyung—" "Another day, Taehyung," Yoongi repeats, moving to grab his coat on the couch, "Another day." Taehyung sighs, frustrated. He's trying, he's really trying his best, but things aren't at all helping. Once they're out the house, he doesn't ask Jungkook about the "Never have I ever broken someone's heart" question, because the last thing he needs is one more person irritated at him for talking too much. In general, the way back to Jungkook's place is quiet and peaceful, and they talk in a low tone, next to each other, Jungkook tightening his own jacket around his shoulders to protect himself from cold, and Taehyung is starting to regret his own clothes, because there is nothing heating him up there. "Do you want to borrow a jacket?" Jungkook asks, at some point, "I have plenty of them, and you already seem pretty cold, hyung." "I'm fine," Taehyung tells him, a smile on his tone, "Don't worry, Jungkook-ah." "Are you sure?" "Yeah." Jungkook nods, and then, little by little, he stops in front a building with a small corridor to the door, and lets out a small sigh, "Here we are." Taehyung can't say Jungkook doesn't look even more attractive outside the studio, in his casual clothes, in front of his door, with peaceful features and exhaling softness. He smiles at the boy, "Then, guess I'm going—" "You know, I really liked playing today," Jungkook says, and there is something in his tone that attracts Taehyung's attention back, "There was just one part that I didn't like that much." Taehyung blinks, curious and feeling flirty, "What was it?" "Never have I ever kissed someone who is in this room," Jungkook quotes, the corners of his lips quirking up, "And we did not lose a point at that one." Jungkook is bold. He is a lot more direct than Taehyung is used to, and perhaps it's a problem that they have known each other for about a month, but, at the same time, it can't be. It's not like they're marrying each other or something, right? They're just getting to know each other. Taehyung tries to stop a smile from spreading through his entire face, he really does, but he fails. Still smiling, he tugs Jungkook's jacket around his fingers and brings his closer slowly, boldness overflowing his senses, "Yeah? Want to change that?" Jungkook nods, eyes falling to Taehyung's lips, "Yeah, definitely." Now, that's a lot more than Taehyung can take before making his move — and, well, now that he has Jungkook's approval to, there is no more need to hold himsef back. His grip around the jacket tightens as he leans and places a small, delicate kiss on Jungkook's mouth at first. As soon as he moves away, just to make sure that's okay, Jungkook's instinct is to move forward, seeking more, his eyes fluttering closed. Taehyung opens a wide smile, "There," he jokes, "Changed that." Jungkook's eyes open and he stares at Taehyung for a few seconds before letting out a soft laugh, "Well, I didn't even notice," he says, and his arms slip to surround Taehyung's waist in an almost protective way, "So, how about we do that again?" This time, he is the one to move first, mouth capturing Taehyung's and getting the elder's head to spin. Taehyung allows their lips to touch simply for a few more seconds, and then he nips at Jungkook's bottom lip, causing Jungkook's lips to apart in surprise, and that's the oportunity that Taehyung uses to invade Jungkook's mouth with his tongue. Jungkook is fast to catch up with his pace, moving away for one only second to spin on his heels, making Taehyung's back press against the wall behind him, and then his lips find Taehyung's again, deepening the kiss even more, with more intensity and more feeling. Taehyung could do this forever. He could kiss Jungkook forever, with no stopping — well, despise the air and everything. However, it's late, and they are both cold, so perhaps it can wait to another time. He isn't even sure whether there is going to be a next time or something, but, by the way Jungkook is kissing him, he can guess the answer. Slowly and with no rush, Taehyung moves away, just a few inches, forehead against Jungkook's, a smile spreading on his face as a mirror to his dongsaeng's smile. "I should probably go, Kook," Taehyung barely whispers, "It's getting late and I have class tomorrow." Jungkook nods, pressing his lips to contain his smile, but it gets easily to his eyes, and Taehyung is melting because of all that, "You're right. Isn't it too late to walk home alone, though?" Taehyung grins, "Are you suggesting that I spend the night, Jungkook-ah?" One of Jungkook's eyebrows rise, "Aish, hyung. To sleep, okay? Don't get things wrong." Taehyung laughs lowly, lifting up one of his hands to caress Jungkook's cheekbones, "It's fine, Jungkook-ah. My place is not that far, and Jiminie would kill me if I didn't go home today." Jungkook hums, "Alright. I will see you tomorrow, then. At the studio." "Yeah," Taehyung says, tilting his head to place a last soft and delicate kiss to Jungkook's mouth before actually moving away, "Until tomorrow."
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
The tomorrow comes, and so do Taehyung's thoughts. He spends the next morning, all the class period before the photoshoot, thinking about the night before. He sees it all over again, the game they all played, the way Yoongi acted, the kiss he shared with Jungkook at the end of the night. Then, in the middle of his thoughts, after seeing and seeing all over again, he finds a flaw. A few weeks ago, Jungkook told him about having something with Yoongi times ago, and Taehyung has nothing do to with that. The past is supposed to stay in the past for a reason. However, he also remembers last night, when he said "Never have I ever kissed someone who is in this room", and Yoongi put a finger down, but Jungkook didn't — Yoongi put a finger down because of Jimin, and Jungkook didn't, because he hadn't kissed anyone in there, but what about his past relationship with Yoongi? How is that somehow explained? It's while he's going to the studio to take his pictures that he lets that worries get replaced by others. For example, he kissed Jungkook last night, so what now? They pretend it never happened, they keep going with the kissing thing, they become something? It would be nice to know. Once he gets there, Jimin goes to find Yoongi, and he goes to find Jungkook. Taehyung isn't sure about what he expects as he walks to meet Jungkook at the cabin. He is afraid that Jungkook will change because of that, because he regrets or something, but there is also a smart part of him that hopes that Jungkook will change positively; that, perhaps, even if they don't become something, they can start. That's why he hesitates so much, and why Jungkook sees him first, and then Jungkook smiles, the corners of his eyes wrinkling, and Taehyung's lungs run out of air. "Hi, hyung," Jungkook greets, and Taehyung forces himself not to look too anxious. "Hi, Jungkook-ah." "How are you?" Jungkook asks, and there's something new, nearly shy, about the way he talks, and it gets Taehyung to open a huge smile. "Well, not as good as in the end of last night," Taehyung teases, and he can see Jungkook's cheeks turning slightly red, "I really wanted to ask you about it. Do you— I mean, what happens now? I just noticed we didn't talk about it, so, if you don't want it to happen again, it won't and it's a hundred percent fine—" "I do, though," Jungkook cuts him, and Taehyung freezes, "Want it to happen, I mean. I do want it. It's just..." Taehyung blinks, "It's just?" "I told you it's been just a while since my last relationship ended, right?' Jungkook asks, and Taehyung nods, "So, yeah, I guess I'm prepared for another one, if it's you, but I'm not sure about how prepared I am to tell about it." It takes Taehyung a few seconds before comprehending that, and, when he does, he takes his breath, "So, you— uhm, you want to keep this between us only?" Jungkook nods, "If that's okay with you." Taehyung isn't sure about it. Of course he wants to be with Jungkook, and it's better one way than none, but the fact that it means no telling his best friends doesn't exactly pleases himself. However, he is aware of Jungkook's love life according to him, and he can't blame the younger male for not wanting anything public just yet. You know what, he tells himself, what is the worst that can happen? "That's okay with me," he finally says, and Jungkook smiles, moving to place a small kiss on Taehyung's lips, probably because there's no one around, and Taehyung widdens his eyes, "Did you just—" "Get used to it," Jungkook suggests, blinking and smiling innocently, "I do that a lot. Now, you can go change yourself, I'm going to let everything ready for the photoshoot." Taehyung stares at him for a few more seconds, than he looks around to make sure no one's looking, enalces his fingers on Jungkook's wrist and brings him close real quick to kiss him on the cheek as well, turning around and walking while laughing to dress up right after seeing Jungkook's flustered expression. The photoshoot goes as well, because Jungkook is too professional to interrupt it for stupid cheesy moments, and Taehyung respects his work. Right after, though, before they go away, Jungkook squeezes Taehyung's fingers between his, and Taehyung heads to the University side by side with Jimin with his heart almost completely filled up. "You're going to the gym with me today," Jimin announces, at some point, right before classes are ended, "I want to introduce you to my team, and I've told them about you." "Okay," Taehyung agrees, "If there's hot people, I have to meet them." Jimin's next smile to him is full of mischief, "You've got yourself your hot crush already." "Oh, shut up."*** After classes, they head to the gym. The place is really nice and comfortable, with an atmosphere that radiates safety. Taehyung follows Jimin inside, passing by a few people dancing a coreography that seems way too hard to Taehyung's standars, although he is aware of the fact that it is probably anywhere near that hard to his best friend. Jimin is an amazing dancer, even if he doesn't admit that he has already hit Hoseok's level, being their dances similar or not. "That's the team I'm in," Jimin waves to one of the corners of the gym, where seven people are reunited, talking, all incredibly good-looking and with bodies dancing-sculpted bodies, "C'mon, I'm going to introduce you to them." Once again, Jimin guides Taehyung. When he gets there, they all greet each other with polite bows, but there is one girl that hugs Jimin as a greeting and a guy that pats his back for a second. "Taetae, these are Kang Seulgi," he starts by introducing the girl who hugged him, "Hwang Eunbi," another girl of the team, "Kim Yukwon," one of the guys, and then he proceeds to the guy who patted his back, "Kim Yugyeom—" Taehyung freezes. His entire body does, and then he follows Jimin's greeting with his ears almost closed, because he doesn't seem able to hear any other names. Yugyeom is smiling at him nicely, seemingly glad to meet him, and Taehyung doesn't know what to think. Out of all the people he could have met that week, he did not expect to meet Jungkook's ex. Once Jimin is finished, Taehyung cleans his throat, trying his best to pretend that he heard everything, "It's really nice to meet you all! I'm Taehyung, but you can call me Tae, if you want to." Yugyeom nods, and Taehyung gulps as the other male speaks, "It's nice to meet you too, sunbae. Do you dance?" Taehyung forces a smile, "I don't dance a thing." Yugyeom squints, having fun, "Really? The last person that told me that was actually amazing." Taehyung detests how the questions get under his skin just by standing there. Is the last person Jungkook? He doesn't know whether Jungkook is a good dancer or not. Perhaps he should ask, but he has no idea of how doing it without invading Jungkook's privacy or crossing any lines. He is so ridiculous, standing there and being nervous to talk to Jungkook's ex when he is not actually Jungkook's anything — maybe his secret date, but that's all. That's the person that probably got Jungkook not to be sure about relationships, but that's all he is. He is no threat or harm to Taehyung, so all the nervosism is unnecessary. "Taetae's being honest, though," Jimin interrupts, and something tells Taehyung that his best friend noticed his discomfort, "He is terrible. There is no way to teach him." Taehyung forces a frown, "Why are you such a brat, Jiminie? I'm not that bad." "I'm gonna make you dance here to prove my point." "I'm gonna make you rap." Jimin opens a smile, full of fun smile, "You don't rap, either." "Of course I do!" Taehyung exclaims, and turns his attention back to the other dancers, "Can you believe him, wrecking my dreams like that?" "He doesn't rap," Jimin tells them, and turns back to Taehyung, "Yoongi-hyung raps, and Hoseok-hyung raps, and Namjoon-hyung—" "I get it, okay?" Taehyung cuts him, rolling his eyes, "Such a dream wrecker." Then he notices that the rest of the dancers now contain a glow of mischief in their eyes, and he only understands why when the girl named Seulgi speaks, "So, Yoongi raps, huh, Jimin-ah?" Jimin looks at her and shakes his head, and they all seem to laugh a bit, "That's not nice, noona." He looks at Taehyung and his best friend's eyebrows furrow, "What am I missing?" "I told them about all the boyfriends I had and they decided to find my crush for Yoongi-hyung the cutest thing about the history," Jimin explains, rolling his eyes, "Seriously, you guys have to get over it." "We just like the history, come on," Eunbi says, "Besides, everything you tell makes it look like Yoongi could date anyone. It'd even look cute if it was him and Taehyung." Taehyung widdens his eyes, "Definitely not." When he looks back at his best friend and sees Jimin's smile, he knows he is about to make a joke about Jungkook, so he decides to take things out of the subject before Yugyeom finds anything out. "I think you guys should dance," Taehyung suggests, "I haven't seen Jiminie dancing with a team in a while, and it would be really nice, mainly because you all seem talented." Jimin glances at his teammates, and, without much hesitation, they nod in agreement. "Okay, let's do this." And so they do. Taehyung gets to the conclusion that Jimin's team is almost a professional team. Everything about their dance screams feeling and commitment and it's beautiful to see, even to Taehyung, who doesn't understand a single thing about dancing. Jimin is usually in the center, and Taehyung can't help but open wide smiles, incredibly proud of his best friend, aware of how far he can go if he keeps that pace. As soon as the song gets to an end and they all stop, breathing heavily, Taehyung gives them a round of applause, approaching Jimin with pride. "Aish, isn't my best friend just the best?" He says, enlacing Jimin's waist to hug his best friend quickly before turning to the others, "You guys are amazing! Really! It almost makes me want to dance." "You should come—" "I said almost." They laugh softly, and Taehyung smiles to himself, satisfied that he is managing to keep a healthy conversation with Jimin's friends despise the presence of the person who is probably his crush's ex boyfriend. They talk a bit more, and, at some point, someone stops beside Taehyung, and, well, it couldn't be anyone else but the one person who he wants far away. "Sunbae," Yugyeom calls him, "The jokes we made early, about you or Jimin-hyung with your friend, they're all just jokes. It's just— We forgot to ask Jimin-hyung whether you had a boyfriend or a girlfriend before joking, so—" "Don't worry, Yugyeom-ah," Taehyung says, the name tasting bitter in his mouth, because Yugyeom seems way too nice, and, yet, Taehyung can't bring himself to like him, "I don't have a boyfriend or a girlfriend, it's fine." Yugyeom nods, smiling, "Okay." Then, Taehyung asks something, and he isn't proud of it, but it's too late to take it back once it's gone, "What about you? I mean, you guys do call a lot of attention. I know that Jiminie already told me about secret admirers." Yugyeom lets out a soft laugh, "Guess people do admire us, but, no, I don't have a relationship. I had one a few months ago, and I learned my lesson." Taehyung takes a deep breath and bites his inner cheek, "Which lesson, if I may ask?" For a second, Taehyung nearly thinks Yugyeom isn't going to answer. Then, the younger male sighs and gives Taehyung a smile that is complete and totally heartbreaking. "The hardest part of falling in love is falling out of it," Yugyeom says, "And, when someone breaks your heart, there's always a small drop of that love that gets stuck in one of the broken pieces; and, well, it's just horrible. No one should want it." Taehyung swallows hard, his adam apple almost too visible. At that moment, Jimin calls them, because it's time for the next practice, and Taehyung excuses himself to go home and rest, claiming to have a headache. However, there is only one thing echoing in his mind. "Jeon Jungkook is going to break your heart, Kim Taehyung."*** While at his apartment, Taehyung thinks a lot. He thinks about the morning, when Jungkook specifically told him that the term for them to be going out was for no one to know — yet, Taehyung, he tells himself — and about the afternoon, when he met with the guy who is possibly Jungkook's ex and whose heart got apparently really wrecked by Jungkook. He isn't sure about what to think. Perhaps, he could ignore that day. Try this new thing with Jungkook, letting things go slow, and ignore everyone else. He did tell Jungkook that he trusted him, so why is it so hard for him to go on with his word? He shouldn't be doubting like that; it's like he is breaking his promise or something. In the middle of procastinating, he grabs his cell phone and heads to the contact list, to the "Y" part, because he knows what he has to do to get the answers that he doesn't want to get, but that might be necessary. He types the message before he can regret it and presses send. To Yoongi-hyung:hyung, please, can we talk? Taehyung knows the answer he will be getting will probably be a "no", because he isn't Hoseok or Jimin or Namjoon, which means he is going to have to work harder to get Yoongi's attention back, but that doesn't matter. He is willing to type until his fingers fall off his hands. The cell phone buzzes, and he catches it immediately, imagining that he got an answer, but the name on the screen isn't Yoongi's. It's Jungkook's. From Jungkook-ah: hi tae hyung are you busy? Taehyung sighs while typing back.
To Jungkook-ah:
not at allwhy? you got anything in mind? (: From Jungkook-ah: actually yes i'm ordering pizza and i was thinking maybe you want to come over?? "Stop!" Taehyung says in a low tone, but that still sounds loud, straight to the cell phone, "Stop being cute and nice and sweet if you're a heartbreaking or tell me already if you're not!" He doesn't type that, though. He is not out of his mind just yet.
To Jungkook-ah:
i'd actually love thati'll be there in twenty From Jungkook-ah: i'll wait He sends the file and Taehyung licks his own dry and chapped lips, forcing himself to believe the Jungkook he saw early. The afternoon events might have disturbed him, but he can't let his mind spin around that. He can't. Getting dressed and heading to Jungkook's home doesn't take long. As soon as he arrives there, facing the door where he kissed Jungkook less than twenty-four hours ago, he sighs, leaving the car and entering the building's hall, heading to Jungkook's floor and ringing the bell once he's there. The Jeon Jungkook that opens the door is breath-taking. To the studio and meetings with friends, Jungkook uses nice, even fancy clothes, but, to stay home and be casual, it's just ripped jeans and a simple blue shirt, and his hair isn't pushed back or all fixed, but slightly messy, and Taehyung wants to burry his fingers in it. Jungkook smiles as he sees Taehyung, stepping aside so the elder can enter. "Hi, hyung," he says, while Taehung politely bows, smile mirroring Jungkook's, "How was your day?" "Quite nice," Taehyung lies, "I saw Jiminie dancing and he rocks it, and I saw you early, so..." Jungkook's smile gets bigger, "Come in, we can wait for the pizza while doing something at the living room. Do you like video game?" "I love video game." "So, there's our hobby." Jungkook's apartment is just like him. It's comfortable, and it's pretty. There are pictures all over the living's room walls, and Taehyung admires them, every inch of nature being shown in a beautiful way, nearly like the best camera in the world got handled for the best photographer just so he could show the world how amazing the nature is — except that, in this case, it's a borrowed camera, and an amateur photographer, and the only ones seeing the pictures are Jungkook, Taehyung and the furniture. Jungkook's video game isn't old, but it isn't new either. Taehyung watches quietly, sitting on the couch, while Jungkook grabs a few games, and they pick the best ones real quick, soon enough sitting beside one another on the couch while holding the controls and playing. It happens that being around Jungkook makes Taehyung feel fine, even with all the doubts in his head. They don't touch too much or talk about feelings or anything like that, but their shoulders brush while they play, and they smile to each other, and their eyes meet and it's affectionate. Jungkook would have to be an amazing actor to fake all that. The door bell rings, and, to Taehyung's surprise, Jungkook almost crawls onto him while turning his control to the opposite side, causing Taehyung to lose focus on the game, and the "Game Over" bar appears on his side of the screen. He widdens his eyes at Jungkook, who is smiling archly while getting off of him and calmly walking to open the door while his screen shines with the "Winner" bar. "You're a cheater, Jeon Jungkook," Taehyung points at him, not being able to hold a laugh, "I can't honestly believe this. We were playing fair!" "I'm sorry, hyung," Jungkook says, but he doesn't sound sorry, because he is still smiling as he returns with the pizza in his hands and waves so they can go to the kitchen, "I couldn't lose that one." "You're a brat," Taehyung laughs, "I can't believe I haven't noticed that before." Jungkook shrugs playfully, "How could you know? I'm amazing at acting." He opens the pizza's package on the table and gives Taehyung the two biggest slices, even though the elder protests strongly, and then puts the two smallest in his own plate. He sits in front of Taehyung and smiles before starting to eat. At some point, where Taehyung is calmly eating, something strikes his head, and he is not able to ask the question that has been bothering you, "So, Jungkook-ah, just out of curiosity, do you still want to keep anything but friendship going between us?" Jungkook stops eating, almost like he has frozen, and Taehyung goes back to talking. "Not that you have to answer now!" He says, "It's just because I'm curious and—" "Hyung," Jungkook cuts him, swallowing the food in his mouth, "Relax, okay? I just got surprised that you asked it so suddenly, but the question isn't a problem. I do intend to keep something that is more than friendship between us, if you do." Taehyung nods, "Okay. So, we don't tell anyone?" Jungkook sighs and shakes his head while smiling, "I know it seems like I'm overreacting. I just, don't know, thought it could be better for us to grow with each other, and not others? But, if you're not comfortable, we don't need to do it this way. We can tell them." Taehyung blinks, "We can?" Jungkook nods, "Of course we can. I'm fine with it if it's what you want." He's actually being serious. Taehyung can't believe the entire afternoon he just spent doubting Jungkook, when all he had to do was talk to him. "It's fine if we don't tell," Taehyung says, because he wants to give Jungkook the same opportunity Jungkook is giving him, if it's so important for the younger male, "I'm okay with it, for a while. Just until we grow more fond of each other." Jungkook smiles, and it's beautiful. "Okay," he agrees, "We tell whenever we're fond enough." Then, Taehyung decides that, if asking that was so easily, asking about Yugyeom should be as well. He feels that he can be honest and try, at least, and it's right there, in the tip of his tongue, when his cell phone buzzes. "Oh, I'm sorry," he says, "Just— a sec." Jungkook nods, going back to his food, "Take your time, Tae-hyung." Taehyung grabs his own cell phone and freezes. What he just got wasn't a text from Jimin asking or wanting anything, and it also wasn't something he was thinking about. He just got an answer. From Yoongi-hyung: yeah we can
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Taehyung wishes he could say that waiting to meet with Yoongi the next day was easy, but it wasn't. He left Jungkook's at the moment he received the text, claiming that Jimin wasn't feeling well and that he had to go and help. Jungkook didn't protest, he simply kissed Taehyung fast on the lips before letting him leave — perhaps Taehyung had initiated the kiss, but Jungkook went with it, so it was fine. In the end, he tried taking everything he could out of Yoongi by texts, which turned out to be quite hard, because Yoongi wasn't a big fan of important or relevant conversations by phone, mainly by texts. All Yoongi received him with were some "we will talk tomorrow" or "I will tell you everything I can tomorrow", and Taehyung wasn't satisfied. That night, he sleeps in the living room, staring at his phone, but wakes up in his bed, covered by thin sheets. His cell phone is nowhere to be seen, and he leans while groaning to turn off the alarm clock beside his bed before sighing and covering his eyes with his arms. There is no doubt that Jimin was the one to bring him to his room, and the fact that he forced his best friend to do that while he should be sleeping is disturbing. He stands up quickly, brushes his teeth, and opens the door of his room just in time to almost bump at Jimin, because of course the elder was going to his room to wake him up. Jimin is completely ready by now, clothes on, hair fixed, a note and a pen in hands. "Aish, you woke up early today," Jimin observes, "Why is that? We don't have shooting today, just usual classes, you're not even going to see Jungkook. There's no reason to be excited—" "I'm not going to class today," Taehyung interrupts him and Jimin frowns, "I'm staying over at Yoongi-hyung's for a few hours." That gets Jimin's eyes to widen, "Why?" "I'm going to talk to him," Taehyung says, and Jimin squints, "You can trust me, okay, Jiminie? I won't do anything stupid." Jimin laughs, "You?" "Aish, how many times do I have to say that you are a terrible best friend?" "Doesn't matter, it still won't be real." Taehyung smiles and laughs with his different as they leave the building, but, as they separate, he finds himself nervous again. Yoongi's house is near, so it's quite easy for Taehyung to walk there and knock on the door. As Yoongi opens, he bows slightly, "Hi, Taehyung." "Hi, hyung." "Get inside. I'll be out in a minute." Taehyung is well used to Yoongi's apartment, as weird as it might seem. Usually, when people see them, they imagine that they can never sit together and talk, though they actually could. Sometimes, when Yoongi was overstressed because of his tests and Jimin or Hoseok couldn't make it to take care of him, the duty was given to Taehyung, and he wasn't complaining. Taking care of an irritated Min Yoongi could look like trouble in the begining, but he was incredibly peaceful when sleepy, and that's how he got after talking to someone about a tiring day of class. The thing is, Yoongi's place is nowhere unfamiliar to Taehyung, but he can't bring himself to feel like he's home, which is what he would have done a few weeks ago. Yoongi reaches for his coat and closes the windows while Taehyung waits, and everything he does, every movement seems natural, like they're not about to have what could be a really important conversation. Then, finally, Yoongi grabs the keys on the counter, and he throws them in Taehyung's direction without warning him. Taehyung manages to catch it and frowns at Yoongi, who simply shrugs and says, "I'm lazy, you drive." He closes the door behind them and they walk to the car silently, Taehyung nearly being able to touch the tension between them. Perhaps, if Jimin was there, it would be easier, but then it wouldn't be the talk they need to have. "Hyung," Taehyung finally speaks, "Are you mad at me?" They've arrived at the parking lot, and Yoongi doesn't bother to look at Taehyung while he says, "No, I'm not." "Then, what are you?" Yoongi stares at him, and it's blank, "Doesn't matter now. Let's get going. I will tell you what happened once we're at the café." Taehyung swallows a knot in his throat and nods, opening the car's door and getting his seat as the driver while Yoongi fits himself at the passenger's seat by his side, putting on his belt and looking forward instead of looking up. Taehyung tries to ignore it and starts driving, spinning the wheel and getting on their proper way. The place isn't far, and Taehyung is thankful for it, because he would most definitely not be able to handle much longer with the painful silence inside the car. As soon as they leave the car and enter the café, Taehyung can't help but stare at the diverse options of coffee on the board, because, with how tense he is, he could definitely use some caffeine. "Order whatever you want," Yoongi says, gesturing to the table, "I will wait." And so Taehyung does. He orders a black coffee and walks to the table, sitting in front of Yoongi, swallowing hard. Yoongi is looking absently outside the window, but then he looks at Taehyung once the coffee arrives, and his stare is almost painful. "Before you ask me about anything, I want to tell you that I can't tell anything about Jungkook freely. It's not my life to tell," Yoongi starts, and Taehyung feels himself getting smaller, "But I do know how much you want to know this, so here's how we can do this: you can tell me a fact about Jungkook, and I can either deny it or confirm it." Taehyung's eyes widen slightly, "For real?" Yoongi nods calmly, "For real." "Okay," Taehyung says, and he takes a deep breath. He doesn't mean to break into Jungkook's personal life or act like a stalker, but there are things he needs to know, "Is it true that Jungkook broke Yugyeom's heart?" That brings a frown to Yoongi's face, "How do you know Yugyeom?" "Hyung, the question, please." Yoongi sighs, "Yes, it is truth." Taehyung takes a deep breath, "Was it on purpose?" "Yes, it was." "Is it true that you and Jungkook dated?" If Yoongi had a coffee in hands, on the way to his mouth, he would've probably choked on it. He nearly gasps in surprise, eyes opening wide, and his chin drops to the ground, "What?" "I— Jungkook said you guys said something that didn't end well," Taehyung says, and he feels bad and guilty for telling that, something that was probably supposed to be a secret — not what happened, but the fact that Jungkook told it. "I never had anything with Jungkook," Yoongi says, in desbelief, "When we met, he tried to get me interested. Unfortunately, as it might not have escaped your knowledge, I was already in love with someone else." Taehyung shakes his head a bit, "I know, I just— You've had crushes before, right? Although you were always in love with Hoseok-hyung, you've had people you wanted to try with as well, more than one time in which you thought Hoseok-hyung was out of limits." Surprisingly, Yoongi doesn't confirm or deny it. He simply looks at Taehyung through his eyelashes, "It doesn't matter whether I had other crushes or not. Jungkook was never a crush, or a lover, or anything more than a friend. So, if that's what he told you, Taehyung, I'm sorry, but he lied." Taehyung feels his entire body tense, and he can't force his own shoulders to relax. He believes Yoongi, he trusts Yoongi, he knows Yoongi wouldn't lie about something like that to him. However, if he does believe Yoongi in that, if he does trust Yoongi, then there will be no other reason to trust Jungkook again. If Jungkook did lie about that — and if he doesn't have a reason to, then Taehyung cannot put his trust on the boy anymore. And, if there's something that hurts, it's the idea of not being able to trust the person he— Oh, Taehyung thinks to himself, breathing heavily, what is Jungkook supposed to be to him? The person he likes? The person he loves? He knows the first option is already truth; his only fear is that the second one might be as well . "Is there anything else about Jungkook," Taehyung starts, and his voice gets near shaking, "That I should know?" Yoongi looks him in the eyes, the kind of look that they have only exchanged a few times in their lives, at that moments where no one in the room understood what was happening but them — and that moments were rare, because Jimin always understood Taehyung and Hoseok always understood Yoongi, but it still happened. And, then, Taehyung knows Yoongi's answer before he actually says it. "Yes," Yoongi says, and it's barely a whisper, "And I'm sorry, Taehyungie, but I can't tell you what it is." Taehyung nods, looking down. He can't ask that to Yoongi. Not when Jungkook is his friend, not when they are supposed to live in harmony; asking him to tell more would have been an abuse and an offense. He keeps glancing at his own feet, though, because he isn't sure about what to think. Until he does. "Do you think it's possible that he actually likes me?" Taehyung asks, and Yoongi's eyebrows furrow, "You keep saying he will break my heart, but is there the possibility of him not doing it?" Yoongi's adam apple is visible as he swallows hard, and he sighs, not being able to lie about that either, "Yes, it is possible." Taehyung nods, looking down again for a few seconds. He wish he knew what to think right now. "Taehyung." Taehyung lifts up his chin to look at him, "Yes?" "Now that I've answered your questions, may I ask you something as well?" Yoongi asks, and it's so freaking rare that he's actually asking permition for that and not being harsh after all that that Taehyung can simply nod. "Sure, hyung." "Are you in love with him?" Taehyung pauses, taking a deep breath and feeling his mouth dry. He knows that Yoongi deserves to know, after all he told him, so he simply pushes aside that rational part of him that keeps on insisting that admitting that out loud will be a bad idea, and then he shakes his head affirmatively, "Yes, I am." He can deal with himself later.*** While walking, Taehyung decides that talking to Yoongi was whether his worst idea or the best. Right now, his head is a mess — he knows what Yoongi said, and he knows it is most likely truth, but there is still another part of him, that insistent part that just confessed something that shouldn't have been said in front of one of his best friends, that keeps telling him to go and talk to Jungkook, and not to someone else. He's in the middle of his way back home when he forces himself to stop and support his back on the wall, breathing hardly, and grab the cell phone in his pocket, typing the first number that comes to mind. He puts the phone against his ear and wait for the ring to stop and the person to pick up.
"Hello?"
"Hobi-hyung?" He asks, "Can we meet?" Hoseok pauses before answering, "Are you panting? What happened?" "It's nothing too bad," Taehyung assures him, "It really isn't, I just— Need to talk." It's not really about talking. He doesn't want to talk to Hoseok about Jungkook like he did to Yoongi; he needs that off his head right now. With Hoseok, he knows it will be easy to go anywhere, and simply forget about all the crap that just entered his mind. "Sure, where are you?" Hoseok asks. "Two blocks away from my apartment." "Isn't that near Yoongi-hyung's apartment?" Taehyung gulps, "Yes." "Taehyungie, are you okay?" That makes Taehyung take a deep breath. If he wants to hang out with Hoseok like it's a normal day, he should act like it's a normal day. "Yes," he answers, and his bright actor side shows up, "I'm sorry, I just ran until here because I thought I could get one or two muscles by doing it, but it was a stupid idea." Hoseok laughs softly and Taehyung contains a sigh of relief, "You should dance, Taehyungie." "I will," Taehyung says, "Just come and meet me here." "Okay," Hoseok answers, "See you in five minutes.*** This time, Taehyung got it right. Hanging out with Hoseok can be the solution. Because Hoseok is incredibly nice to everyone, and one of his best friends as well, and someone who would certainly say "yes" to doing anything that would put a smile on his friends' faces — and that would be safe. Because Yoongi is in love with Hoseok, and Taehyung can tell why someone else would have fallen for Hoseok, but not Yoongi, since they are completely opposites, so it's okay that he fell for Jungkook as well, right? Because falling for someone who people wouldn't imagine you with it's okay as well. They are in a live call with Namjoon, talking and laughing, in the end of the afternoon, when Taehyung's cell phone buzzes. He takes a glimpse at the screen and holds his breath, heart beating loud in his chest. From Jungkook-ah: hi hyung didn't hear from you today Taehyung closes his eyes for a few seconds and opens them again before responding. You are an actor, he tells himself, then own it. To Jungkook-ah:did u miss me jungkookie From Jungkook-ah: well yes Taehyung bites his inner lip and tries punching mentally that part of him that keeps on being so in love. To Jungkook-ah: ah that's cute i missed u too From Jungkook-ah: are you busy tonight? "Why are you texting, Taehyung?" Namjoon asks from Hoseok's cell phone, frowning, "Give us some attention, you brat." "Aish, let him flirt, Namjoon," Hoseok says, elbowing Taehyung's side, "Don't mind him. He's just a talking screen." "I'm literally still here." Taehyung smiles, and then he turns back to his cell phone. To Jungkook-ah:noshould i come over? From Jungkook-ah: yes To Jungkook-ah:wait for me within fifty minutes Taehyung doesn't leave at that moment. With a taxi, he can get to Jungkook's in twenty, and the next thirty minutes with Hoseok and Namjoon might be precious. He needs it; the calm sky before the storm. There is no way he is going to meet with Jungkook and not question him about everything, and, if he does question him, things won't be peaceful. Hoseok and Namjoon talk about everything and anything; they are Taehyung and Jimin in a second version. Of course, to Taehyung, no friendship can be compared to his with Jimin, but the example is still effectual. It's incredibly comfortable to be around them, and to laugh with them — he just wishes he could leave his mind with them as well, but it keeps on going back to the same person. Then, forty minutes later, he finds himself in front of Jungkook's building, leaving the taxi and leaving the money to the driver with trembling hands. He is scared. He is scared that Jungkook will disappoint him, that Yoongi will be right, that things won't get together. It's while he is in front of Jungkook's door, facing the wood before the younger male opens it, that he forces himself to remember only Yoongi's answer. Yes, it is possible. It is possible that Taehyung and Jungkook will work out — that things won't get out of control, doesn't matter what happened in each of their previously relationships. Taehyung isn't amazing with lovers either, anyways; if he was, he wouldn't be single before meeting Jungkook. Perhaps, they are each other's way out of this. Jungkook opens the door and smiles as he sees Taehyung, giving him the proper space to get inside. The apartment is just like the last day, just the same comfortable and welcoming place, and Taehyung isn't sure whether it is good or not that he almost feels like he's visiting a house that he has known for a long time. "I didn't order pizza today, but I did make some food," Jungkook comments, and Taehyung looks at him, impressed at the mention of cooking, "I mean, I took the frozen food out of the refrigerator and I put it in the microwave. It counts as making food, right?" Taehyung laughs softly, "If I doesn't, I didn't cook during my whole life." Jungkook smiles, "Well, thank you." He guides Taehyung to the kitchen and the food is already on the table. Once again, he finds himself in some minutes seated in front of Jungkook, and he almost feels bad for having to take that opportunity to ask questions again. "So, Jungkook-ah," he starts, poking the food with his spoon, "I've talked to Yoongi-hyung today." Jungkook stops with his eating and lifts up his chin, "Okay." "Can I ask you something?" "Of course." "Why did you say that you and Yoongi-hyung dated?" Taehyung finally gathers boldness enough to ask, and Jungkook seems to freeze, "I mean—" Jungkook shakes his head, "I'm sorry." Taehyung frowns, "Why?" "I knew I couldn't lie forever about that," Jungkook says, and he shrugs like he is slowly getting smaller, "I just— I panicked when you asked me about them telling you that I would break your heart. Truth is, Yoongi-hyung rejected me. More than once, to be honest. But, I thought that, if I told you that, I wouldn't have your trust anymore." Taking a deep breath, Taehyung blinks, "Lying isn't the answer, Jungkook-ah." "I know," Jungkook says, and he sounds shaky, "And— I understand if you want to get up and leave now, but can I just— Can I explain the real reason why they think I'm a heartbreaker first?" Taehyung pauses. That's what he has been wanting for weeks; to know the real reason why everyone seems to find Jungkook so dangerous and risking to Taehyung's life. Even with all that happened, he can't not accept that. "Do you know Yugyeom? My ex who keeps calling me?" Jungkook asks, and Taehyung nods, "Everytime someone asks me why I broke up with him, I say it is none of their business, and everytime the person who asks is my first, I say it's because I was tired of him and didn't want anything anymore. I act to them like I did that out of my own will, just because I wanted to. The thing is, it isn't true." Taehyung's lips press in a thin line, "What is true, then?" "He cheated on me," Jungkook says, sinking in his position, "I found out a few weeks before breaking up with him, because I needed to find a reason why, a reason I would tell Yoongi-hyung and Jin-hyung and Hoseok-hyung so they wouldn't treat me like a victim or try anything against Yugyeom. When I didn't come up with anything, I simply decided to pretend that losing the interest was the reason. Yugyeom doesn't know that I know about the cheating, either, but he should." He pauses, and Taehyung waits patiently. "Why sparing him?" Taehyung asks, "Why not telling them and letting the guy deal with the consequences of what he has done?" "Because I cared about him," Jungkook says, eyebrows furrowed, "I didn't love him, but I cared about him. A lot." A knot grows in Taehyung's throat before he even starts his new question, "Is that how it is with me, too? Would you spare me because you care about me?" "I wouldn't spare you, hyung," Jungkook barely whispers, and he sounds like he's scared of something, like the idea of fighting Taehyung scares him, "I wouldn't spare you, because I wouldn't break up with you. I would forgive you." Taehyung squints, "For cheating on you?" "Yes." "Why?" Jungkook's eyes are shining like two darkening stars when he looks into Taehyung's, and his voice is carried with emotion, "Because I'm in love with you." Taehyung's breath gets knocked out of his lungs. He feels like he can't move, because he certainly just heard something that can't be true. He knows he is in love with Jungkook, but Jungkook couldn't already be in love with him as well, could he? "You don't believe me," Jungkook recognizes, and he stands up and stretches his arm out to Taehyung, "Follow me, just this once. Please." Taehyung blinks, blank, and holds the younger male's hand. He leads him to the living room, where all the walls are covered by pictures, and Taehyung sees the most diverse ways of nature in each one of them, and Jungkook's eyes are focused on one in particular, and Taehyung follows his eyes straight to it. It's the picture of a galaxy, full of circles, and Taehyung doesn't take long to notice that it reminds him of something. "It's the same print as in my choker," he says, looking at Jungkook, "The same from the photoshoot." Jungkook nods, "The first day of photoshoot was the first day I admired you. It looks like it was months ago, but, in a matter of weeks, you grew more than half of people I know in my mind and in my heart, hyung. I'm not asking you to stay or to forgive me for lying — though those are the things that I want — with this. This is for you to know that you are important. The forgiviness and staying have nothing to do with it." Then, Taehyung is staring at him, like he can read and see his soul, and all of his senses are screaming, and his heart is beating strong against his chest. Jungkook is close and he looks willing to accept whether Taehyung wants to stay or not, or if he wants to say something or not. "Jungkook-ah," he starts, and he takes a step forward. Jungkook's eyes shine and his lips seem to curve in relief, "Do you—" "Yes." Next thing Taehyung knows, his body is pressing Jungkook's against the wall and their mouths are devouring one another. Jungkook's tongue rubs along his and Taehyung holds back a few sounds, hands all over Jungkook's back, pausing on his lower back to indulge contact and bring him closer, chests held against each other. "Ah," Jungkook sighs as Taehyung drops his lips to the dongsaeng's neck, leaving a trail of open-mouthed kisses on his skin. Taehyung stops above Jungkook's collarbone, aparting his own lips so he can nibble and lick at the spot, "Hyung, don't leave marks." Taehyung nods, lifting up his head a bit and placing a kiss to Jungkook's cheek that is way too affectionate to the moment, "Okay, I won't." Taehyung remembers the feeling of being able to kiss Jungkook's lips forever the first time they got that kind of intimacy, and, little by little, he finds out that Jungkook's mouth isn't the only spot of the boy's body that he could keep on kissing until the end of the days. He kisses every point of Jungkook's smooth skin above his chest, locking their lips together one or two times to suffocate that dangerous words from leaving his mouth. This is not a moment to try and be romantic; he doesn't intend to ruin the mood, at all. "Jungkook-ah," Taehyung whispers against his mouth, "Your shirt. Is there a possibility of getting it off?" Jungkook smirks, "Yes, there is." He grabs the base of his own shirt and Taehyung moves away a few inches to give Jungkook the needed space to take the piece of outfit out. As soon as he does, Taehyung goes back to kissing him, igniting their mouths as their tongues touch again, and Jungkook's shirt falls on the ground, forgotten. Taehyung backs down and rests their foreheads together as he watches Jungkook's bare torso for a second, smirking intensively. Jungkook moves to place a kiss on the corner of Taehyung's mouth and whisper, "Like what you see?" Taehyung looks him in the eyes, and, for a second, there's a different glow in Jungkook's face, which Taehyung can't quite recognize. Then, after a few seconds, Taehyung decides to answer, "Definitely." Jungkook grins, "Now, about your shirt—" Before he can finish, Taehyung crashes their lips together just for a second and then he moves away and takes his own shirt off, a lot quicker than Jungkook, which causes the younger male to laugh and shakes his head a little. He places his hand on Taehyung's chest and allows his own eyes to run through Taehyung's body in a way that should have gotten him extremely embarassed, and that actually kind of does. "Like what you see?" Taehyung tries asking as well, but he has the will to hide his face when he realizes his voice sounds slightly shaky. Jungkook smirks at it and Taehyung cleans his throat, "I'm just cold." Jungkook smiles and his arms reach to hold firmly on Taehyung's waist as he collides their chests together and glues his mouth to Taehyung's while speaking in a low tone, "Let's warm you up." He spins on his heels in a way that now Taehyung is the one held against the wall and Jungkook's body, and the feeling of smooth skin pressed against smooth skin and everything going on in their bodies gets Taehyung's head to turn upside down. Jungkook moves in a way that their lower bodies roll together, getting friction, and it causes them both to groan. They kiss fiercely for a second, and then Jungkook breaks it, just for a second, speaking with his mouth against Taehyung's cheek, near his ear. "I think," Jungkook starts, nibbling almost shyly at Taehyung's earlobe, "We should take this to the bedroom." Taehyung smiles, raising one of his hands to hold Jungkook's chin and adjust their faces tilted to each other so they can kiss properly. Then, barely moving away, he nods, "Let's go."*** The next morning, Taehyung isn't the first to wake up. He immediately knows that, because he feels an index finger poking his cheek and pulling him off his sleepness. Slowly, he opens his eyes, getting used to the light that the window lets in, and he knows exactly where he is and who he is with before even taking a look at the body laying next to him. He feels amazing and bad. He feels right and wrong. With Jungkook's body warm next to his, with his face incredibly close and with his expression looking so peaceful, Taehyung feels like the happiest person alive — yet, he feels like the most guilty one as well. Does this mean he didn't listen to anything he heard the day before? Does this mean that Jungkook can lie to him and it will always end up well? Or is it normal, and that's just how couples should work, with apologies and growning next to each other. Somehow, he feels like both are right, but he is right in the middle. He sighs quietly, lifting up his hand a bit to push Jungkook's hair away from his forehead, leaving his face more visible. It kind of makes Taehyung want to smile and kiss him, glad for being there, but he doesn't, because he hears his cell phone buzzing and remembers that he has class today and that it is his alarm. However, once he grabs his cell phone and looks at the screen, he frowns. Besides the alarm, there's something there, in front of his face. It's a text, and it's from his best friend. From Jiminie: we need to talk
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
While Taehyung makes his way back to his shared apartment with Jimin, he feels oddly sick. He knows Jimin wouldn't have texted him like that if the subject wasn't serious, and he can't help but think that it has something to do with his previous conversation with Yoongi. Whatever it is, Taehyung wants it over. He wants his friends to understand that he is with Jungkook and that nothing that they might do will change that. Once he's gotten there, he enters with no hesitation, not bothering to be delicated about it. He knows Jimin is anxious to talk from the way the text was written. If they're supposed to talk fast, so be it. Jimin is waiting for him while sitting on the couch's arm, fingers running through his hair, and he looks concerned. Taehyung doesn't like it. He swallows hard as his eyes meet his best friend's. "Tell me," Taehyung asks him, "If it's urgent, please, just say it, Jiminie." Jimin sighs, "It's about Jungkook, Taehyungie." "Let me guess," Taehyung says, letting out a humourless laugh, "You've talked to Yoongi-hyung." Jimin squints his eyes, seemingly disappointed as he speaks, "You're acting like we're insisting on something that we don't know about, Taehyungie, but it isn't like this. Yoongi-hyung called me because he regretted not telling you everything yesterday, and he wants you to know the whole truth." "You know what, Jiminie? I'm tired of hearing a thousand truths about the same damn thing," Taehyung strikes back, "Besides, why would Yoongi-hyung regret not telling me the whole truth? According to everything he said, he's doing it so he won't betray Jungkook's trust, which seems to mean a lot to him. How can I know that he doesn't have feelings for Jungkook or something?" Jimin is clearly taken aback by that question, but not for the reason Taehyung wished he would. It doesn't look like he's thinking about it, but simply trying to digest that Taehyung would say that, "Do you really think Yoongi-hyung would have invented a history and called me to tell it just so he could separate you from Jungkook? No, worse— You think he has feelings for Jungkook? He told me he already let it pretty clear to you that he doesn't." "How do I believe him?" Taehyung asks, eyebrows raised, "How do I believe him if he calls you with another version of the same history he told me? How do I believe that he doesn't have feelings for Jungkook and that that is the reason why—" "He doesn't have feelings for Jungkook, Taehyung!" Jimin practically yells, forcing Taehyung to stop and blink, frowning as he looks at his best friend. "What the heck, Jimin. How are you sure?" Jimin takes a deep breath, and it almost looks like he does so to avoid his fist from meeting Taehyung's nose, "He doesn't have feelings for Jungkook, Taehyung—" "I'm asking you why—" "Because he has feelings for you!" The elder finally lets out, and it nearly feels like he just grabbed a hammer and hit Taehyung with it. Taehyung's words are drained out of his mouth, and, for the first time in weeks, he has no idea of what to say or how to react, "Dammit, Taehyung, I wasn't supposed to tell you this, but you left me no other choice. For several months, Yoongi-hyung has had feelings for you, and he still does. Are you happy now?" Happy is the last thing Taehyung is. He is paralyzed, uncapable of forming an entire phrase. Jimin sighs, frustrated, and rubs his face with his own hands, walking around on the same spot inextricably. "Tell me you're lying," Taehyung asks, and it comes in a weak tone. "You know I'm not lying," Jimin replies, "You know you just made me tell a secret no one should ever know about, something that Yoongi-hyung trusted to no one but me. It is cruel, Taehyung, that you made me say it." Taehyung shakes his head, in denial, "He's in love with Hoseok-hyung." "So?" Jimin says back, "Being in love with Hoseok-hyung is almost something permanent to Yoongi-hyung. He will always love Hoseok-hyung, and he will always choose him over everyone, but it is his right to have feelings for other people in the way. It's not impossible to love two people at the same time; why would it be impossible to love one and care about another one?" The dongsaeng takes a deep breath, trying to force himself to understand all of that. Yoongi has feelings for him. Not friendly feelings, romantic feelings. Yoongi, who he can see as nothing but a brother. Yoongi, who he accused of being in love with Jungkook for more than a week. "What did I do?" Taehyung asks, low, "How many times did I hurt him?" "Multiple times, Taehyung," Jimin says, and he moves to grab his keys on the counter, which Taehyung can only follow with his eyes, "But make no mistake. Yoongi-hyung must have feelings for you and it might hurt him a lot that you don't trust him, but I am your best friend. I'm hurt, too." "Jiminie—" Taehyung tries calling him, but it's too late. Jimin is already shutting the door behind him brutaly, and Taehyung shrinks due that, feeling like the most terrible person that has ever walked on Earth. Somehow, the fact that Yoongi has feelings for him should have make him imagine that all that history about Jungkook has been jealousy and envy, but, instead, it makes him feel like Yoongi would never lie to him about anything that serious. He knows Yoongi is in love with Hoseok, and he knows how dedicated Yoongi is to the people he loves the most — taken as example the few months in which Yoongi had a tiny crush on Jimin and would help him in anything he needed. Yoongi couldn't have lied. Which means Jungkook could. Taehyung's blood is cold in his veins. He is scared; scared because he spent the night with Jungkook and it only confirmed his suspicious of being in love with the latter, and scared that he won't be able to fall out of love, even if anything too bad happens. Without thinking, he reaches for his cell phone and types Yoongi's number. "Hello?" Yoongi's voice is sleepy when he picks up, and Taehyung imagines he was probably resting from all the hard work. "Yoongi-hyung," Taehyung starts, taking a deep breath, "I need to talk to you." There is a silence before another answer arrives, "Did anything happen?' "Sort of," Taehyung replies, "Please?" "Sure. I'll be there in twenty minutes."*** Twenty minutes and three minutes later, Taehyung walks towards the door, opening it and gesturing gently for him to enter the place. Yoongi does, calm, used to the place. He finds his spot on the couch and tilts his head to look at Taehyung. "Is this about the conversation I had with Jimin?" "About Jungkook?" Taehyung asks, and Yoongi nods, "Mostly, yeah." "Mostly?" Yoongi echoes, frowning slightly, "I don't see what else—" "The reason why you called Jiminie and told him the truth this time," Taehyung says, and Yoongi clearly hesitates, "The real reason." For a few seconds, they remain in silence. Then, Yoongi quietly nods, understanding. "He told you, didn't he?" Yoongi asks with a quiet, humourless laugh, "Jiminie told you about— whatever it is that I feel for you.' Taehyung's eyebrows furrow and he tries to come up with something smart, but, in the end, he can't lie to Yoongi, "Yes." Yoongi nods, "Do you feel weird about it?" "Not weird," Taehyung says, "It's just a surprise, I guess." Once again, the elder nods, like every move is supposed to tell Taehyung that he understands, "Do you want me to stay away for a while so you can have your time to think about everything else?" "No." Yoongi frowns, "I'm not sure that me being here is going to help you." "It will," Taehyung assures him, and he wants to reach for Yoongi's hand and get closer to him because that's something he would usually do to one of his best friends, but now he is afraid. Afraid that any movement can be understood wrong, afraid that anything he does might hurt Yoongi, "I'm just— I'm afraid that I'm going to lose your friendship, hyung, because I won't be able to take it." For a moment, Yoongi barely blinks, but then he playfully rolls his eyes, "It usually takes more than just this to get rid of me." Taehyung swallows hard, "I just don't know how to act, because I'm scared that—" "That you can't feel the same for me," Yoongi cuts him, and his voice is calm, "Relax, Taehyungie. I never thought you would. Besides, if it pacifies your heart, I'm not in love with you. It's not that deep." To that, Taehyung knows how to react, "Because of Hoseok-hyung." Yoongi nods sadly, shaking his head and chuckling without humor, "It's amazingly uncomfortable. It's like I can care about lots of people, and feel something bigger for a few of them, but my path always leads me back to him." Taehyung doesn't say anything. He looks at his own feet, unsure of how to act. He has always wanted Hoseok to realize Yoongi's feelings so they could be together and they could both be happy. Being part of any of their lives like anything more than a friend had never crossed his mind, and he feels guilty because, even now, he can't picture it. "You don't have to worry about me," Yoongi says, almost like he is reading Taehyung's mind, "Whatever it is that I feel for you will go away eventually. Though, all I said about Jungkook remains truth, you know? I wouldn't sabotage your relationship if it was healthy, simply out of jealousy." Taehyung nods, and it's almost sad, "I believe you, hyung. I just— You said there was a chance of him liking me. What changed on your judgement from yesterday to today?" "Nothing," Yoongi says, "I still think it's possible that he actually likes you. Actually, I think everyone except for Jiminie is it's ninety-nine percent most likely to have feelings for you than for anyone else. The thing is, I need you to know the things he does when his feelings aren't real." Taehyung takes a deep breath, "Wouldn't you be betraying his trust or something like that?" Yoongi shrugs, "Honestly, I don't mind. I'd rather betray his trust than yours." That causes Taehyung to stare at him, frightened, and then he lets out a sigh, nodding slightly, "Okay. Then, tell me."*** When Taehyung heads to the University later, where Jungkook agreed to meet with him, he's feeling weird. Not the usual kind of weird, but the kind of weird that curls up in his stomach and nearly tells him that something incredibly bad is about to happen. He thinks that maybe he should go find Jimin first, but he needs to have that conversation with Jungkook, so he simply grabs his cell phone while walking and types below Jimin's name. To Jiminie:i'm heading to the university nowi'm going to talk to jungkooki've talked to yoongi-hyung He hopes that Jimin can answer him before he actually gets there, because having his best friend by his side would be useful now; mainly with what Yoongi told him. He has faith on the fact that Jungkook truly likes him, but, today, it's his personal duty to pull the entire truth off his dongsaeng, whether it is for the best or for the worst. Soon enough, his cell phone buzzes, and he anxiously reaches to take it out of his pocket. From Jiminie: what are you going to do
To Jiminie:
i need to talk to jungkook From Jiminie: you might regret this, taehyung did you listen to yoongi-hyung? To Jiminie:yes, okay?i believe himand i believe youand i am sorry From Jiminie: i'm not asking for you to apologize taehyung it's not about that To Jiminie:i just gotta talk to him, jiminiei gotta From Jiminie: whatever taehyung i'll be here anyways Taehyung sighs; he knows exactly what that means. That's what Jimin says to resume "You will be screwed and I will be here to pick up the pieces." Finally, he arrives at the University, and finding Jungkook isn't hard. They've agreed to meet at the first building, and Taehyung spots Jungkook with two cups of coffee in his hands. His heart tightens at the sight; here he is, ready to confront Jungkook — not for the first time, neither for the second, and he feels a mix of disappointment with himself and mistrust with Jungkook. "Hi," he says, weakly, as he walks towards Jungkook, and the younger male smiles. "Hey, hyung," Jungkook greets, excitedly, stretching out one of the coffees. Timidly, Taehyung reaches for it. "You didn't need to buy me coffee." Jungkook shrugs, "I don't mind. You said you wanted to talk, did something happen?" Taehyung chews on his own bottom lip, unceasingly looking away; the less his eyes meet Jungkook's, the best. Apparently, Jungkook catches on pretty fast, because he lets out a kind and small though humourless laugh. "Have you been talking to Yoongi-hyung about my past again? Or was it Hoseok-hyung now?" His tone isn't annoyed or angry, but it wouldn't take much for anyone to notice how bothered he is. Therefore, Taehyung decides to make it quick, and spews all he has to say in one go, "I've talked to Yoongi-hyung, and, for his own personal reasons, he decided to tell me about the fact that you choose people to make them fall for you and, then, you break their heart. He claims you did that to Yugyeom and tried to do it with him. Honestly, right now, I don't mind. I just want to know if that's what you're doing with me." Taehyung isn't sure about what kind of reaction to expect from Jungkook. Perhaps yelling, or an annoyed answer or instinct, but what he gets is worse; Jungkook's eyes turn cold, freezing, as he shakes his head minimally, and he mouths, "Wow." "Wow?" Taehyung asks, blinking, "Is that all? Jungkook-ah, please say you have an explanation." "Of course I do," Jungkook replies, and he sounds offended, "You just can't wait me to react nicely at this. Wouldn't it be a shock if your best friend had gone around telling the person you like bad things about you? How would you react if it was Yoongi-hyung saying those things to me about you?" Taehyung doesn't answer, he simply stares, because there is no answer — Yoongi wouldn't. Mainly, because Yoongi has feelings for Taehyung, but also because he wouldn't lie; Taehyung knows that, and he wants to understand exactly why Jungkook and Yoongi seem both like they could be trusted, yet, contain two completely different histories. "Just tell me," Taehyung requests, and it's weak again, "Please." Jungkook blinks, sighs, and then stretches out his free hand for Taehyung to take, "Okay. Let's just talk somewhere more private than the opened campus and I'll explain everything." With no strenght to fight back or refuse it, Taehyung complies, accepting Jungkook's hand and walking next to him, bodies covering each other so most people won't notice that they are having any skinship. The place Jungkook leads Taehyung is the University's auditorium, and they slowly walk to the stage's side, Taehyung's mind threatening to explode at any moment now. "There," Taehyung says, "We're here. Tell me." Jungkook turns back to him, bending over to place his coffee on the ground, but Taehyung doesn't follow it. He holds the cup in his hands, warm steam hitting his fingers, not hot enough to burn anymore. Then, all of sudden, Jungkook lets go of Taehyung's hand, and, it might be just Taehyung's mind working too much, but he almost sees the kindness and amenity dripping off Jungkook's eyes, leaving him for good. An uncomfortable shiver runs down Taehyung's spine and he takes his breath, waiting, trying to look patient. Jungkook absently lifts up his arm and supports it on the stage, fingers drumming it. Then, to Taehyung head's disarray, Jungkook smirks. And it's definitely not a smirk that Taehyung has ever seen the dongsaeng using before. "What do you want to hear, Taehyung?" Jungkook asks, and it's as icy as a winter breeze, "Do you want me to say that I actually care about you? Do you want me to say, no, Taehyung, you're different. I broke countless hearts before, but here you are, standing in front of me, my savior. You changed me. Is that what you want?" The air gets knocked out of Taehyung's lungs as he absorbs each of Jungkook's words, but he doesn't have the time to recover before the younger male is speaking again. Somehow, Taehyung can hear every word twice, like it's echoing; but that's not possible, right? He's not that dizzy. "You're not different," Jungkook says, "You're really not. You fell like all of them, and you questioned your friendships for me like all of them, and you let yourself be fooled like all of them." "Stop," Taehyung asks, squinting, feelings tears stinging the corners of his eyes, "You said you were in love with me, you—" "I do it to everyone, Taehyung," Jungkook replies, and it's cruel how calm he sounds, "I've said 'I'm in love with you' to people like you countless times, and it was never true." Taehyung can't move. He wants this nightmare to end now, he wants to wake up and he see the Jungkook from this morning, the one who would kiss him goodbye and be nice to him, and act kind and all those things Jungkook always did. The things he did all the time, almost like it was— Oh. Almost like it was mechanic. "Do you get it now?" Jungkook asks, eyebrows raised, and that's not the person Taehyung thought he knew, "I don't love you. I never did. They were right, Taehyung. What I'm doing right now — what I've been planning to do —, it had everything to do with breaking your heart." "Stop," Taehyung says again, this time more firmly, and Jungkook crosses his arms, not exactly seeming impressed by Taehyung's attitude. That's when Taehyung notices that his word echoed for too long, and maybe it isn't his head. Suddenly, he lifts up his chin and looks at the stage, at the surface of it. Oh, no. There's a mic. "No," Taehyung barely whispers, and faces Jungkook, a mix of anger and sadness running through his face, "Jungkook, where is this mic pluged to?" "I'm not sure," Jungkook says, "Let's hope it's not the classrooms." Before Taehyung can say anything else, someone storms in through the auditorium door, and all he can see is Jimin's raging expression before his best friend's fingers curl brutally around the collar of Jungkook's shirt, causing the younger male's balance to get lost for a second, and he almost falls with his back to the ground, caught by surprise. "What do you think you're doing?" Jimin yells, and Taehyung blinks, too shocked to move. He shakes his head, trying to recover just for a few seconds, because he knows Jungkook is utterly stronger than Jimin — and, although Jungkook doesn't seem to have to intention to fight back, Taehyung's first instict is to reach for Jimin's waist and pull him back, away from the younger. "Stop, Jiminie!" He asks, pratically hugging Jimin from behind, "Stop this!" "Jimin!" Taehyung recognizes Yoongi's voice as he enters the auditorium as well, and he can already imagine people crowding outside the place, listening to everyone through the microphone, paying attention to every detail. With Yoongi's commanding voice, Jimin loosens his grip on the fabric of Jungkook's shirt, and he only pulls away for a second before putting his arms to a better use, embracing Taehyung's shoulders and hugging his best friend. Jimin might be shorter, but Taehyung feels so much smaller at the moment. Jungkook's eyes meet Yoongi's, and he swallows hard, "You knew this was going to happen." "I don't want to hear you," Yoongi says, and he passes by Jungkook, raising his arm to turn off the microphone, exhaling authority, "This time, you went too far." "I—" "You know what I'm talking about," Yoongi cuts him, "Too far, Jungkook. You didn't have the right." Yoongi walks back to Taehyung, trying to catch the younger's eyes as Jimin holds him. When Taehyung's glance meets Yoongi's, the elder nods slowly, "It's okay, Taehyung. We're going away now." Taehyung nods, left with no strenght to do anything else, and as Jimin moves away to start walking, side by side with Yoongi, waiting for Taehyung to move along, he takes a last look at Jungkook. Even now, the dongsaeng doesn't look regretful. He clicks his tongue, reaching for the coffee on the ground like what just happened was nothing, and lifts up one eyebrow while he looks at Taehyung. "Yoongi-hyung warned you about me," Jungkook states, "You should have listened to him." And, this time, it's painful to Taehyung to admit that Jungkook is right.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Fortunately, the next few days belong to a break period in college, which means Taehyung can bury himself in his blankets and stare blankly at the ceiling, suddenly contemplating and doubting his life choices for as much time as he wants to. Somehow, the first day after Jungkook's shocking and disturbing transformation right in front of Taehyung's eyes feels numb. It's almost like Taehyung can't understand what happened, although he really tries to. For hours and hours, he keeps on wondering what reasons Jungkook would have to do all that — unsurprisingly, he finds none. Until the begining of the evening, no one comes inside Taehyung's room, complying his own request of being left alone. He feels bad for pushing them away at that moment, but he needs a few time to deal with his own silliness by himself. Just as he starts to feel lonely, though, he hears the sound of the door being opened and Jimin's figure shows up at the entrance of the room. He's got his arms crossed and his posture is careful. "Hi, Taetae," he says, slowly, "Can I come in?" Taehyung nods, supporting his hands on the matress so he can change his position, sitting down with his back against the headboard. Jimin walks to the bed and sits at the edge of it, which causes Taehyung to wrinkle his nose. "No," Taehyung says, pushing the blankets aside, "Come here." With a small smile, Jimin moves so he is by Taehyung's side, sliping his legs under the blanket and putting his arms around his dongsaeng's shoulders, bringing him closer. Taehyung leans his head and places it on Jimin's shoulder, relaxing. Their hands find their way to each other, fingers tangling and squeezing. "How are you feeling?" Jimin asks in a low tone. "Dizzy, I guess," Taehyung assumes, "I'm having a hard time believing it happened." "Jeon Jungkook sucks," the elder spits out, almost making Taehyung laugh, "I wish he wasn't Yoongi-hyung's friend. I would beat the crap out of him then." "Would you, now?" "Yeah, I would," Jimin says, "I would definitely." Taehyung nods and buries his face on Jimin's shoulder, detesting himself for getting his best friend worried over something like that. Jimin should be studying, minding his business so he can have a future, and not taking care of Taehyung for having a delusional one. "Hey, I can read your mind, did you know that?" Jimin asks, poking Taehyung's cheek with his index finger, and the younger male smiles weakly. "Can you?" "Yes, I can," Jimin confirms, "And I don't want you thinking that any of this is your fault, or that taking care of you bothers me, or that you could have done anything to change what happened, okay?" Taehyung wants to burst out in laughs, because Jimin has known him for long enough to make it pretty clear that, although reading minds isn't possible, he can very well read Taehyung's entire body language. Taehyung wants to laugh, wants to smile, wants to play with Jimin, but, when he starts to say something, all that leaves his lips is a hiccup. Well, isn't he ridiculous. Jimin tightens his hold around Taehyung, arms surrounding him in a protective way that belongs to no one but Jimin. Taehyung isn't sure why he is crying; maybe it's because of Jungkook, maybe it's because he just realized how unffair he had been to Yoongi and Hoseok, maybe it's because he finally can see how much more Jimin deserved all this time — maybe because of all of it at once. "It's not— It's not that big of a deal for me to be crying," Taehyung tries to say, voice muffled, and Jimin moves him away just a bit, raising the sleeve of his coat to the points of his fingers and using it to wipe away Taehyung's tears. "You don't need a big reason to cry, Taetae," Jimin says, "Just cry it out and you will be fine." "I'm an actor," Taehyung argues, "I am supposed to be an actor, at least. Why can't I hide it, then? Why do I feel like I'm so pathetic that acting will mean pretending and that I can't pretend?" "Don't say that, please," Jimin asks him, hand squeezing Taehyung's tighter, exhaling safety, "You're not pathetic at all, Taetae. And an actor is supposed to fake tears during a scene, not avoid them outside a set. Besides, no one else is coming in. I'm the only one here. You can cry all you want and I can pretend it didn't happen later." A small sob slips out Taehyung's lips and Jimin tugs him closer, his free arm running up and down Taehyung's arm, trying his best to comfort the dongsaeng. "Am I really— really in love with him?" Taehyung asks, between tiny hiccups, and Jimin frown is hardly noticeable, "I mean, am I— Is it really possible to be in love with someone after a few weeks?" Jimin's lips purse, "I'm not sure, Taetae, whether you were in love with him or with the feeling he gave you," he admits, and Taehyung sighs deeply, "But I guess we will figure that out within a small period of time, now that he is not going to be a fake anymore." Taehyung nods, eyelashes fluttering slightly, sleepiness starting to overcome his body after hours without closing his eyes properly, "I think I'm going to take a nap, Jiminie. You can go and study—" "Yeah, you really are an idiot if you think I'm leaving you," Jimin smiles gently, "You can sleep. I might sleep, too. We don't have to wake up until tomorrow, if you don't want to." Taehyung knows what happened to him isn't serious enough for Jimin to be forced to keep an eye on him so he won't cry his eyes out, but it isn't the first time Jimin sleeps by his side after something bad happens, and he won't complain of the person who is pretty much his brother being there for him. Perhaps, he's going to wake up renewed, feeling like a brand new and bright person. Yeah, he can live with that. "Okay," he finally gives in, and Jimin slips his arms away from Taehyung's shoulders, giving the dongsaeng space to turn in bed and embrace one of the pillows. Jimin lays by his side, pulling the blankets up to his chest, and Taehyung relaxes, closing his eyes, and, eventually, falling asleep.*** When Taehyung wakes up, it's already morning, and Jimin isn't by his side anymore. He squints, trying to get used to the light coming from the narrow opened gap of the window. He can smell toasted bread in the kitchen — the only food they had at the place that wasn't frozen or canned. Usually, when they have no classes and Jimin wakes up first, he heads to the gym to practice some of his dance, his second passion, and Taehyung is responsible for the toasts. It appears that, today, Jimin is extra motherly. Before standing up, Taehyung checks his cell phone, and finds in it more texts than he expected to find. There's Yoongi's texts, and Hoseok's texts, and even Namjoon's texts. He smiles fondly to himself as he reads each of the conversations. From Yoongi-hyung: hey how are you feeling i mean aside from the obvious you already fell asleep didn't you just text me once you're awake He laughs softly, moving on to Hoseok's. From Hoseok-hyung: kiiiiiiiiiiiim taehyuuuuuuuung i heard all that happened do you want me to punch someone hyung is going to protect you hyung as in a hyung other than me i'll just comfort you i can't fight give me a call if you need anything Once again, Taehyung laughs, and checks Namjoon's texts after. From Namjoon-hyung: taehyung-ah are you okay hoseok told me what happened aish i'm honestly so pissed off call me or text me whenever you need something The texts aren't much, but they're enough to warm up Taehyung's heart in the morning — along with the familiar smell of toasted bread coming from outside the room. The whole morning would be incredibly domestic, hasn't his thoughts gotten occupied with Jungkook everytime he tried to forget. He insisted on seeing those eyes, the eyes he had seen a day before with so much shine and fondness for him, turning now cold and dim. Somehow, he imagines Hoseok and Namjoon will be less worried than Yoongi; therefore, he only focus on answering Yoongi's text with a simple "i'm okay, i'm fine, don't worry, hyung," before standing up properly and walking to the kitchen, following the toasted bread's scent. Taehyung hums loudly as he closes his eyes and inhales, "It smells good." Jimin looks at him above his shoulder, rolling his eyes amusingly, "Stop overreacting, it's just toasted bread." "No, it's morning toasted bread, and they always smell better when they're newly made," Taehyung says, standing near his best friend, in front of the toaster, "You would know if you stayed home at the mornings." Jimin nods, "Yeah, too bad gym takes away that pleasure. Did you sleep well?" "Why do you keep asking me if I'm doing things well since yesterday?" Taehyung jokingly complains, supporting his elbows on the counter, "I'm fine, Jiminie. You don't have to be concerned." "I'm not concerned, I'm taking care of you, you ungrateful best friend," Jimin says, "Besides, you do still look pretty down." "I'll cheer myself up somehow," Taehyung assures him, and a smile appears on his face when the toaster makes a click, announcing the toasted bread ready, "Can I eat the first one?" "All yours," Jimin waves with his head, "I'm gonna go out in a few minutes to buy some stuff my Corporal Conscience professor requested. Do you feel like coming with me?" Taehyung wrinkles his nose slightly and shakes his head, "Don't think so. I'm going to avoid going out for the next days and, you know, actually seeing someone who goes to our University." If he thinks well, that's one of the parts that causes his heart to tighten the most. Jungkook had already runned out of all the decency possible by tricking Taehyung like that, but plugging a microphone that would turn that humiliation into something public was completely out of limits. It only makes Taehyung more sure about the fact that, if Jungkook ever had had feelings for him, he wouldn't do it that way. "I understand it must feel terrible, I really do," Jimin says with a kind expression, "But you can't hide from them forever. Besides, you didn't do anything, it was all him. They're not going to be bothering you repeatedly because of something Jungkook did. We're not in high school anymore." Taehyung sighs, "I guess you're right. Still, I prefer to stay home a while." Jimin nods, spinning on his heels so he can grab his keys on the counter and sending his best friend a last optimistic glance, "You're gonna be fine, right?" "Totally," Taehyung says while reaching for the toasted bread and biting off a large piece, "Marvelous." "Call me if you need anything." The younger male nods, raising his cell phone at the level of his eyes, "Anytime I need anything." Jimin still stares at him for a few seconds before leaving and closing the door behind him. Taehyung's knees nearly feel like giving way, but he keeps himself firm, taking a deep breath and eating the entire bread at once. His head slightly aches and he feels like drowning in blankets and thoughts all over again. Right before he has the chance to, his cell phone buzzes and Yoongi's name bumps on on the screen. From Yoongi-hyung: i'm coming over Taehyung frowns. To Yoongi-hyung:did something happen? From Yoongi-hyung: do you have amnesia or something nevermind just now that i'm coming over i'm bringing holly with me btw Taehyung's eyes widen for a second. Holly is the name of Yoongi's dog, the light of his life, his most precious love. Usually, Yoongi didn't bring Holly to meet his friends or let him near them once they were at his house, mainly because, around Holly, Yoongi turned soft. Not slightly soft, but really soft. He completely melted, and melting in front of his friends who should keep his intimidating image in their heads wasn't smart. That's why Taehyung is so taken aback once he reads the text. He only texts an "okay" back and throws himself on the couch, suddenly rethinking all his life choices. He remembers the first time he talked to Jungkook, and he remembers being so sure that he could trust him, despise everything Yoongi and anyone else was saying. It was like he felt a connection strong enough to ignore rational thoughts. And that was the worst part. Taehyung wonders whether what he's feeling right now can be called being in love. He doesn't think it should; according to what everyone says, every nice and excited statement, being in love was supposed to feel good. Like, when Taehyung slept at Jungkook's, or when they met at the studio and Jungkook smiled and Taehyung knew he was smiling to him. If it was all so freaking important to him, how could Jungkook not feel anything? Taehyung remembers his conversation with Yugyeom. He recalls the words "the hardest part of falling in love is falling out of it" and he knows the impact of the said phrase. He wonders if only a small drop of love will be left in his heart after the original shock goes away, like Yugyeom said, though; because, right now, he can feel all of the drops, and they're not planning on going away. For just a few seconds, Taehyung contemplates the name "Jungkook-ah" on his contacts list and thinks of pressing it, and then, when the next board appears on the screen, he wonders what his fingers would lead him to click on. Delete? Call? Text? Probably, to the most stupid of the alternatives. What was the worst that could happen, anyway? Jungkook had already broken his heart. What else would he have to say by phone? He's about to do something he might regret when someone knocks on the door, and he realizes he might have been thinking for longer than it seemed. He shakes his head, places his cell phone on the counter and moves to open the door. Before him, he sees Yoongi, holding an excited and clingy Holly, who seems to keep on moving, trying to reach for Yoongi's face or anything at the level. "Seriously, hyung, I think he's trying to kill you," Taehyung comments, holding back a small laugh. "Yeah, sure he is," Yoongi says, and, as Taehyung gives him space to enter, he bends over to put Holly down and allow him to walk freely. He's free to do that because both, Taehyung and Jimin find the dog so cute and adorable that nothing he does is a problem, "How are you, by the way? We haven't talked since, well, you know." "I guess I'm doing fine," Taehyung lies, walking inside with Yoongi, sitting beside Holly on the couch and caressing the dog's fluffy ears, "I'm not gonna cry over that." Yoongi looks at him through his eyelashes, "Why do I feel like you already did?" Taehyung looks away, "Must be your impression, hyung." "Or I'm just not blind," Yoongi states, and Taehyung frowns, "Your eyes are still kind of reddened. Don't worry, though, I'm not here to give you a pep talk or anything like that. First of all, just wanted to know how you're doing. And, well, second of all, since I was kind of the one who started with this history and I must take the responsability, who is going to be your photographer now?" "Oh," Taehyung mouths, unable to make a sound for a moment. He hasn't thought of this. With all that kept on surrounding his head about Jeon Jungkook, whoever he was going to have as his photographer now wasn't one of his many worries. However, now that Yoongi is bringing that up, it might be important. The project is going to be worth a lot, and Taehyung needs it if he wants to keep on following his dream with the same fervour, "I just I'm just going to— I don't know. Is there any other amateur photographer that you know?" Yoongi's lips press in a thin line, "I don't think so. I can request a professional one, but it will take a while to find one that accepts to work unpaid. You might lose a week or two of work. I do think you're capable of recovering it later, though." Taehyung sighs, "Wouldn't it be a lot tougher?" "Well, yes," Yoongi admits, "But it's not like you're going to keep Jungkook as your photographer." On spur of moment, Taehyung falls into silence. He knows it's the right thing to his heart to simply let go of those two weeks — and Jungkook along with it — and hire a new someone who won't make him feel bad everytime he steps into the studio. Nonetheless, he should start being professional now if he wants to succeed with his career, which requires comunication with people regardless of conflicts. "Wait a second," Yoongi says as he notices Taehyung's hesitation, "You do intend to keep Jungkook as your photographer?" "It's not like he's my first choice," Taehyung says, absently running his fingers through Holly's soft fur, stroking the dog's belly playfully, "But I just— I don't feel like losing time or points on this project because of my personal life. Shouldn't it be different from my professional life?" "You're still not working for someone, Taehyung," Yoongi argues, "There's no need to be that professional in this case." "What if I want it?" Taehyung asks, and Yoongi looks incredibly taken aback, "What if I say I want to be professional this way, will you support me?" Yoongi's jaw stiffens, but he nods at a slow pace, "Yeah, I will." That does it.*** It's already evening, and Yoongi has already left when Taehyung gathers courage enough to grab his cell phone and search for Jungkook's number. It takes all of Taehyung's boldness to type that number, and it requires him to drop his own pride so he can put the cell phone against his ear and take a deep breath, determined to do the right thing. He already knows his friend's opinions; now, it's time to put his own in action. "Taehyung?" Jungkook's voice, now raspy and provoked, "What do you want?" Something strikes in Taehyung's heart. If Jungkook knows it's him, it means his number is still recorded in Jungkook's cell phone — either that or Jungkook has it memorized, which is unlikely. "We need to talk," Taehyung says, and his voice sounds firmer than he thought he would be able to make it sound. "Oh, no. Do I have to tell you all of that again? Are you going to say you think that was all an outbreak or—" "It's not about that, Jungkook," Taehyung cuts him, feeling brave all of sudden, and Jungkook goes silent, "I understand what happened. The whole University does, actually. I'm calling you to talk about our professional relationship." Jungkook stays quiet for a few seconds before finally replying, "Are you saying you intend to keep me as your photographer?" Taehyung nods mentally, although Jungkook can't see it, and proceeds, "Yes, I do. If it depends on me, I'm not changing photographers now, in the middle of a really important project. Everyone has a different style, and every picture will have a distinct display from yours, and I don't want my professor giving me a minor grade because of a personal disturbance. So, do you accept to keep on being my photographer?" Unsurprisingly, Taehyung's words seem to shock Jungkook, because everyone falls in a painful silence for a few minutes, nearly like Jungkook is recovering from all he just heard. Then, his voice comes back, "I'm not planning on being called unprofessional for dropping something in the middle of it, either. I accept it. However, this time, you are going to have to follow my one condition: be professional, Taehyung. How does that sound?" Taehyung swallows a knot in his throat, ignoring the wierd sensation of invisible knuckles colliding against his stomach, "It sounds astonishing, Jungkook. I guess I will see you next Monday." "Yeah. Bye." Once the line goes silent, Taehyung lets out his longest sigh and rubs his own face, pausing at his temples to draw small circles on it with his fingers, feeling a headache even stronger spreading. At least, this time, he made it. In a few days, he's going to be forced to show up at the pictures studio and greet Jungkook and act professional, rejecting all of his buried feelings for his own sake. And he is going to make it.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
For the next day, Taehyung feels nervous. He knows that, in a few, he's going to be forced to face Jungkook and he's going to be put against the hardest test of his entire life; faking everything he feels. It's a Saturday morning when he thinks deeper about it, right after he wakes up, keeping himself under the blankets so Jimin won't notice he is already awake — and thinky. He tries imagining the worst that could happen. Gladly, he can't see quite the situation, due the fact his reputation is already pretty much ruined in college and, well, around everywhere someone told about it. He's still thinking, sinking in thoughts, when his phone buzzes. He reaches for it and opens the text easily. From Yoongi-hyung: morning taehyung are you and jiminie busy today? To Yoongi-hyung:nah not reallywhy tho? From Yoongi-hyung: remember the underground club i used to attend to? it's reopening today i already invited hoseok and namjoon so you and jimin should go too Somehow, if Taehyung hadn't had all the conversations with Jimin and Yoongi, it would be harsh to believe that Yoongi actually has feelings for him. The texts are just the same as ever, and even the elder's way of calling Taehyung and Jimin hasn't changed. It's a relief, really, because the last thing Taehyung could handle right now was hurting Yoongi without meaning to. That's when he remembers it; he still owes his friends an apology. Not Jimin — they've settled that — but the rest of them. Namjoon, Hoseok, but, mainly, Yoongi. To Yoongi-hyung:we'll be thereby the way, hyung, are u busy today afternoon? From Yoongi-hyung: well not until six, why To Yoongi-hyung:do you feel like grabbing a lunch or something in a few hours?i mean i still think there's some things i didn't get the chance to say sinceyou knowlike, thank you From Yoongi-hyung: you can tell me by text or at night Taehyung chews on his bottom lip, aware that it might sound weird to Yoongi, but he feels like he needs it — like they all do. To Yoongi-hyung:i'd like it better in a lunchi'm okay with it if you'll feel uncomfortable i was just thinking From Yoongi-hyung: no it's fine any place in mind? To Yoongi-hyung:maybe a japanese place???? From Yoongi-hyung: yeah why not Taehyung sighs in relief and finishes up settling the place with Yoongi before actually standing up and authorizes the sunbeams inside by opening the window widely. Today, there's no scent of toasted bread or anything delicious coming from the kitchen, which must mean Jimin is already out to the gym — and that's good, because it's the signal that he's grown aware that Taehyung doesn't need to be taken under nobody's wings. Taehyung makes his own toasted bread and eats it by himself as well, and, when Jimin finally arrives, sweaty and panting because of all the dancing — literally, the whole morning —, Taehyung hands him a bread with a smile on his face. "You look better today," Jimin comments, "I'm glad you're getting over it." "Yes, I am," Taehyung says, the lie leaving a bitter trail on his tongue, "Yoongi-hyung texted me, by the way. His favorite underground club is reopening and he wants us to go." Jimin nods, "Do you feel like going?" "Yeah," Taehyung replies, "I don't see why not. I've always wanted to go to that place, anyways, I think it might be nice. Besides, there's nothing better to forget than clubbing, right?" Jimin smiles, reaching to lock his arm around Taehyung's neck — which isn't exactly hard, but not easy either, seeing their height difference and everything, "I'm glad you're trying, Taetae." Taehyung smiles, "Yeah," he barely whispers, "Me too. By the way, I'm going out for a bit today. Just a few hours." "Before the evening?" Jimin asks, moving away to go and grab a juice on the counter, and Taehyung nods, "Okay. Anything you want to share or just usual life?" The dongsaeng ponders, "Well, is having lunch with Yoongi-hyung something you would like me to share?" If Jimin had already drank a sip of the juice, he would probably have choked to death, "What?" "We're going out for a lunch," Taehyung says, and Jimin's stare is nearly incredulous, so Taehyung completes, "As friends." "Lunch as friends my ass," Jimin states, and Taehyung sighs, ready for whatever he needs to hear for it, "Might be just as friends for you, but did you even listen to anything I said? He has feelings for you and you're going around taking him to lunch as friends?" Taehyung clicks his tongue, "Aish, I think I prefer it when you're spoiling me." "Well, the spoiling is over," Jimin says, sighing softly as he puts his hand on Taehyung's forearm and squeezes faintly, "Taetae, I understand that you want to put things together because of all that history of not trusting Yoongi-hyung and everything, but, the more you treat him like he's somehow more than a friend, the more you're going to hurt him when you have to admit that he isn't more than a friend." Taehyung shrugs, "Why can't I try? I could fall in love with him, if I tried." Jimin's eyebrows furrow, "You know that's not true, and so do I. And, you know what? So does Yoongi-hyung. Leave him to find his way to Hoseok-hyung and find your way to someone else, Taehyungie. Trying this will only hurt him, and, since I know you care a lot about him, it's going to hurt you too." Taehyung crosses his arms, almost childish, because he detests that Jimin is right. If only he had fallen in love with Yoongi, or Hoseok, or Namjoon, or Jimin himself, life wouldn't be that unffair. "It's really just a lunch, okay?" Taehyung says, "I trust Yoongi-hyung's judgement. He knows I'm not trying to turn this into something else." Jimin sighs, nodding, "Okay," he says, "Just think straight before talking. Like, a lot of times." "Will do."*** Taehyung meets with Yoongi at the restaurant, and they enter silently, although the mood seems a lot lighter than in the previous weeks; probably because now Yoongi doesn't seem to see Taehyung as an unffair brat anymore. It's still hard to believe that, all this time, Yoongi felt something more for him. "I didn't even know you liked japanese," Taehyung comments right after they order, "I thought you would kick my butt for suggesting it today." "Hey, I don't dismiss food, you brat," Yoongi says, and it sounds so casual that gets Taehyung to crack a smile, "Now, you said you wanted to say stuff, like thank you and everything. I'm telling you that you don't have to, but, knowing you, it's not gonna work, so, go ahead." Taehyung smiles, "I'm glad you know it. I just felt incredibly unffair for doubting you guys all that time, and I honestly couldn't be more thankful for all the warnings. You guys tried to get me out of that and I kept on drowning deeper and deeper because I wanted to. The thing is, you tried hard, and I'm grateful for it." "Well, if that's what you want to hear, you're forgiven and you're welcome," Yoongi says, "However, I really don't need you to thank me for anything, Taehyungie. I would do that all over again if I got to stop you from being hurt this time." Taehyung's heart tightens in his chest; there is a perfect guy in front of him, and he is only his best friend. He wonders why can't life be like fairy tales, where that's the moment he would found out he is actually crushing on Yoongi and then move on from Jungkook. "I think I should at least try and help you too," Taehyung comments, and Yoongi frowns, "Like, for an example, let's say, with Hobi-hyung?" Yoongi laughs softly, "No, thank you." "Come on, hyung—" "Taehyungie," Yoongi cuts him, "I've had my annual rate of rejection from Hoseok already." "Aish, hyung, how do you call it rejection if you don't confess to him?" Taehyung asks, "You can't come to the conclusion that he will say no and don't ask him." Yoongi rolls his eyes, not bitterly, but usually, "He isn't too interested in me if we go to clubs together and he sticks his tongue into other people's mouths, unless that's somehow a romance of the new century or something." "Hyung, he's single now because you haven't even tried to confess," Taehyung insists, "Did you ever wonder whether he could be making out with other people in front of you to make you jealous?" "He isn't," Yoongi assures him, "Trust me, he isn't. Besides, you don't need to try and get me to date him, I'm not going to try anything with you anyway, no matter how I feel." Taehyung pouts, "You're misjudging me. You should know I wouldn't try to make you date Hobi-hyung just so you would stop having feelings for me. I'm doing it because you've been in love with him since always and I want you to be happy, just the way you want me to be happy." Yoongi nods, and they watch absently as the waiter puts their plates on the table. As soon as he goes away, bowing politely, Yoongi turns back to Taeyhung, "Thank you, Taehyung, but this is something even you can't fix. Itadakimasu." Taehyung sighs and nods slightly, reaching for his food, satisfied with the overall conversation. "Itadakimasu."*** Once the evening arrives, Taehyung and Jimin find themselves ready to go out, cool clothes on and everything. As a matter of fact, Jimin found it pretty convenient for him to be the one choosing Taehyung's outfit, aiming that Taehyung was hot enough for everyone at the club to notice him — somehow, his effort in making his best friend feel better cheered Taehyung up way more than just the clothes. "I'm excited," Jimin admits, "This is the first time ever they take us somewhere they love like that. I just hope we fit in." Taehyung smiles fondly, "Jiminie, you fit in anywhere." The thing is, Yoongi, Hoseok and Namjoon are rappers — really good ones — and, therefore, they have always searched for places where they could rap. That said club was that place. They loved it, but inviting Taehyung and Jimin to make them company had never crossed their minds before. Taehyung thinks it might surprise him, seeing rapper Yoongi instead of photographer Yoongi; rapper and underground dancer Hoseok instead of kind college student Hoseok; and monster of rap — as they called him — Namjoon instead of friendly college student Namjoon. Taehyung's phone buzzes softly and he checks it, finding Hoseok's name on the screen, along with a preview of his text. From Hoseok-hyung: we're here hurry up "Here" means at the park lot of Taehyung and Jimin's building, and they grab their respective keys and head to the car. Yoongi, Hoseok and Namjoon are already there, and Taehyung and Jimin fit themselves properly; at the back seat, with Namjoon. Yoongi is driving, so Hoseok is at the passenger seat. As soon as everyone is settled, Yoongi starts driving. "Will you guys be rapping?" Taehyung questions as soon as they start talking, "Tell me you will." "Yeah," Yoongi replies, calmly turning the wheel, face peaceful. Taehyung can't picture him rapping in an undergound club. "And Seok-ah will be dancing." "Really?" Jimin asks, excited, nearly like a child who just heard he will be seeing his idol in a show, "Aish, I want to see it." "You could dance too, Jiminie," Namjoon suggests, "You dance incredibly well, too. I bet you'd rock it." Jimin shakes his head, "I'm too— How do I say it? Ballet. Too modern dance for an underground club." "I doubt it," Taehyung says, elbowing his best friend's ribs, "I bet you would look amazing." "Yeah, you really should, Jiminie," Hoseok says, excited, "Everyone loves new styles! You're gonna rock it, if you do." The rest of their way is basically discussing whatever they are and are not going to do while on the club, and Taehyung almost forgets Jungkook. Unfortunately, "almost" isn't concrete, so flashes of Jungkook still show up at Taehyung's mind, but he tries to push them away the best way he can. Once they finally arrive at the club, Taehyung can tell the place is special. There's lots of people covering the entrance, seeing that this is the first day of the brand new club, and he can see the inside is also crowded. "How are we supposed to make our ways into this place?" Taehyung asks, eyebrows joined. Yoongi smirks, and Taehyung can almost guess what that means, "Like this." Yoongi, Hoseok and Namjoon move first. They slid their way through people, and Taehyung and Jimin try to keep up, elbowing to try and make their way between people. Finally, Yoongi is the first to reach the entrance, and the security guard who's selecting people to go in seems to have his face lightening up as he spots Yoongi. "Look who's back," he says, and Yoongi smiles — not friendly like when he's with his friends, but it's still definitely something. "We are," Yoongi answers, gesturing to Hoseok and Namjoon, "And we brought our friends," then, to Taehyung and Jimin, "So, there's five." The security guard nods, moving slightly aside so they can pass, "Have fun." "Yeah, sure." Yoongi gets inside, and his friends allow him to lead the way, although Hoseok and Namjoon don't seem like they need their way to be leaded by anyone. Taehyung looks around, impressed and amazed by the amount of people, and feeling his face lightening up as he listens to the loud and meaningful song resounding all around the place, scaping by the top of the place, which should have a roof, but has actually nothing, allowing everyone to see the night full of stars. The place is definitely away from the rest of the common clubs, and Taehyung thinks it's a waste some people can't understand this kind of expression. They pass by people dancing, people rapping, people talking, and everyone seems to be having the best time of their lifes. There's also people who are doubtless pretty in here, flirting around and winking at strangers. Taehyung follows Yoongi until they are at the place's bar, in front of a counter, side by side with lots of chairs. There's three or four bartenders taking care of everything, and they move in an incredibly good speed for it. "Wow," Taehyung mouths as they stop walking, "This place is amazing." "Right?" Hoseok says, excitedly, "I honestly missed this." Yoongi nods, "Me too." Namjoon looks above their shoulders, around the place, almost exhaling happily as he sees it all, but then his eyes catch something at the bar's chairs and he grins while turning back to his friends. "Okay, so," he starts, "Either Taehyungie or Jiminie just called Kim Minjae's attention." Yoongi frowns, suddenly bothered, "What, really?" Namjoon nods, waving absently with his head, "He's at the end of the bar. Yeah, it's definitely Taehyung who's getting flirted with today." Taehyung blinks, confused, "Who is Kim Minjae?" "He lives to flirt with everyone," Yoongi answers, nearly rude, "But he's never serious about anyone. Seriously, I thought he had found something useful to do with his life." Namjoon chuckles, "No need to be that jealous, hyung." Yoongi lifts up one eyebrow, but Taehyung notices it's too late for him to deny it once Hoseok frowns, slightly confused, trying not to look between Yoongi and Taehyung too much as he assimilates it, "Jealous?" Yoongi's eyes fly to him and he shakes his head, "You know Namjoon, ignore him." It does seem too late, though, as Hoseok nods, but his eyes aren't even a little bit convinced. "So," Jimin cleans his throat, clearing noticing the sudden mood, "Hobi-hyung, I want to see you dancing!" Hoseok's face lightens up again, although he still seems a little off, "Right! Let's go, guys, I've got a show to show you." Taehyung laughs softly, "You guys can go, I'll be there in a minute, just gonna order a water." Yoongi nods, "Okay. To find the dancers, just follow the most bustling crowd, Seok-ah will be in the center of it." His tone is full of affection, but, somehow, while turning around and moving already, Hoseok doesn't seem to notice it. Taehyung spins on his heels to support his elbows on the counter and quickly tells one of the bartender that he wants a water, and, then, for a few seconds, he waits. Somehow, Taehyung isn't surprised when the said Kim Minjae approaches him. The guy is handsome, but he does look way too full of himself and fake for Taehyung's taste. "Hi," Minjae says, and his voice is softer than Taehyung imagined. "Hi," Taehyung says back, as shortly as he can. "I'm Kim Minjae," Minjae introduces himself. "Kim Taehyung," Taehyung says back, again, and he wonders whether this Minjae guy is a fan of conversations that clearly aren't mutual. "So, you're friends with Min Yoongi," Minjae comments, and Taehyung raises one eyebrow, "Didn't think he had any friends other than Hoseok and Namjoon." "Yeah?" Taehyung asks, "And I don't think the best way to try and flirt with someone is by offending their best friends." Minjae blinks, but he doesn't seem intimidated. Instead, he lets out a small laugh, "My apologies. Just trying to be friendly." "How about 'hey, first time here?' or something like it? It's definitely older, but it's a lot more efficient." Minjae nods, "Let me try again. Hey, first time here?" Taehyung squints, "Yeah, you're a failure." He doesn't say it in a harsh way, though. He is not that rude. The thing is, doesn't matter how much he tells himself that's what he should be doing, flirting with random strangers and getting Jungkook out of his mind, he still can't. "So, should I try harder?" Minjae asks, eyebrows slightly raised. "Maybe the next time," Taehyung says, thanking and paying the water that is placed on the counter for him, drinking it on one go, "Right now, gotta watch my friends. See you around." He doesn't wait for an answer. All he does is search for the place where people are dancing, and he doesn't take long to find it. Hoseok is right there, in the middle, dancing like a true professional, getting people to yell and cheer for him nonstop. Yoongi is watching with his arms crossed, but there's a proud smile on his face. Taehyung reaches for Jimin, supporting his hands on his best friend's shoulders, and they smile at each other. "Is your mind well?" Taehyung nods, "Yeah. I'm having fun tonight." I'm having fun tonight, he repeats to himself. And repeats. And repeats. And he does.*** The day after going out clubbing turns out to be great. Taehyung and Jimin didn't drink more than a shot the night before, so there's no headache or hangover the morning after. Actually, Taehyung feels a lot better. He has seen Yoongi and Hoseok and Namjoon rapping and they are amazing, nearly like his best friends turned into idols in the middle of his life. Thanks to that, somehow, he takes the week well. Everytime he remembers Jeon Jungkook, he pushes the thought away, hoping that, eventually, it will give up and never return. That works pretty well until the last day of his classes break. Jimin is not sleeping at their apartment, because the dancing team has plans and they are staying up late, shaping new routines that cannot work without Jimin. He even suggests that Taehyung could come with him, but facing Yugyeom right now isn't exactly what he needs, so he feels forced to refuse it. Then, it's while Taehyung is studying, drowning in books and notes, that his peace shatters itself in pieces. When Taehyung's phone buzzes, he could think it is anyone; Yoongi, Hoseok, Namjoon, even Jimin, who's supposed to be busy at the moment, but he could never imagine that, as he grabbed the cell phone, the name stamped on the screen would be Jungkook's. Frowning, he clicks on the screen and leads the phone to his ear, "Hello?" "Taehyung," Jungkook starts, and he sounds somewhere between shaky and puffy, breath unsteady, "Before you say anything, I know I should be calling anyone but you, but Yoongi-hyung won't answer and Jin-hyung isn't home, so I didn't know what to do—" "Jungkook," Taehyung cuts him, suddenly feeling waves of concern flooding his chest and stomach, "What is wrong?" "I'm lost," Jungkook says, "I mean, not exactly lost, I know the road I'm in and I know how to get here but I've got no car or money to take a bus or a taxi home, so I just— I have no idea how to get back to my place." Taehyung stands up from his bed before he even realizes he's doing it, "Are you out of Seoul?" "Not exactly," Jungkook replies, and, for a second, Taehyung hears cars moving near him, "It's a road that leads to outside Seoul. There's not really lots of houses or anyone I can ask for help without being taken as a criminal here. Listen, I know I'm the last person you want to see these days, I'm completely aware, but if you could only call Yoongi-hyung or—" "Oh, stop it, Jungkook," Taehyung interrupts him, already heading to the kitchen and searching for his keys, "If Yoongi-hyung could answer right now, he would have answered you. I don't care how much you despise me or anything, I guess I'm your only option right now. Are you alone there? Are there people on the streets?" "Just a few," the dongsaeng answers, "I don't think there will be lots of people for any longer, it's getting too late by now." Taehyung hums, "Okay. Do you know exactly where you are?" "More or less, I guess?" "Text me the exact location, Jungkook," Taehyung tells him, finding his keys and wrapping his fingers painfully around it, practically running to the door, "Don't be too obvious on the road. I'll be there as fast as I can."*** Favorably, the data Jungkook sends Taehyung about the road is quite enough for him to know how to get there. Taehyung doesn't have a new or fancy car, but he does have a old fashioned one his mother gift him after getting herself a modern and fresh one. He usually prefers to take taxis or a bus, but, right now, he wastes no time grabbing the car's forgotten keys and drive with all the quickness that the speed limit allows him to use. It's not a surprise that he can hear his own heartbeats in his ears; this is Jungkook, the guy he's in love with, left alone on the road for some reason, not at all safe from everything that could go near him. Taehyung knows he would get Jimin's reproval in case he told this, but he has no other choice. He won't be able to sleep in peace ever again if he just leaves Jungkook like that and — ugh, he doesn't even like to think about it — something happens to him. About twenty-five minutes later, his cell phone tells him that he's nearby and that his speed should be decreased so he can park properly. The road he's in is even more scary than he thought, somehow empty of people and full of a threat air he doesn't enjoy, not even a little bit. Taehyung can't quite describe his relief once he spots Jungkook, looking around fearfully and rubbing his arms, most likely because of the cold breeze. Taehyung slowly parks close to him and Jungkook also sees him soon, and Taehyung takes a deep breath as he notices Jungkook's shoulders relaxing visibly. "Come on in," Taehyung says, leaning to open the passenger's seat door, "Are you okay?" "Yeah," Jungkook answers, chest going up and down as he closes the door and puts on his belt, glancing at Taehyung with hesitation, cleaning his throat, "I have no idea of how to thank you for coming." Taehyung swallows hard, looking away, going back to turning on the car and keeping his eyes focused on the road, "It's nothing, I couldn't just let you here." Jungkook looks down; Taehyung doesn't see it, but he isn't meant to, anyway, "Yes, you could." Taehyung options to pretend he didn't hear Jungkook's last comment, simply turning the wheel on his hands and making their way back to the main parts of Seoul, the ones that surely didn't come out any horror movies. In some such way, Taehyung is going back way lighter than a few minutes ago, because now Jungkook is here, in the car, going back home, safe, and Taehyung has nothing else to worry about. At the same time, there's a small doubt in his mind, and he means to ask Jungkook about it — it's his right to know, after all —, but, before he gets the chance to, Jungkook himself speaks. "If you're wondering why I'm here," Jungkook starts, staring out of the window, "It's because of one of the guys who I... screwed up with. If it comforts you at all." Taehyung frowns, "What? What does you standing in the middle of a road without money or a car have to do with one of the guys you 'screwed up with'?" Jungkook shrugs slightly, "His name is Mingyu, he was my— well, let's up it in the way that's probably in your mind, my victim before Yugyeom. It just happens that Mingyu is quite rich, so he settled a fake dream job interview for me around and sent some people to rob me just when I got here, he even made the guys tell me it was him to make sure I would know. His contact, who talked to me about the interview, even told me to take a bus on my way, because it would make the trip easier. I fell like an idiot for it." Oh, well. That should get Taehyung feeling nice, right? Whoever Mingyu is, he did what should have been done. He got Jungkook trapped in a trick, just like he seemed to do with everyone else. Taehyung, Yugyeom, and whoever else's heart Jungkook broke should be all thankful. Then, why isn't Taehyung thankful? "Well, that's really stupid," Taehyung finally says, and Jungkook lifts up an eyebrow at him." "Why the heck would you think that?" "I don't see how fighting flame with flame would stop a fire," Taehyung answers, shoulders jerking slightly, "So, he got his revenge on you, so what? Does he feel better now? Why should he? He's bad, too, if he's putting you in danger for the sake of it." Jungkook shakes his head in disbelief, letting out a humourless laugh, "You are insane. Are you going to say you don't want to see me humiliated right now? After what I did?" "The only thing I'm gonna say is that I don't like talking about it," Taehyung says, abruptly, "And, trust me, if I wanted to see you humiliated, coming to pick you up today would have been the last thing I would have done." Jungkook seems to be about to say something, but he swallows it back, lips pressed together as he goes back to staring outside the window. Taehyung suppresses a sigh of alleviation for noticing he won't be needing to take that conversation further. If there's something he doesn't want, it's to admit how much of an idiot he must be for not wishing Jungkook anything bad. In one way or another, Taehyung comes to the conclusion that being on the same car as Jungkook for a while, returning to Seoul under a cloudy night is not half as bad as Taehyung thought it would be. Standing in front of a camera that is being held by Jungkook in a studio where everyone is looking forward for what is going to happen to them will probably be thousands of times worse than this, therefore, Taehyung couldn't mind less the fact that he's in a peaceful car — no matter how tense the mood is — driving quietly and aware that he might just have helped Jungkook quite a lot. As soon as Taehyung parks in front of Jungkook's building, the dongsaeng seems to be a bit too uncomfortable to leave just yet, like there's still something he has to say. Taehyung gives him his time. He's in no hurry tonight, and neither must be Jungkook. "Taehyung, I'm really—" Jungkook starts, but he stops himself, lips pressing together, and Taehyung thinks he might have just thought of apologizing, but maybe this is only his mind telling him to see the best in people again, "Just, thank you. Like, a lot." Taehyung swallows hard, taking a deep breath, the word 'anytime' caught on the tip of his tongue, "Your welcome. Though, can I— Can I tell you something?' Jungkook nods slightly, "Yeah, go ahead." "Today, you saw that I didn't lie to you," Taehyung says, slowly, "You got your proof that, yes, I'm in love with you. That's the only reason why I would come running to help you, and you know that, don't you?' Jungkook stares at him, silent, "What's your point? I made my feelings clear as well." "That's exactly my point," Taehyung says, "You feel nothing for me, although I feel a lot for you, so, the only thing I'm going to ask you is, please, Jungkook, don't try and use me," he proceeds, and Jungkook frowns, "Don't tell me to do things for you because you know I like you. That would be too low, even after all you did. Just— Just don't do it. Don't ask for me unless it's urgent, like today. And don't think I'll always come, because, in love or not, I still love myself more than I could ever love anyone else." Taehyung's words seem to leave Jungkook speechless for a few seconds, because he only stares, squinting slightly, like he's doubting or contemplating all of his words. Finally, once he speaks, his words are relaxed, and it almost worries Taehyung, "Fine. Take today as the first and last day I did it." Taehyung has to gather all of his courage to simply nod instead of trying to explain himself in a better way, "Okay." Sparing Taehyung a last glance, Jungkook undoes his belt and leaves the car, closing the door with way too much caution, not even looking back as he enters the building and disappears with the door closing. Taehyung lets out a breath he didn't know he was holding and lowers his head to support his forehead on the car's wheel, sighing. I did the right thing, he tells himself, over and over again. I did the right thing.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
It's Monday morning when Taehyung realizes he is a few hours from meeting with Jeon Jungkook again; this time, having to face everyone who heard all the bad things Jungkook threw at him, and still, his biggest challenge will be to hide his pathetic feelings. Jimin doesn't leave Taehyung's side the whole morning; he's not called Taehyung's best friend for nothing, after all. Sometimes, Taehyung stops to think and comes to the conclusion that he doesn't know how some people can bear the weight of the world without someone like Jimin by their side. Besides that, Yoongi, Hoseok and Namjoon texted Taehyung once each in the morning, making sure he would be there for the photoshoot and college. He confirms it in each of the questions. Once he arrives at the university, he finds out it's easier said than done. As expected, all eyes turn to him, and he feels suddenly like the smallest person in the world. Jimin's arms on his waist are surely a relief, but it's not enough for him to act like all of this isn't affecting him at all. He hears small laughs or talks around the hallways and he can tell they are about him, mainly when he looks up and people look away. "Aish, is everyone running out of things to do these days?" Jimin practically hisses as they walk by the hallways, clearly annoyed, "I see no other reason for paying so much attention to us." "Jiminie, it's okay," Taehyung shakes his head, "They all heard it, it's useless to try and stop all the mocking. Let's just hope they will forget it eventually." "They better do it," Jimin says, "Or else—" "Or else nothing," Taehyung insists, grabbing his best friend's hands and squeezing softly, "Listen, it's really sweet that you're worried for me and all, but I'm telling you there's nothing to worry about, alright? If I want to be an actor, I have to start my lessons of getting laughed at, right? I'm gonna get used to it in no time and then nothing else will get to me." Jimin's expression softens as he runs his fingers through his own smooth hair, "Just— Don't worry with looking fine, okay? There's no problem in showing weakness right now, everyone would have taken it a lot worse than you, and I am proud of you for dealing with it this way." Taehyung smiles, heart warmed, nodding, "Thank you, Jiminie. You know it does mean a lot. Now, I gotta go to my class and you gotta go to yours, so is it time for the dramatic goodbye scene or—" He gets cut as Jimin hits his arm with a weak punch, letting out a fake pain exclamation, and Jimin scoffs, "You're making it a lot easier for me to believe you're just fine, being a weirdo like that again. Go to your class before our hyungs blame me for destroying your education or something." Taehyung nods, and, as Jimin turns around and leaves, he smiles while exclaiming, "Thanks again, Jiminie! We will see next time! It was amazing! I will miss you—" "Shut up, Kim Taehyung!" Taehyung laughs softly, ignoring the gazes that follow his way through the hallway as he walks towards the classroom. He doesn't think there's much to happen to him, honestly; nothing is going to be as bad as the humiliation itself, and he doesn't think it will hurt that much coming from anyone but Jungkook. Just as he finds his seat and grabs his cell phone from his pocket, he finds on the screen a few texts from Hoseok. He smiles slightly while reading it. From Hobi-hyung: how's everything how r u is everyone being nice is anyone being mean do i have to punch someone To Hobi-hyung:what if i say you have to punch people From Hobi-hyung: i will call namjoon obviously but i'll be there rooting for him!!! To Hobi-hyung:i'm fine hobi don't worry From Hobi-hyung: come to me if anything happens~ have a nice class~ Taehyung can't say he doesn't enjoy this — the way his best friends are clearly concerned about his feelings, making sure he will be fine at every single moment. Somehow, he feels like whatever he does will not suffice on thanking them for this. Surprisingly, the first classes go well. No one makes jokes about Taehyung while he is around and the conversations get smaller and smaller as the hours go by; there is even one classmate, a girl from his Corporal Conscience Class that tells him that the whole university thinks Jungkook was an ass and should apologize for that. It doesn't help Taehyung feel better at all, but he nods with a smile on his face and walks away gently. He finds Jimin again once it's time to go to the studio, and his best friend looks satisfied as Taehyung tells him everything is perfectly okay so far. The students walk calmly to the studio, same serenity as ever, except for the ones sending Taehyung glances once in a while; probably the ones who would always see Taehyung and Jungkook flirting and imagine that that could end up in something actually beautiful, like the fool Taehyung himself. Today, Yoongi arrives at the studio before Jungkook. He looks as composed as always, camera hanging on his neck. He would be just the same as Taehyung remembers, wasn't it for his hair, which is now in a strong shade of pink. He looks nice like this, like it's natural for him. "Cool new hair color, hyung," Taehyung comments. "You look like you're the model here," Jimin completes. Yoongi laughs softly, "Chill, you two, it's too early for this. By the way, the studio is offering some temporary hair dyes, if either of you is up to it. There's red, Taehyungie, and I think it would fit you." Taehyung's eyes light up; he has always imagined how his hair would have looked with a brighter color, mainly because the lilac he used before hadn't caused any effect. Maybe this change would mean something good for him. "Where can I find the hair dyes?" Taehyung asks, voice high with exciment. "The hairdresser has it," Yoongi replies, "You can pick the clothes of the new phase of the photoshoot as well, they don't want everything to look just the same. The scenarios are probably already being changed." "Alright," Taehyung says, excited, "Let's go!" He can't say he isn't scared of whenever Jungkook gets there while he enters the dressing room to change himself into the new outfit, a grey — though it looks kinda light blue as well — suit with a salmon social shirt under it, and then there's a red flower on it's collar, and everything looks way to elegant for him to believe they've changed the theme so thoroughly. The hairdresser owns a red temporary hair dye that simply goes great with Taehyung's outfit, so he figures that, well, why not? Once he asks and makes sure it will be all gone within a few weeks, he sits and waits patiently as his hair is colored. According to the hairdresser, he applies a lot so it can be ready in twenty minutes and the photoshoot can go without any trouble. Taehyung isn't the only student who's getting a change today; there's about two girls and three boys whose hairs are getting new colors as well, and they all look just as anxious. Jimin sees Taehyung a few feets away and gives him a thumbs up as an incentive; even Yoongi smiles at him, half reassuring, half amused. The hairdresser is drying Taehyung's new hair when Jungkook arrives. At first, he simply gets everything on it's place at the new scenario, which is really bright, with fake blue sky and all. Then, once Taehyung is done with everything and walking back to the cabin, he can almost see Jungkook hesitating with the glimpse of his hair. "Uh, hi," Taehyung says, feeling extremely awkward. "Hey," Jungkook says, and it's absent and completely uninterested, "I'd fix that flower a bit if I were you. It looks crooked." Taehyung nods and complies, trying to ignore the sad sensation running inside his heart. He knows that, if this had happened just two weeks ago, Jungkook would probably have fixed it for him, and then flirted with him; but then he reminds himself that that Jungkook wasn't real, and the fantasy is shattered once more. "Shall we?" Jungkook asks, gesturing to the scenario, and Taehyung cleans his throat. "Uh, yeah," Taehyung says, but he can't help but stand in place, squinting as he looks at Jungkook, "By the way, uhm, I was just wondering, how did everything else go after what happened?" Jungkook's forehead is wrinkled when he stares at Taehyung, but he shrugs before answering, "Nothing happened. Mingyu had the guts to tell his guys to leave my wallet and everything at my place, making sure I knew all he did was just for me to feel bad." Taehyung nods sadly, chewing on his cheek, "How you feeling, though?" Jungkook rolls his eyes, "I'm just fine, Taehyung. Can we do our work, please?" Taehyung swallows hard, "Yeah. Yeah, sure." It is the most painful day of photoshooting so far, with no doubt. Taehyung can't seem to focus straight on the camera since he's forced to focus on Jungkook to do so, and Jungkook seems to have a lot to snort about, because that's all he keeps on doing during their time. From time to time, Yoongi or Jimin pass by them, and then Taehyung gives him comforting smiles that suggest that he is doing just fine. They don't know about the night helping Jungkook, anyway, and he feels sorry for not telling them, but he doesn't intend to. He knows it's only going to bring more conflict, and that's something they definitely don't need at the moment. When the photoshoot of the day finally gets to an end and Jungkook tells Taehyung he did a "good job" with the sharpest tone he has ever used, Taehyung goes to meet with Yoongi and Jimin, who are both already waiting for him at the door. "So? How's everything?" Jimin asks, linking his arm to Taehyung's, "Should I go inside and punch him?" "He's not that bad," Taehyung says, and hurries to correct himself as he notices Jimin's expression, "I mean, at the moment. Like, he didn't do anything cruel or bad in here, get it?" "Well, I'm glad to hear that," Yoongi says, and he actually seems pretty satisfied, "The hair looks nice, by the way. You shold keep it." Taehyung smiles and nods, "I'm thinking of it. Now, where are we going now? I mean, it's the last class, and I kind of miss grabbing coffee with you guys." "Sure," Jimin says, but then he stops, which causes the two of them to stop as well, "First, though, I have really nice news to tell you guys." Taehyung frowns, curious, "Really? What is it about?" "So, remember my dance team?" Jimin asks, and they both nod, "We're participating of a test today, and it will decide which ones of us will be able to go performance in front of some pretty important people. But it will be, like, in America." Taehyung's eyes widden and he is frozen for a moment. Then, he lets out an exclamation of exciment, along with Yoongi's own "woah". "That's amazing, Jiminie!" Taehyung exclaims, so glad for him, "Dude, this is going to be amazing! You're gonna rock them!" "Honestly, Jiminie, if it's up to a dancing test, you're already in," Yoongi says. Jimin smiles from ear to ear, clearly happy because of his friends' reaction. He has always loved acting and all of it, but his true dream had always been purely related to dancing, and having an opportunity of turning that into something professional or, at least, more important is huge to him. "You're gonna get accepted, Jiminie," Taehyung assures him, "You're gonna be the first one to be accepted." "Yes, you are," Yoongi confirms, nodding. Jimin's smile gets bigger as he nods, "I really do hope so."*** Taehyung was right. Jimin has been accepted. That's the first thing Taehyung gets to know in the morning after, once he's awaken by his best friend's hands squeezing his shoulders and swinging him back and forth in bed excitedly. Taehyung knows the reason for his behavior before having to ask, but he asks anyway, beacause he knows Jimin wants to yell it out loud and enjoy his opportunity the best way right from the begining. "So?" Taehyung asks, eyes snapped open, "What are the news, why are you so excited—" "I got accepted!" Jimin exclaims, and Taehyung's eyes widden like he's actually surprised. He is willing to pull out the shock scene for Jimin, out of everyone in the world. "Really?" Taehyung questions, voice climbing up, "Oh my, Jimin, this is amazing!" He opens his arms and receives Jimin in them in no time, genuinely happy and enthusiasc. This is, indeed, the chance of a lifetime, and the people Jimin will get to know on his trip can be essential for his career as a dancer. "Ah, I can't believe this," Jimin says, sounding like a child who just got his favorite candy as a gift, "I'm actually going to America and study dance. I mean, I love being an Art Major, but this— This has always been my dream!" Taehyung is smiling and nodding while listening to his best friend, mainly seeing that he has always been the one to be right there, paying attention to every single dream his best friend had, and, right now, he is the first one to see it come true. He is aware that it will hurt not to walk with Jimin all the way to the university and not have him to give him good advice at night, but it's just for two months, and he is nowhere selfish enough to let any of his concerns take over the happiness he feels for Jimin. "You, my dear Jiminie, are going to be the best dancer of the world in a matter of weeks," Taehyung affirmes, hugging his best friend once again, "Ah, I'm so proud! It's like watching my child growing up!" "Aish, I'm still older than you, Taehyungie," Jimin snaps back, but he's laughing softly. "Did you tell anyone else yet?" Taehyung asks as soon as he moves away, already conscious of the answer. "No," Jimin replies, "Had to tell you first. Now, I'm gonna go text Yoongi-hyung, and call Hobi-hyung, which, as a consequence, will end up as telling Namjoon-hyung as well. Ugh, isn't it so hard to be the youngest of our group of friends?" Taehyung laughs, supporting himself on his elbows while he watches his best friend grabbing his cell phone and typing wildly, smile never leaving his face. Taehyung can picture himself as Jimin, receiving the news that he will get to participate of a really important course for his acting, something that is potentialy going to change the whole path of his dream. Taehyung can tell Jimin would be just as happy for him as Taehyung is for him. The moment Jimin sends Yoongi the text and puts the cell phone on his ear to wait on the line for Hoseok to pick up, Taehyung's smile falters covertly. All of sudden, the realisation that maybe this won't be just two months, that maybe someone will be interested by Jimin and give him a better opportunity than going back to Korea hits Taehyung hard. And, damn, of course he would be so freaking proud of Jimin and would celebrate so much for him, but he can barely imagine what he is going to do out of his conflict situations without Jimin for two months; what would happen if it was more than that? He is so dived in his thoughts that he barely hears as Jimin tells Hoseok the good news and the elder screams in celebration on the other side of the line. Jimin turns back to look at Taehyung, and the dongsaeng forces himself to keep his smile. He isn't going to be the selfish best friend who asks his friend to stay for him or tells him about his worries — he can't be this kind of person, or he won't be better than anyone else. Right now, it's his duty to be the happiest. "Isn't my Jiminie amazing?" Taehyung yells to the phone, causing Jimin to laugh and roll his eyes, but he puts the call on speaker anyway, "He is the child I'm the proudest of. Why can't you be like this, Hobi-hyung?" "I am not tolerating you today, Taehyung," Hoseok yells back, humour surrounding his tone, "Jiminie, did you tell Yoongi-hyung already?" "I just texted him," Jimin replies, "By the way, isn't Namjoon-hyung with you? I was planning on telling both of you at the same time." "No, he isn't," Hoseok answers, and Taehyung and Jimin exchange a doubtful glance, "Right now, he is painting on the university's studio. He said I can't come over and take a look at it because the painting is a secret. Aish, can you believe it? A secret from me." Taehyung frowns, "Maybe he's painting you?" "Yeah, like he would," Hoseok says, "He's tried before and it looked terrible, and you know Namjoon doesn't pain anything terrible. Thing is, we spend so much time together he can't stand the idea of needing to think of my face that much to paint. Whatever it is, though, I'm finding out soon. Don't worry, Jiminie, I'll text him and tell him to give you a call." "Thank you, hyung," Jimin says, sounding glad, "I'm so, so excited for this course. I mean, I will learn so much. Hyung, once I'm back, maybe we can finally have our dance routine together!" "Yes!" Hoseok exclaims, sounding excited, "That is going to be amazing! Ah, we're gonna have so much fun!" Jimin and Hoseok's celebration goes on for a few more minutes, and then, once Jimin hangs up, he receives Yoongi's call, and Yoongi sounds just as proud as Hoseok. Taehyung smiles through the whole thing, extremely glad that his best friend is finally getting everything he deserves, but the stinging sentation inside his chest telling him that he will lose his best friend doesn't leave for a second. The first moment the subject dies is during lunch, because Taehyung and Jimin take that as the time to decide whether they are going to order food, make their own or go out to eat. Seeing Taehyung's laziness and lack of hability to cook, soon enough, Jimin is grabbing the phone and calling a japanese place, ordering any food he likes. "Ah, the dance team that's going with me is doing a meeting today afternoon, so I gotta be out in a bit," Jimin tells Taehyung while they wait, sitting beside him on the couch, "You don't mind, right?" "Why would I mind?" Taehyung asks. "I haven't been spending time with you lately," Jimin says, "I feel like a terrible best friend." Taehyung laughs softly, throwing his arms around Jimin's shoulders and pulling him closer, "You're actually a very decent best friend, Park Jimin." Jimin frowns, "Very decent? Who have you been learning compliments from, Yoongi-hyung?" "Amazing?" Taehyung tries, laughing as Jimin's frown grows, "Astonishing?" "Yeah, yeah, shut up," Jimin says, but he is relaxed, eyes happy, and Taehyung mirrors his smile. "I'm glad I've got to prove my point," Taehyung says, and, before Jimin can say something back, the doorbell rings and he stands up, celebrating for the food, "Food, finally!" "And what is food?" Jimin asks while standing up to join him and laugh. "Amazing! Astonishing!" "Yeah, yeah, let's eat."*** It's already afternoon, and Jimin has already left to meet with his team, when Hoseok texts Taehyung to warn that he's coming over. Taehyung frowns, but he him it's okay and then settle to watch a movie just about five minutes before Hoseok arrives and knocks at the door. Hoseok doesn't usually come to visit without Namjoon, pretty much because they all get along so well there isn't a moment they can't talk all together. Besides, it is just as rare to see Taehyung without Jimin, so things end up looking kind of different. At least, that's what Taehyung assigns to the unfamiliar awkward sensation when Hoseok walks in, because he can't think of another reason for the elder to seem quite restless and uncomfortable like that. "So, what movie are we watching?" Hoseok asks, and Taehyung squints, trying to cover up the fact that he can see something is wrong. "Anything bad we find on Netflix so we can laugh about it," Taehyung replies, gesturing for the kitchen, "Wanna make popcorn first?" "Sure," Hoseok says. Ten minutes. It's all the time Taehyung needs to gather courage enough to pour the popcorn absently inside the bowl and look at Hoseok's direction, aware of what he has to ask. "So, hyung," Taehyung starts, "What's got into you today?" Hoseok seems to freeze. His entire smile fades away in a second, and, when he speaks, he sounds anxious, "I kind of wanted to tell you something about a delicate subject. Since I know that you don't like people to procrastinate things, I'll just say it. Jungkook is studying so he can enter a good university and he asked for my help for his studies, and, as his hyung, I couldn't say no. I know I should, and I know I'm probably the worst friend you have at the moment for accepting to help him after everything he did to you, but I couldn't help it, and, Taehyungie, I'm sorry." Surprisingly, Hoseok says that all at once, and it takes Taehyung a few seconds to diggest every single word without getting a headache. Once he's done, though, he shrugs slightly, throwing the popcorn package in the trash with a gentle expression. "You didn't have to worry about telling me about that," he starts, calm, "I am not your only dongsaeng, hyung. Jungkook has been your friend for a long time as well. Whatever happened between us has nothing to do with you guys. Besides, I have known you for long enough to know that I can't ask you not to help someone." Taehyung doesn't miss Hoseok's soft sigh of relief, but the elder still looks bothered, and he shakes his head, "Still, I felt incredibly guilty for saying yes before even asking how you were doing with the whole 'getting over Jungkook' thing." "Hobi-hyung, don't worry about me, okay?" Taehyung requests, giving him an encouraging glance, "I'm doing just fine. Please, don't feel guilty for helping a friend of yours." Hoseok nods, apparently trying to accept that, "Okay, I guess I will just believe. I can't say I haven't been worried, though. Are you better now? Still feeling a little down?" Taehyung smiles, "You don't have to worry about me that much, hyung." "Are you sure?" Hoseok asks again, blinking in an angelical way, "I feel like I've been a terrible hyung lately, helping with nothing. Don't you want anything? Ice cream? A party? Making out with someone?" The dongsaeng's smile turns into a grin as he hears that, opting for going along with the joke, "Why? You volunteering?" Hoseok chuckles, "I am, if you don't tell Yoongi-hyung." Taehyung freezes, and so does the elder, apparently having just said something that wasn't planned to be spoken out loud. Hoseok opens his mouth to correct himself, maybe laugh at it, but closes it again, suddenly unsure of how breathing in and out worked. "Why—" He starts, taking a deep breath, "Why would you mention Yoongi-hyung now?" Hoseok shrugs, "I'm sorry, I didn't mean to bring that up. I know it's probably complicated between you two, so—" "Wait a second," Taehyung requests, eyebrows furrowed, "What do you it's complicated between the two of us? What exactly should be complicated between me and Yoongi-hyung?" "Oh, well," Hoseok says, "I mean, you just got your heart broken by Jungkook, I'm sure it's not easy to act around Yoongi-hyung when he's in love with you and all—" Taehyung has to admit he feels like a headache is slowly making it's way to his body, from his tiptoes to the top of his head. This scene is happening the opposite way it was suppose to happen from the very begining. When Yoongi's love life came up between Taehyung and Hoseok, it was supposed to be Taehyung talking about how Yoongi was in love with Hoseok, not the other way around. Besides, the tone in Hoseok's voice evidences that he is hurt by his own words, aching due the facts he is stating. "Hoseok-hyung," Taehyung cuts him, slowly, "Yoongi-hyung isn't in love with me." Hoseok frowns, "You don't have to lie to me, Taehyungie. I saw the way he's looking at you and the way he is jealous of you, and I know him better than anyone." Taehyung can't say he is not surprised. It's not like Hoseok's voice is just carrying jealously, but it's dripping it, making itself so freaking clear it would hurt in case Taehyung felt something for his older best friend. "He has feelings for me," Taehyung starts, still in disbelief, "He has, I won't lie about that. But, hyung, it isn't love— not romantically, at least. He has romantic feelings for me because the person he is in love with has been keeping him waiting for years, and Yoongi-hyung is no machine to be waiting all this time without trying something else." His last sentence echoes around the room as Hoseok squints, crossing his arms, "Who are you talking about?" Taehyung lets out a humourless laugh, "What, seriously? You say you know Yoongi-hyung better than anyone, but you've never seen this, hyung?" Hoseok doesn't say anything. He keeps his gaze fixed on Taehyung, focused and curious, and Taehyung knows what he says next might end up as a bad idea, but he also knows Yoongi has been helping him for so long and he has done nothing in return, not even a single bit to thank Yoongi for everything. Therefore, he gets to the decision that, perhaps, the time has arrived for him to be the one helping. "It's you," Taehyung says, shaking his head, "It's you, Hoseok-hyung, and it has always been you. Yoongi-hyung kissed Jiminie, and Yoongi-hyung dated other people, and Yoongi-hyung acquired feelings for me, all of it while being deeply and strongly in love with you, but aware that you could never love him back." Saying that Hoseok is shocked would be an euphemism. He looks like a mix of shock, surprise, happiness and disappointment, all at once. If Taehyung has to guess which one relies on what, he would say shock for the announcement, surprise for the way it was said, happiness for the fact and disappointment for never realizing it before." "You can't be serious," Hoseok finally says. "I couldn't lie about this," Taehyung snaps back, and he knows it is the truth, "Listen, hyung, I know you have no reasons to believe me, but I can see it in your eyes that you feel something for him to, so, why don't you just— just do believe in me and then go get him. Hyung, I know Yoongi-hyung too, okay? I was always one of the people he talked about the most when it came to his romantic feelings for you, and I know just how much he cares about you. This is your chance of a happy ending, you know? Yours and his." "Taehyung," Hoseok speaks, still looking like he is in pure denial, "Why would he have feelings for you if he is in love with me?" Taehyung's jaw stiffens as he places his hands on his own waist, "Why would you make out with other people in clubs in front of him if you have feelings for him?" Hoseok pauses, "That's different. One night stands are just—" "Random people, I know," Taehyung says, "But is it so much worse to have bigger feelings for a friend than to hook up with lots of random people?" "Hey, I never hook up with any of them," Hoseok cuts him, "It's just—" "It's just making out with them and shattering Yoongi-hyung's heart in pieces every single time," Taehyung states, and his voice is so firm that he is certain that he has never used that tone with Hoseok before, "Listen, hyung, if you actually didn't know about any of his feelings for you, then forget it. But, if you ever kissed someone in front of Yoongi-hyung to make him jealous or thought about his feelings and still made out with someone else, then you know that whatever he did isn't worse than this, mainly because he has no freaking idea of your real feelings. You have never been unffair or selfish, hyung. Please, don't do it now." Hoseok's hands are clenched in fists, but Taehyung knows he isn't angry. He is irritated with himself, he is upset, he is confused, and Taehyung can't really blame him for any of that. It all coming at once certainly is a shock, and Taehyung, out of everyone, can talk about shocks pretty well. When Hoseok finally manages to take a deep breath and lift up his chin to look at Taehyung, his eyes are wattery, "Are you sure he is in love with me?" Taehyung's heart is beating in his ears, unceasingly, but he manages to nod, "Yes, hyung, I am sure." "And his feelings for you," Hoseok proceeds, slowly, "How strong are them?" Taehyung chews on his own bottom lip, nervous, staring at his own feet, "I don't know." "Are they stronger than his love for me?" "No." Taehyung answers, "No, they're not." Little by little, something shows up at Hoseok's eyes, like a sparkle of hope coming out of nowhere, "Taehyung, you need to be sure of what you're saying, or I might end up—" "Hyung," The dongsaeng stops him, blinking, "I am pretty sure of everything I'm saying. And I might as well say I don't think you want to waste time anymore." Hoseok breaths in and out slowly, nodding and taking his cell phone out of his pocket, typing on it with rush, deleting the text more than once. Taehyung gives him his time, simply watching, waiting until Hoseok decides to let him know whatever is happening. He can imagine, though. He can imagine Hoseok's fingers clicking to form the words "i'm coming over" and then the message being sent straight to Yoongi's phone. Somehow, that's the clear answer in his mind, and he doesn't think there is a chance of being wrong. "I— I have to leave," Hoseok says, "We can— we can watch that movie some other day, right?" Taehyung smiles kindly, "Anytime, hyung." "Okay, I'm going, but just—" Hoseok says, sighing, "One last question, okay?" Taehyung nods, "Shoot it." "His feelings for you," Hoseok starts, "Were they ever requited?" Those words are like punches straight to Taehyung's stomach, and the truthful and offending word that slips out of his tongue is as well, "No." He feels terrible. How can he say that like it's nothing? How can he admit so easily that he feels nothing but friendship for Yoongi, when Yoongi does so much for him, shows so much effort? "Okay," Hoseok says, taking Taehyung off of his thoughts, "Okay, I'll just— I'll go." Once Hoseok is gone and the door behind him is closed, Taehyung allows himself to diggest everything that just happened. He knows that, whatever happens to Yoongi and Hoseok has to be worth all of it. If he couldn't find the right guy, he just wants to help his friends to have the opportunity instead. He just hopes he is doing it right.*** Three hours later, he comes to find out that he isn't. Taehyung is laying on his bed, chest to the matress and pen spinning on his fingers when his cell phone buzzes, telling him that a text just arrived. The preview contains Yoongi's name, and it causes Taehyung to frown, but he checks it anyway. From Yoongi-hyung: what the srsly taehyung what did you do what did you tell hoseok To Yoongi-hyung:uh, the truth?he's in love with you and you're in love with him From Yoongi-hyung: shit taehyung who told you to To Yoongi-hyung:hyung i don't get itwhat is so wrong about it?????? From Yoongi-hyung: how were you expecting me to look hoseok in the eyes and say i'm in love with him, but sustaining feelings for someone else?????? didnt you see how wrong this was going to be????
To Yoongi-hyung:
but hyunghe gets ithe really does he told me From Yoongi-hyung: yeah you clearly don't get it honestly taehyung if you wanted me away you could just have said it
To Yoongi-hyung:
what????no hyung that's not ithyung i'm telling you it's not itplease answer meplease He won't answer. Taehyung is pretty sure he got blocked just now, and there's a slight panic in his mind, a small question mark asking him what he did that was so wrong; although, unfortunately, there is already one part of his body that understands it, and it's his damn heart. It's always it. Taehyung tries calling him. Once, twice, and nothing happens, no one answers, and he can say he is starting to get pretty worried. Therefore, he chooses to call the one person nearest to Yoongi. Once he's done typing Hoseok's number, he puts the cell phone on his ear and tries to calm himself down. "Hello?" Hoseok answers, in a few moments, and his voice sounds distant and sad. "Hyung," Taehyung starts, swallowing hard, "What— What happened? Did anything go wrong?" "Taehyungie," Hoseok says, and he sounds like he is about to say something bad, but then he pauses and, once he's going back to talking, his tone seems to be forced, "I'm not sure now it's a good time to talk and everything. I'm actually on my way to the gym and there's lots of stuff to do—" "Did Yoongi-hyung reject you?" Taehyung cuts him, in disbelief, not even trusting his own mind. Hoseok remains in silence for a few seconds, but his reply comes along with a sigh, "Yeah, guess you can say that. He said— Well, he said he can't talk about his feelings right now, not at the exact moment where he's not ready to drain out a certain area of his heart or something like that." Taehyung is frozen in place, staring at his own feet. Oh, no. Was Yoongi talking about him? Is he the dweller of that area in Yoongi's heart? Is he the one ruining it all? "Hyung, I don't—" He starts, feeling his throat dry, "I have no idea what to say." He hates that he can't help but be brutally honest about that. The thing is, out of everything that could happen, Taehyung would never have imagined Yoongi rejecting Hoseok, not even in a single way. "There's nothing to say, Taehyungie," Hoseok says, and it's so broken it tears Taehyung's heart apart, "Listen, you don't have to be concerned, okay? I don't blame you for a second. You were just trying to help, and I know it." Taehyung bites his inner cheek, "Don't defend me now, hyung. I screwed up with you." "No, you didn't," Hoseok assures him, "You didn't screw me up for a second, okay? I don't want you thinking that. Now, I really gotta go, and I want you to know you have nothing to worry about. I will be perfectly fine in no time." No, you won't, Taehyung wants to say, because he, out of all the people, knows very well what it feels like to have his heart broken by someone he cares about. However, he can't bring up his history right now — is there any way of being more selfish than that? — or bother Hoseok about his concern, not while it's all so recent, at least. "Okay," Taehyung says, faking a sigh, "Okay, hyung, I'll believe you. Be safe, okay?" He can nearly see Hoseok smiling weakly and nodding, "You too. Bye, Taehyungie." As soon as Taehyung hangs up and places his cell phone on the bed, he runs his fingers through his hair and sighs deeply. Once again, he actually thought he was doing the right thing, following the right path; and that's what he gets, two mad best friends who rejected each other's feelings and who are probably going to take a while to go back to normal, and it's all his fault. He stands up, books and notes forgotten over the matress, and walks towards the kitchen counter, searching for his keys relentlessly, reaching for it as soon as he finds it and closing the door behind him as he leaves the apartment. He can text Jimin about going out later, since his best friend won't be back anytime soon either way. Taehyung isn't sure exactly where he is heading the moment he leaves. The only thing he knows is that he needs to make it up to Yoongi and Hoseok, and that he has to do it in a good way, and, unfortunately, that it won't all go away in just one go. He's been walking for about twenty minutes when he faces somewhere he didn't think he would ever remember that existed: the flowerstore Jeon Jungkook supposedly works at. Taehyung breaths, chewing on his bottom lip, uncertain about his own ideas. Perhaps it would be a good idea to send Yoongi and Hoseok flowers, show them a gesture he's never done before, but it would mean facing Jungkook and asking him things and talking to him, and Taehyung thinks it could be avoided. He finds himself staring at the door for a few seconds before finally making his decision. Taehyung is aware of the fact that he is probably going to regret it, but he feels like he still has to take the risk, mainly because there isn't any other flowerstores around, nowhere close at all, and he needs those flowers if he wants to do something that at least will have a chance of redemption. The moment Taehyung enters the store, the door bell rings, and he feels remorse as soon as he does so, because the person behind the counter, whose eyes are focused on a book and lift up to stare at Taehyung once he's in is no one else but Jungkook, and he frowns unwittingly. "Taehyung?" Jungkook asks. His voice sounds way more tired now than early, and Taehyung doesn't doubt Hoseok's word about the dongsaeng focusing on studying, "What are you doing here?" Taehyung forces himself to be anyone but himself as he speaks, "I'm here for flowers. That's what people usually do at flowerstores, right?" Jungkook clicks his tongue, "He barks and he bites." "He speaks more than he should," Taehyung mumbles, barely audible, but good enough for Jungkook to hear him. "What can I help you with, Taehyung?" "I need flowers to apologize to someone," Taehyung says, finally looking straight at Jungkook, "Flowers that can say I regret everything I did and wish I had never done it." Jungkook's eyebrows furrow, "Woah. Did someone die and no one told me about it?" "What? No, why?" "Because, first, Hoseok-hyung cancels our study session, then Jin-hyung tells me he's heading to Yoongi-hyung's because he isn't very well, and now here you are, telling me you need flowers to apologi—" Jungkook stops himself, eyes widdening slowly, "Wow, wait a second, was it you who got Yoongi and Hoseok upset?" Taehyung feels like he just got punched. The fact that Hoseok is cancelling the things he had to do and Yoongi isn't feeling "very well" is on him, and he detests it with every fibre of his body. "Yeah," Taehyung replies, walking towards a few spread flowers, sliping his fingers along the stalk of a rose, "I screwed up." "What level of screwing up?" The elder wrinkles his nose, focused on the flower, "Yours." Jungkook squints, but lets out a short laugh, "Now, what a high level you have there. What did you do?" "Stuff," Taehyung says, holding the flowers' stalk between his fingers, spinning it slowly, face blank, "Just— stuff. Do you have the flowers I need?" "I do," Jungkook answers, elbows supported on the counter, "I don't think it will work at all, though. Yoongi-hyung isn't a fan of flowers and it takes more than just that to un-upset Hoseok-hyung." Taehyung's jaw stiffens, "I don't need your help, Jungkook." "I'm aware of that," Jungkook says, "I'm just saying, you know? You seemed smarter than that." "I am—" Taehyung starts, but he gets interrupted by himself as one of the thorns of the stalk sink in his finger, hurting his skin, and he lets out a sharp and painful noise. The small sound draws Jungkook's attention, and, as the dongsaeng notices what happened, he rolls his eyes. "Aish, honestly, Taehyung? You should know roses have thorns," He says, and Taehyung is about to snap back, but then Jungkook is leaning to one of the drawers and grabbing a band-aid, which he throws to Taehyung. The elder grabs it with his free hand and his gaze meets Jungkook's for a second, "What? You're not the first costumer to get hurt due a flower, having this is precaution." Taehyung nods silently, putting the rose back in place and wraping the band-aid around his fingers, cleaning the tiny drops of blood on the hem of his t-shirt, "Thanks." "Whatever," Jungkook says, "Now, if you actually want to try and give Yoongi and Hoseok flowers to apologize, I'm gonna suggest tulips and hyacinths. They both mean apologies, though I might say hyacinths are more of a sign of sincerity, while it's up to the tulips to represent rebirth and hope for the future. You can make a bouquet with both of the kinds and I think it will have a really good meaning." "Uh, okay," Taehyung says, "Yeah, I'll take those." Jungkook moves from his spot behind the counter and reaches for a bunch of flowers on the shelves, properly adjusting every single flower in it's place, giving the bouquet it's shape, and then he ties it all together. Taehyung actually tries not to stare at the way Jungkook looks so focused, a frown forming on his face, his nose wrinkled slightly, his eyes aiming attention at the flowers. "Done," Jungkook says, raising the bouquet a bit in his hands, "Here you go." Taehyung takes the bouquet from him with a short bow, "I, uhm, thank you. How much is it?" Jungkook opens his mouth to say it, but then, with no reason, he pauses, like there's a sudden realisation inside his mind. Then, once he speaks again, he shrugs, "It's on the house." "What? No, I can't—" "It's not a favor," Jungkook cuts him, "It's really not. You helped me the other day and I don't like having people doing things to me that I won't return, so take this as the return. I don't owe you anything else." Taehyung doesn't say anything for a few seconds; when he does, he simply nods, tightening his grip around the bouquet, "Thanks, Jungkook." Jungkook turns around and heads back to behind the counter, nodding, "Yeah, sure. Good luck with your problem." Taehyung nods as he leaves. Luck. Now, there's something he's gonna need.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
One week and three days later, Jimin leaves to America. Taehyung must admit saying goodbye to his best friend in the airport makes him feel like Jimin is leaving for two years instead of two months. They hug, and it's tight and home, because Jimin has always been Taehyung's best friend and other half and now he's going to be away for time enough for Taehyung to mess up with a lot of parts of his life at once. Jimin leaves everything solved; even the photoshoot, which he finishes with Yoongi in extra time within the week he had left. The days after Jimin leaves are all basically the same. Taehyung starts following a tedious routine, which is waking up, eating, going to the university, going back home, watching TV and sleeping, and then doing it all again the next day. During the photoshoot sessions, Jungkook's behaviour is just the same; cold, indifferent. Then, there is Yoongi. He doesn't call Taehyung or talk to him in any way. Taehyung knows it would probably have changed if he had had the courage to give Yoongi and Hoseok the flowers, but he didn't. Therefore, the flowers are still laying on his couch at home, and Yoongi is still mad at him. Hoseok, on the other side, doesn't seem to be feeling the same way about Taehyung's actions. He still texts Taehyung, and they still talk by the phone, although Taehyung hasn't seen him in person since that untoward day. Happily, when Taehyung is starting to feel like maybe he should actually go look for Yoongi for a talk, Yoongi comes to him first. He is waiting on the door after the photoshoot ends, which means he came from his work there, and Taehyung hasn't even gathered all his stuff, but he notices that Yoongi's eyes are searching for him, so he walks towards the elder. "Hey," Taehyung says, hesitating. "Hey," Yoongi says, and Taehyung is glad that his tone sounds everything but irritated, "I think we should talk." "Yeah, I guess we should," Taehyung replies, unsure of how exactly he should act at the moment so he won't make things worse between them, "Do we go out to grab a coffee or—" "Actually, I'm going to work on the studio today, like, the professional one. What do you think of coming with me?" Taehyung's eyes widen slightly, "For real? I thought you didn't have permission to bring your friends over." "I usually don't, but I've been working harder than anyone there lately, so I don't think they will mind one more person watching whatever we have to do," Yoongi explains, and he sounds normal, like they aren't about to have the kind of conversation that might turn out to be really stressful, "Unless, of course, that you want to do this later." "No," Taehyung hurries to say, "No, honestly, the sooner the better. I want to get things right between us." Yoongi nods, barely seeming affected by it, "Alright, then. Grab your stuff and let's go." And so Taehyung does, soon enough finding himself walking side by side with Yoongi to the studio, not talking a lot while doing so. For all that Taehyung knows, a professional photography studio is a lot better than any amateur one, and he gets his proof of it as soon as they arrive at the place. Everything about the building screams profissionalism, and it fits Yoongi in a surprisingly large way. "Woah," Taehyung mumbles, following his friend inside, "This place is cool." Yoongi smiles weakly, "Yeah, it is. A lot of hard work involved." As they walk inside, there's people working everywhere; from typing in computers to taking pictures to talking to each other, and they all seem just as professional as Yoongi, some even more. Yoongi heads towards an area where there is a white cloth extended, surrounded by cameras and lamps that seem to be more expensive than Taehyung's whole life. There is pictures hanging on the walls around them, and Taehyung sees the name "Min Yoongi" in the corner of one of them. "That's where I'm taking my pictures today," Yoongi says, "The model hasn't arrived yet, so there's no problem if we talk." "Alright," Taehyung says, taking a deep breath, "So, hyung, I should probably start by apologizing." "That would be a nice one." "I'm really sory," Taehyung starts, and it's the most honest he can be, "I never meant for any of that to turn out the way it did. I know it sounded a lot like I was trying to get rid of you and your feelings for me, but it was never it. I just— I felt like you did so much for me, always, and I wanted to help you to be happy. And I know you could be happy with Hoseok-hyung." Yoongi crosses his arms, "And did you think I was incapable of going after him myself?" "I thought you were afraid," Taehyung says, "Afraid of telling him, and then I got afraid that this fear would destroy your opportunity." "Hoseok isn't an opportunity, Taehyung, he's a guy who I have been in love with for most of my life, and who only decided to feel it back once I started having feelings for someone else," Yoongi declares, "And I know that it isn't his fault to find out about his feelings now, but what I need is time, you know? Time to get over whatever it is that I started feeling for you and to be able to be with him the right way." Taehyung purses his lips, "But, hyung, what if it is too late? What if he falls out of love with you while so?" "Then I wasn't supposed to be with him in first place," Yoongi says, sighing, "Listen, Taehyungie, I believe you, okay? I understand your reasons were the best. And I'm not going to stay mad at you for trying to help me with this. Though, I need to ask you something." Taehyung nods, "Anything." "Don't meddle again," Yoongi requests, and Taehyung squints, "Let things happen, okay? If I'm supposed to be with Hoseok at some point, I will. Otherwise, I won't, and you'll be okay with it. Please." Taehyung sighs, but he nods again anyway, "Alright. But, wait, is that it? Just like that, you're not mad anymore?" "What part of 'everyone has a soft spot for Kim Taehyung' didn't you understand, honestly?" Yoongi laughs, rolling his eyes, "No one stays mad at you for long, Taehyung. I didn't even intend to. If I called you today, it was to put an end to this crap of not talking to you and stuff. I'm over it as soon as I get to make my own decisions about my love life from now on. Do we have a deal?" "Yeah," Taehyung says, glad that part of the weight on his shoulders is already leaving him, "We have a deal."*** After fixing things with Yoongi, Taehyung's life is basically peace. Until the photoshoot the next day. That's when Jungkook seems a lot more tense than any other day, and, at the end of the session, moves towards Taehyung so he can speak. Can we talk?" Jungkook asks, and Taehyung unwittingly lets out a laugh. "Why do I feel like I've heard that phrase a lot lately?" He asks, but doesn't wait for Jungkook's reply before speaking again, "I mean, yeah, sure, why not? What do you want to talk about?" Jungkook seems uncomfortable as he fixes his posture, nearly like he is about to say something that isn't at all his choice, "Look, I know Hobi-hyung told you about my studies, right? For entering a good university?" "Yeah, I'm aware." "So, uhm, I've kind of sent a few e-mails to the universities I want, and one of them said that I won't have to do a proper written test in case I can clear a good interview with them. The thing is, Hobi-hyung isn't the best with this kind of thing; actually, none of my friends has ever done an interview for an university, seeing they all got in by scholarships or tests. So, when I asked Hobi-hyung if he knew someone who could help, he said—" "He said I could," Taehyung cuts him, squinting, "Right?" Jungkook chews on his bottom lip, nervously, "Yes, he said you could."" It is true that Taehyung was the only one of his friends to get accepted in college through an interview, and he does see why Hoseok would tell Jungkook about that. However, Taehyung must admit he is surprised by the fact that Jungkook wouldn't refuse coming to him about that. "Let me get this straight," Taehyung requests, frowning, "Are you genuinely asking me for help?" Jungkook sighs, "Yes, Taehyung. Don't you think it's already hard enough for me to ask for it?" "Well, I don't exactly think I'm the one to make things easier for you, to be honest," Taehyung says, and it seems like enough to shut Jungkook up, "Besides, I thought you didn't like asking people for help, mainly people like me. Why would you do it now?" Jungkook looks around, gathering boldness to speak, and Taehyung waits patiently. He knows it is probably extremely difficult for Jungkook to admit defeat in needing someone, mostly because this someone is one of his "victims", so he doesn't feel bad for making Jungkook say that. His feelings are surrounding him all the time, but so is his pride. "I really want to get into that university, okay?" Jungkook finally speaks, and he sounds strangled inside, "I mean, I need it. It's just the most important thing to me within times of not having any goals. And I know you asked me not to request things from you because of your feelings and stuff, but I'm not trying to use it against you. Don't think of it as Jeon Jungkook asking you, it's just someone asking you to help them." Taehyung knows he could have put a lot of extra effort in those words, trying his best, adding "please" a few more times than he does in his mind, but through all the crap inside Taehyung's head about Jungkook, he can still see that little bit of hope that something might end up as actually important to the dongsaeng. "Listen, Jungkook," Taehyung starts, "You must imagine it isn't easy for me even to look at you sometimes. I mean, you know exactly what you did." Jungkook stares at him, "Okay. Is that your 'no'?" "No," Taehyung says, shaking his head, "I mean, this isn't a 'no'. This is 'I have to think about it' and 'I'm gonna need a day or two to do so'. When is your interview happening?" "It's, uhm, in two weeks," Jungkook replies, and he seems by some means dizzy with Taehyung's words. "Then, I guess you'll have time enough to find someone else in case I refuse it within the next two days," Taehyung completes, "Right?" "Yeah, yeah, right." Taehyung nods, "Okay, then, can I have those two days? To think about it properly?" Jungkook takes a deep breath, and he sounds surprised as he speaks, "Sure. I don't see why not, honestly." "Alright," Taehyung says, tightening his grip on the backpack's handle around his shoulder, "Guess I'll talk to you in two days, then." "Yeah," Jungkook says, moving aside so Taehyung has more space to leave. When he moves to do so, though, he hears Jungkook calling his name once again and turns, one eyebrow raised, "I just— Thank you." Taehyung's eyebrows furrow, "Jungkook, I didn't accept anything yet." "I know," Jungkook proceeds, "I'm just thanking you for thinking about it." Taehyung squints, slightly confused, but nods anyway before walking away, "You're welcome."*** Surprisingly, Taehyung's afternoon happens to be a lot less awkward than his morning. He calls Jimin to know about how things are going and their conversation doesn't end until Jimin's alarm rings, telling him that he has to be on practice within thirty minutes, and, then, when Taehyung hangs up, he finds himself happier than he thought for his best friend. Of course he is already missing him, but Jimin just sounds so cheerful about everything, and Taehyung can't help but mirror his emotions. During the begining of the evening, Taehyung simply unfreezes some food and eats while watching the TV. From time to time, of course, Jungkook pops into his mind, suddenly looking like someone who could be better than he is with the simple opportunity of entering an university. The only problem is that Taehyung can't be sure whether that will actually make Jungkook someone better or not. While thinking, he hears a familiar ringing coming from his cell phone, and, as he reaches for it, he sees he just got texted by Namjoon. From Namjoon-hyung: hey taehyungie you busy? To Namjoon-hyung:not at all From Namjoon-hyung: mind if i come over? To Namjoon-hyung:be my guest Taehyung is frowning as he puts his phone down. It's not that it is unsual for Namjoon to visit him, but, with everything that is happening, he didn't think he would end up talking to Namjoon before talking properly to Hoseok. Either way, he won't complain. Namjoon is a friendly face, and he is in no position to refuse a friendly face. Soon enough, he hears the knocks on the door and opens it, facing a sympathetic Namjoon with plastic bag full of something that looks a lot like candies. Taehyung smiles, moving so Namjoon has room enough to enter. "Welcome to my humble place, hyung," Taehyung says, closing the door behind Namjoon once he's in, "For the first time while being only mine, and not Jiminie's as well." Namjoon gives him a warm smile, "Bet you're missing him a lot, aren't you?" Taehyung shrugs, "You know it. I'm sure you guys are missing him a lot, too." "We are," Namjoon assures him, "I've called him today already. He seems like a professional, talking about the dance practices and all the performances he has to prepare for." "Right?" Taehyung asks, "It's nearly like we're already friends with a celebrity before he actually becomes famous." Namjoon laughs, and it's friendly and welcoming in every way. It makes Taehyung feel better, like everything he did is actually getting healed little by little and not everyone was caught up on it. "So, hyung," Taehyung starts, supporting his back on the wall, "How's Hobi-hyung?" "He's fine," Namjoon replies, and it's nearly deffensive, but then he relaxes, "I mean, as fine as he can be, I guess. He said he's still going to talk to Yoongi-hyung about everything, but I doubt that's gonna come from him. He's scared of having the first word again." Taehyung nods, looking down, "All my fault, huh." "It's not your fault," Namjoon says, "Not at all, actually. Hobi had to confess, one time or another, and the fact that Yoongi-hyung couldn't open up to him at that moment is their issue, and they're most likely going to fix it together. The only thing you did was tell Hobi something that you were told." "Maybe I should have stood with my mouth shut," the dongsaeng argues. "So what if you talked a bit too much?" Namjoon shrugs, "Everybody does. Hobi would have confessed anyway, sooner or later." Taehyung nods, "I just wish he could have confessed sooner. Yoongi-hyung has been in love with him forever and he has never made a move. Did he already feel something for him?" "He always kind of did," Namjoon replies, "It was never as intense as today, but he knew there was something there. Thing is, he used to hang out with Yoongi-hyung and try to dance with other people and all that stuff to try and get some reaction from him, but all he got was bored faces and discreet thumbs up. Yoongi-hyung never gave him a reason to believe he was in love." "He didn't act like it, but it was always all over his face," Taehyung says, and it's true, he knows it. However, he feels like talking about Hoseok and Yoongi's romantic life might not be the solution to solve their problems. "But, anyways, their romance aside, how is your love life lately? We have barely talked about your crushes or relationships." Namjoon sighs, dramatically rubbing his face with his hands, "My love life isn't going anywhere. Honestly, no one at my university is interesting, and I'm not into one night stands." "Mostly," Taehyung comments, smirking, "You were into one night stands a while ago." Namjoon groans, "Will you ever forget that? That was my biggest mistake." "Yet, you didn't say you regret it during our Never Have I Ever game," Taehyung argues, one eyebrow raised, "Should I tell the others you cheated by lying to us?" "Aish, Taehyungie," the elder complains, causing Taehyung to laugh, "I said I didn't regret kissing him, okay? Other things just weren't included." "So, he's bad at other things?" Taehyung provokes, smirk getting wider. "That's not what I—" Namjoon starts, but he pauses abruptly, "Oh, no, there is no way I am ever going to talk to you about what it was like with Kim Seokjin. You're gross, Taehyungie." Taehyung is laughing now; truly laughing while talking to a friend whose life isn't at all affected by his — besides Jimin, of course. Somehow, it feels nice. "I am your friend, okay? I have the right to know," Taehyung protests, "I bet you told Hoseok-hyung." "I didn't even tell my brain, I commanded it to forget," Namjoon states, and Taehyung laughs harder, "Go ahead, laugh it all out. I bet I would have some stuff to laugh about as well in case we had returned to that club and you had met with Kim Minjae one more time." Taehyung's eyes widen, "Okay, you know that's not true. Minjae was just everything but someone I would have interest for. Besides, I'm already foolishly in love, remember?" Namjoon gives him a comforting glance, "Yeah, I do remember. How is that going, by the way? The whole 'getting over Jungkook' phase?" "Well, it could be easier," Taehyung starts, and decides to tell Namjoon about his doubts at that moment, "I mean, if he didn't go around asking for my help for stuff and all." "What?" The elder frowns, "What did he ask your help for?" "He's going to attend an interview to enter this university," Taehyung explains, "And Hoseok-hyung told him that I got into university through an interview, so he came to me to ask for help." Namjoon nods slowly, trying to catch the younger male's eyes, "And what did you tell him?" "I told him I need to think about it," Taehyung answers, "I asked for two days so I can think about it properly and give him an answer. Do you think I'm an idiot?" Namjoon laughs softly, shaking his head, "No, I don't. Actually, if I were you, I would just have said yes. You're stronger than me already." "Not a big deal," Taehyung jokes, receiving a death glare from his friend, "Either way, what do you think? Should I help him?" "I hate to say this, but it depends on you, Taehyungie," Namjoon says, and Taehyung groans lowly in frustration, "However, I can help you. With one question." Taehyung squints, "Shoot it." "Which one will hurt you the most," Namjoon starts, focused, and Taehyung knows his questions are all wise enough to get anyone speechless, so he prepares himself, "Not helping him and being aware of the fact that you had nothing to do with his future, whether it means failing or succeeding in college, or helping him and having to deal everyday with the fact that you are the one helping the person who tried to break you?" Taehyung blinks. He knows his answer.*** The next afternoon, nearly at the end of a day that doesn't include a photoshoot class, Taehyung texts Jungkook his answer. After doing so, he finds himself anxious, walking in circles in his small apartment, checking his cell phone a lot more times than he should, and only getting some rest while pausing in front of the refrigerator to grab himself some juice. After fifteen minutes, his phone rings with an answer, and Taehyung totally doesn't jump over the couch to reach for it. From Jungkook: oh thank you when can we meet? Taehyung takes a deep breath.
To Jungkook:
i guess i've got pretty much nothing to do all day somaybe today? From Jungkook: fine by me ...where To Jungkook:uh i don't knowlibrary? or maybe not, since we'll have to talki don't think a café would be nice nowmaybe a restaurant? From Jungkook: i don't think anywhere public is going to be ideal Taehyung feels his throat dry and clears it before typing a reply.
To Jungkook:
uhm, thenmy place?i mean you know it here already and it's the most private place to practice an interview Taehyung knows he is probably doing the wrong thing. Inviting Jungkook over, mainly when Jimin is travelling, isn't supposed to be a good idea, anyway. He just thinks it should be the most safe place, and Jungkook wouldn't dare to try anything mean while in Taehyung's place. Well, at least he thinks so. It takes a few minutes for Jungkook's answer to finally arrive. From Jungkook: okay i guess i'll be there in about two hours if that's okay with you
To Jungkook:
yeah, sure "Shit," Taehyung mumbles to himself, letting out a long sigh, his head thrown back on the couch, staring at the ceiling blankly, "What am I even doing?" He knows he should probably call Jimin and talk to him about it, mainly because Jimin hasn't heard about anything related to Jungkook since he left. The thing is, Taehyung doesn't really mean to disturb his best friend's incredible journey by talking about the guy who has already caused them so much trouble. The two hours pass faster than Taehyung could have imagined they would. In no time, he's blocking his cell phone after watching some videos and heading towards the door, opening it to reveal an apparently nervous Jeon Jungkook, who is now completely different from all the previous times they were together alone. "Hi," Taehyung says, "Come on in." Jungkook does, shyly, nearly as repressed as in the first time they have been so close, but, this time, for completely different reasons. Taehyung patiently closes the door and takes a deep breath, wearing his best mask so no emotions can appear at the moment. "How— uhm, how are things with Yoongi-hyung and Hoseok-hyung?" Jungkook asks, and it's so low Taehyung barely catches it. "It's getting better," Taehyung replies as he walks inside, sitting on the couch, gesturing for Jungkook to join him — not close, though, "Soon enough, we'll all be just fine, I guess." Jungkook nods, clearing his throat, "Good for you." "Yeah," Taehyung says, and he hates how awkward their whole situation is. Just when he was getting used to rude, asshole Jungkook, this new guy had to appear, the guy who wants to go to a nice university and would sacrifice his prid to do so, "So, the interview. What's bugging you about it?" "Uh, everything," Jungkook replies, shoulders clearly tense, "The whole idea of having to share that many thoughts and that any of them can just shatter my chances, mainly." Taehyung nods. He knows what it feels like, to be forced to face someone who he doesn't know and whose opinion will define an important part of the rest of your life. "Let's start with the overall thing, okay?" Taehyung says, "I'll ask you some of the stuff they will ask at the interview, and, once you answer me, I can tell you what's missing." Jungkook nods, "Okay." "So, Jeon Jungkook," Taehyung starts, and he uses his best professional tone, "Tell me about yourself." "Uh, well, I'm an amateur photographer, I've only taken pictures of nature so far, except for a photoshoot I did at one of my friends' university, and—" "Stop," Taehyung requests, shaking his head, "Don't let names go in this case. Yoongi-hyung might not be exactly famous, but his name is a reference either way." Jungkook blinks, nodding, "Okay. So, uhm, except for a photoshoot I did at Min Yoongi's university—" "Who is Min Yoongi?" Taehyung cuts him to ask, and, this time, he is acting; he is playing the interviewer, and his raised eyebrow tells Jungook about that. "He is a photographer from the main photography company of Seoul," Jungkook proceeds, and Taehyung nods, "He is out the university already, but his friends' needed photographers for a photoshoot, so we both participated as part of it. Actually, the photoshoot is still happening." "Yeah?" Taehyung, the interviewer, frowns, "And how do we know you are going to focus on your studies here if you are already focused on a project with someone else?" Jungkook shakes his head, "It's not— It's not a real contract or anything, it's just—" "Jungkook, pause," Taehyung requests, himself this time, "Why do you seem so nervous to explain? The person talking to you isn't superior or a monster. You don't have to fear them." Jungkook stares at him through his eyelashes, "I don't fear them, I fear what they might represent." "And what is it?" Taehyung asks, crossing his arms. "They decided whether I'm in or not, Taehyung," Jungkook says, "They have my future in the palm of their hands." "Yes, they do," Taehyung confirms, "But, do you know what they are going to do with you if you let them know that? They are going to crash your dream between their fingers. What you have to do is talk to them so perfectly that, in the end of the interview, they are going to be the ones in the palm of your hand." Jungkook raises his eyebrows slightly, "Easier said than done." "Not exactly," Taehyung snaps back, "More like 'been there, done that', remember? I've had my interview and I got them in the palm of my hand." "It's different, okay? You're an actor." "Well, you seemed like a pretty good actor to me as well, during the last month," The elder strikes, and Jungkook seems finally speechless, "Listen, if your problem is with the interviewer being someone who's threatening to you, just picture someone else as them. Someone you trust and someone who would never crash your dreams. Picture Jin or Yoongi-hyung." Jungkook sighs, nodding slowly, closing his eyes for a second. Taehyung gives him his time, as always. "Alright," Jungkook says, "Let's go again." "Jeon Jungkook," Taehyung speaks, and his acting is back, "Tell me, do you think you, out of everyone out there, waiting for their interview, is the one who deserves to be part of our university?" Jungkook doesn't hesitate as he answers this time, "Yes." Taehyung squints, "Why?" Perhaps Taehyung is smarter than he thinks he is, or maybe he just can't see his own potential, because something about what Taehyung told Jungkook just turns the dongsaeng into a totally different person while answering to the questions. From time to time, he closes his eyes tightly, but he hurries to open them again, facing Taehyung like he is an actual interviewer, but, this time, with the confidence it takes to be accepted. Sometimes, Taehyung interrupts Jungkook and gives him an advice, and, for his surprise, in all the times, Jungkook seems to genuinely listen to him, absorving the advice and acting according to it. If Taehyung was an interviewer and that was Jungkook's interview, he would be accepted. It's not even about his feelings or anything, it's about professionalism, and that's something he can't deny that Jungkook is full of. It's not until four hours have passed, and Taehyung is starting to feel his neck hurting for sitting in the same damn position that he decides it's enough for the day. Jungkook still has two weeks until the big day, and they're pretty much near of the end since the first day of practicing. "I guess we're done for today," Taehyung says, gesturing for the clock, "We probably shouldn't overload your mind with stuff today, we got plenty of time to make that interview look great." "Alright," Jungkook says, pursing his lips, "Though— Do you have time to talk about one more thing?" Taehyung frowns, "Uhm, yeah. What is it about?" Jungkook takes a deep breath, apparently thinking twice before actually gathering courage enough to say something, "Listen, it's kind of complicated, but I'll try to make it sound easier. Basically, when you helped me that one time about Mingyu, I felt bad. Not exactly bad for what I did, but, more like, bad for not letting anyone know why I did that. I always told myself that, if any of the guys who I turned into my victims helped me, even after what I did, they would deserve to know the truth. I set scenarios to all of them, you know? A situation in which I would have to ask for help, and, if they helped me, I would them. The unsurprising thing is: none of them did. Not Mingyu, not Yugyeom, not the ones before them. With you, I was still planning, when Mingyu did that. So, no, Mingyu and the robbery wasn't something I planned, much less something I wanted to happen. That kind of help was beyond any help I would expect one of you to give me. When I called you, that night, I was pretty sure you would say no." He makes a pause, and Taehyung slowly tries to diggest every word. If his talk proceeds it's way, Taehyung understands exactly what he is about to tell, and he is scared of how his image of Jungkook will be from now on. If he takes pity on Jungkook, if he finds everything way too justified, will he forgive him? Should he forgive him? "When you helped me, though, I feel terrible, you know? I felt like I had just used an actual situation to decide whether I would tell you or not. So, I decided it wasn't enough. I couldn't tell you because of that. I still had to find another way," Jungkook proceeds, "While I studied and asked Hoseok-hyung about someone who could help me with an interview and he said you could, my first instinct was not to ask you. Because, again, I wasn't manipulating the situation. It is something that is truly important to me, not something I created to test you. However, I didn't see other option. I can't not enter this university, you know? But, this time, I told myself that, if you actually accepted to help me, I would tell you. You deserve to know it." Taehyung clears his throat, nodding slightly, expression forcibly blank, "You don't have to tell me if you don't feel comfortable to do it, Jungkook. The fact that I helped you doesn't change that." "I want to tell you," the dongsaeng states, firmly, "I want to." Taehyung fixes his posture, "Alright, then. Go ahead. I'm all ears." Jungkook takes a deep breath, staring directly at Taehyung as he starts to talk, "Do you know the old cliche of, when someone breaks someone else's heart, that someone else starts to act differently, and, occasionaly, breaks other people's heart as well?" "Like a circle?" "Sort of," Jungkook points out, "My circle ends up in the second person. I am the second person, the one who got their heart broken and started breaking other people's as well. But I bet you don't want to hear the overall thing, but the details, right? So, there was this guy, and he was really cute and sweet and nice to me. I was fifteen, okay? Don't blame me for falling for the first pretty guy that I found. Thing is, he was really popular. And he would always come to me for help with his studies, and he would help me with sports, and things were all just so okay. Except for the fact that, well, I wasn't popular. Doesn't it sound cliche? It's almost ridiculous to tell. Whatever we had, his friends couldn't hear about it, under any circumstances. I should have seen something was wrong, shouldn't I? But I didn't. I didn't and, when I looked for him in a crowd, for the first time, in front of everyone, I got the biggest and hardest humiliation of my life. In front of literally everyone." Taehyung looks down, directly at his feet, blinking slowly. He had thought about that, more than once. Imagined that what made Jungkook so cruel was getting his own heart broken. Hearing the history, though, coming straight from him — it makes Taehyung feel bad for him. He knows he shouldn't, he knows Jungkook did the exactly same to him, but still, he can't help it. "So, that's it?" Taehyung asks, shaking his head, "He broke your heart, he was a jerk with you, so you decided to be the same with everyone else?" "Yeah, that's a possible way to see it," Jungkook lets out a humourless laugh, "Or, maybe, not so much. After him, a friend of him came to me. He wanted to, quoting it, 'help me to understand not everyone was like his friend' or any bullshit like that. And I trusted him the way I trusted his friend. And guess what happened in the end." Taehyung chews on his inner cheek, "He did the same to you, didn't he?" "He did worse, if that's possible," Jungkook says, "He kissed a girl in front of me and the whole school and said I was nothing to him, but a way to test his acting abilities. Well, if I may tell you, he was a pretty damn good actor." The elder tries staring at him, "That's the end?" "The history? Yeah. The reason? Not exactly," Jungkook proceeds, "Thing is, I know it sounds like I decided to break people's hearts to mirror their actions, like it would somehow make sense. But that's not it. I just decided that I wouldn't let any other prick who looked like he is the most perfect person in the world break my heart. And it took me a while to figure a way not to let this kind of person break my heart again, until I came to a pretty easy conclusion: no one would break my heart if I could break theirs first." Taehyung squints, "You just put us all together? Everyone who looked nice, you placed us in the same room, with the same features?" Jungkook tilts his head, looking embarrased, "I'm not saying I'm right, neither that I still think that that is going to be the solution to my problems or anything like it. After the first time I broke someone's heart, actually, it stopped making sense. I couldn't just act like everyone was the same, could I? But, if I did trust people again, I could get myself broken again. So, I decided to make this 'breaking people's heart scheme' about something else. Actually, I turned it into finding the person who is actually the nicest person in the planet. Didn't I tell you I've been testing everyone who I turn into a victim of mine? That search for someone who would still help me after everything was kind of my new thing. Kind of sick, isn't it? The whole thing is. I just had come to the conclusion that I didn't deserve to be happy anymore, so it didn't matter whether I would break a few hearts or not. I used people to find it, and I couldn't feel worse than I already do for it." Taehyung is staring at him, eyeslids nearly pursing together, mouth completely dry. He won't say he gets what Jungkook is doing with people or himself, neither that he thinks it is all justified now. However, there is something he feels the need to ask. "I helped you," he starts, "I helped you and gave you proof that someone can be like that. Does it stop now? Your scheme of breaking people's hearts?" "I think so," Jungkook replies, shrugging, "I haven't really thought about it, I was too busy feeling like the most stupid guy in the world. Which I probably am." "Why?" "Because I'm wrong," Jungkook says, eyesbrows furrowed, "And I have always been wrong, with everyone person who I used to search for my answer. And, honestly, I don't see how I could ever redeem myself from all that. I bet they all think my reason would be something more profound, something deeper, like an actual trauma, and not something that happened in my teenage life. And the fact that I let that affect my life to the point of affecting everyone else's makes me wonder if I was one day any better than the guys who did that to me." Taehyung nods, searching for the right words, until he finds it, "Do you regret it?" Jungkook finds his eyes, "Yeah." "How much?" "I don't know," Jungkook says, "I just do. A lot." "Enough to apologize?" Jungkook swallows hard, "Taehyung, I am sorry—" "Not to me," Taehyung cuts him, shaking his head, "I understand that, the fact that you're telling me this is an apology request itself. And I will probably be able to forgive you really soon, you know? Because you know just how I feel. And yeah, you're whole history is pretty messed up, and I doubt anyone would find it easy to understand, but I'm trusting you in this, Jungkook. I'm trusting that you're actually sorry. So, you willing to apologize to them as well?" Jungkook looks like a mix of surprise by Taehyung's reaction and emotion due the opportunity he is supposedly receiving, "Yeah, I guess? I'm not entirely sure." "It could be your chance, you know," Taehyung says, joining his eyebrows, "Your chance to start over with yourself, putting things in place little by little. Not all at once, because it doesn't work, but just— going slow, you know?" "Taehyung, what I did— It's just not something you forgive," Jungkook says, "Not just by hearing an apology. Besides, who else is gonna believe me when I say I regret it? Even my reasons don't sound logical to me anymore, so why would anyone believe me?" "Well, you certainly won't know if you don't try," Taehyung says, and he sounds firm, "Jungkook, you regret it. It doesn't erase anything, but it changes things, okay? Little by little, it changes everything." Jungkook stares at him, blinking like he can't believe what he is hearing, and Taehyung has the brief glimpse of tears stinging in the corners of Jungkook's eyes. He stands up, sighing lowly, and nods, "I should probably go home. It was a tiring afternoon." "Yeah, I guess it was," Taehyung says. His mind is still working, still trying to understand everything that Jungkook just told him, but he stands up and walks Jungkook to the door anyway, "I'll see you at the studio, for the photoshoot. Right?" Jungkook blinks, nodding, "Yeah," he moves, walking outside the place, and he looks back just for a second, taking a deep breath before talking, "Thank you, Taehyung." Taehyung gives him a smile that is almost tender, something between being careful and being kind, "You're welcome, Jungkook."
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
The next day of photoshoot, Taehyung isn't exactly sure of what to expect. Somehow, now that he has heard Jungkook's apology, he is looking forward to the dongsaeng's next movement, like his behaviour is the missing piece to the puzzle in Taehyung's mind at the moment. He knows things might not change at all and Jungkook can easily go back to his scowl around him; but, at the same time, he feels like that's not what's going to happen, no matter what. He hasn't told Jimin about Jungkook's visit, not yet. As a matter of fact, he hasn't told anyone, because perhaps it all just didn't mean anything, and Jungkook was actually playing him again. Although he wishes his mind was over it, it isn't, and he can't help but consider the worse, even if his heart keeps on insisting that he should imagine the best. Fortunately, days of photoshooting aren't rare, and the next one arrives pretty fast. To be fair, now that the whole proceeding is getting to an end, Taehyung's professor is making sure the sessions can happen all at once so the project will be done in time enough to screw some of them and their pictures on their final grade. That's why, in no time, Taehyung finds himself arriving at the studio and looking for Jungkook, fists clenched behind his back, slightly nervous with the result that may come to meet him. He finds him in a few, checking the camera, not paying attention to anything around him. Jungkook's posture hasn't changed, but, somehow, Taehyung feels like he is more relaxed now. He hopes it's not just an impression. "Uh, good morning, Jungkook," Taehyung says, and it draws Jungkook's attention to him immediately. He tries not to shrug. "Hi, Taehyung," Jungkook says, and it sounds light, "Isn't that hair dye supposed to be temporary? Why is yours still the same?" "My hair is amazing," Taehyung half jokes, although he is still hesitating. Jungkook laughs shortly, shaking his head. "Whatever," he says, "You better go change to your outfit, your professor said we're in a hurry. He wants to end the phothoshoot this week." Taehyung nods, "What a shame. I was actually enjoying being a model." "Doubt that," Jungkook says, and Taehyung raises an eyebrow at him, "Oh, come on, you were born to act. Proof is you actually made me think you were enjoying this for a while. But, be honest, this isn't your thing." Taehyung doesn't answer that, but he laughs a bit, turning on his heels to go and change his clothes. Okay, that wasn't bad. That was definitely not bad. Although it wasn't at all like their conversations before the whole breaking Taehyung's heart history, that was the most sympathetic Jungkook has showed himself other than the moment he confessed all he did and why. Taehyung can't help but wonder whether the weight on his shoulders, the pressure of not telling anyone wasn't one of the reasons why Jungkook's behaviour turned so incredibly bitter and harsh. Of course Taehyung doesn't intend to become Jungkook's best friend all of sudden, but this slight change? This is nice. He enjoys it. The photoshooting part also goes very well. Jungkook helps Taehyung with the angles and tell him to which position he should move, apparently doing his best and giving his soul to the project, like Taehyung imagines he always did. He just kind of wishes he could have appreciated Jungkook's work rather than anything else before everything. "Your hair looks too... straight," Jungkook says, at some point, and Taehyung cracks a grin before Jungkook can realize that his phrase actually just sounded like a really bad joke, "Oh dear, you know that's not what I meant. How old are you, twelve? Just— mess that up a little." Taehyung is still smiling as he runs his fingers through his own hair, trying his best to comply. Jungkook seems like he is about to laugh once Taehyung is finished, but he nods either way. "Yeah, I guess that's better," he says, "Now, unbutton the suit." Taehyung does as he is told, "Better?" Jungkook nods, "I'm satisfied now. Pose." And so Taehyung does. He poses, and poses, and poses and it's all getting way too tiring a few moments before it actually comes to an end with an exclamation from his professor and the information that, within four days, they should be getting this over. He is glad, although he won't say it out loud, because, like Jungkook pointed out, modelling isn't his thing. "So, Taehyung," Jungkook starts once they're finished, absently putting away his camera, "About the whole interview thing and you helping me— I really hope that's not too much. I know I probably put a lot of pressure on it, and I thought about it myself, so, if everything that I told you just turned excessive, I'll understand." Taehyung squints, lips pursing, "You really are trying to get things right with everyone, aren't you?" "Yeah," Jungkook replies, shrugging slightly, "I don't have to bother you with that if you don't want me to." "I'm fine with being bothered," Taehyung says, "But, hey, be honest. Who have you talked to, other than me?" Jungkook hesitates before answering, "Uh, no one." Taehyung nods, "Not even Yoongi-hyung?" "He doesn't want to talk to me." "Did you give him the chance to say that?" Taehyung asks, and Jungkook frowns, "Did you ask him if he wanted to talk to you, to listen to your apology? Or did you get that conclusion by yourself?" The dongsaeng looks like he is about to say something back, but the professor's voice stops him as he approaches them, "The two of you, out. It's time for the place to close and we're not leaving students behind." "Alright, alright, we're leaving," Taehyung says, shrugging, turning his attention back to Jungkook, "Listen, I'm gonna go get changed and I'll be out in a second. If you want to talk about it or whatever, wait for me outside, okay?" Jungkook nods, frozen with surprise, "Uh, okay." Taehyung doesn't take long while changing, mainly because he is not into getting reprimands from his professor for longer than he has to, but, at the same time, he kind of wishes he could delay the moment a little longer. He is trying his best to be the kindest part of him to Jungkook, but his mind keeps on disturbing him, keeps a thin tie around his heart and keeps on pulling it away from Jungkook. Perhaps his mind is right. He doesn't care. Once he emerges on the sidewalk, Jungkook is there, waiting for him, and he isn't even surprised. If Jungkook is seaking answers and solutions, Taehyung surely do seem like the most appropriate person to help him through his path. Well, shit. "You up for a walk?" Taehyung asks as he walks towards Jungkook, swallowing the knot in his throat, "I don't feel like going back to the university today." "Wait, are you sure?" Jungkook questions, "I can make you company through the way to the university or we can talk later—" "See, that's your biggest problem now," Taehyung cuts him, and Jungkook stares at him, "You keep on thinking that this kind of conversation can wait, and it can't." Jungkook's jaw stiffens, "I didn't mean to." "I know," the elder says, gesturing to the spot beside him on the sidewalk, "Walk with me?" Jungkook doesn't say anything, but he moves, and, within a few seconds, they are walking side by side. Taehyung nearly wants to laugh at how weird that would seem to anyone who knew about all the bullshit that happened to them. Here he is, not so long ago after having his heart broken, walking with the person who was responsible for breaking it. "You know," Taehyung starts, looking at everywhere but Jungkook, "I never gave Yoongi-hyung and Hoseok-hyung the flowers." Jungkook frowns, "Why not?" "I thought I would look stupid," he replies, "Hoseok-hyung would say there was no need for the flowers and Yoongi-hyung would simply hate it. That's what I thought." "Don't you think that anymore?" "I should have tried," Taehyung says, emphasis well placed, "What if it helped? What if, by giving them the flowers, I brought them together somehow? What if, by giving them the flowers, I would have spent less days wondering whether I had screwed up with Yoongi-hyung perennially?" Jungkook chews on his bottom lip, sighing, "Are you trying to tell me that I should be trying?" "The only thing I'm telling you is that I should and that I regret not doing it," Taehyung answers, shrugging, "It's fine to screw up. It's not that fine to pretend you didn't." "I'm not trying to pretend I didn't." "You're trying to pretend there is nothing in the world you can do to make up to that, although you know you should at least be trying," Taehyung says, and he has one eyebrow raised while saying so, "You apologized to me. Was it that hard?" Jungkook shakes his head, "It's different, okay? You let me apologize." "But not everyone will," Taehyung completes, "Still, you can't let that stop you, Jungkook. You won't actually be able to move on from all that crap if you don't apologize properly for everything. And, if everything you told me was truth—" "It is." "Then you can't stick with your arms crossed and wait for all of them to accept to talk to you or any of that," Taehyung says, "If you really mean it, chase after them. Every single one of them. Get rid of all the ghosts and I can guarantee you the sun will rise a lot brighter in the morning." Jungkook stares at him for a few seconds, eyes slightly widdened, pupils dilated, and remains in silence. While so, he nods. Taehyung gets it.*** During the afternoon, Taehyung gets a text from Hoseok. He is at his apartment, cursing America for taking away his best friend, who would be watching a movie with him or talking about everything that is crowding his mind, when his cell phone buzzes. Hoseok's text pops up on the screen and he is actually pretty relieved that the message contains something simple. From Hobi-hyung: taeeeeeeeehyungieeee are you busy
To Hobi-hyung:
nah not really why From Hobi-hyung: wanna go take care of a sick hyung Taehyung frowns, yet he can't help but laugh shortly at the way Hoseok says it.
To Hobi-hyung:
which hyung are we talking about From Hobi-hyung: grumpy hyung
To Hobi-hyung:
looks like going straight to the path of a bullet From Hobi-hyung: i'm out with namjoon to grab the medicines and we'll be at the parking lot of your place in five minutes you better get your ass down here unless you want me to go and drag it to the car
To Hobi-hyung:
aren't we all agressive today From Hobi-hyung: hurry up~ Taehyung has known Yoongi for long enough to know that his mood while sick managed to be a few thousands time worse than the usual. Consistently, Hoseok and Jimin would arrive first at his place with the medicines and try to ease his mood before Namjoon and Taehyung truthfully dared to approach. Undoubtedly, that was before Yoongi had feelings for Taehyung, and before Jimin moving for a while to America, and before Yoongi rejecting Hoseok. The only one of them who was still neutral was Namjoon, and that's because he was just too clever to get included into that kind of mess. In seven minutes, Taehyung finds himself with a coat on his arms, the only coat of his that fits Yoongi — because it's common knowledge that Yoongi doesn't take good care of himself while sick, even though it's just a flu, and, as the great workaholic he is, keeps on working on editing pictures and all that stuff even at home. It's always so damn hard to convince him to stop that sometimes Taehyung creates theories about how Yoongi is powered by his work. "You sure it's just a flu?" Taehyung asks as he grabs the plastic bag from Hoseok's hands, "There's, like, fifty medicines in here." "Stop overreacting," Hoseok says, but he's laughing, "There's six." "Six," Taehyung echoes, "Are we trying to kill him?" "It's not all medicine for his flu, Taehyungie," the elder points out, "Some of it it's for every other thing he might have. Turns out he forgot to buy it all, again." Namjoon nods, "Yeah, and, everytime he gets a headache, we get a call. And he gets headaches at three in the morning. Buying the medicines is a lot less expensive for my mind." Taehyung laughs, "I don't know why, but I have no difficulty in believing that." Ten more minutes and they're knocking at Yoongi's door, hearing a clear "it's unlocked" coming from inside the place, and Taehyung and Namjoon exchange a glance due Yoongi's nasal voice. "Here we go," Hoseok states, turning the door knob and pushing the door, giving Taehyung and Namjoon room to go in first. Taehyung calmly hands him the plastic bag of medicines and walks towards the couch, where Yoongi is spread out, blanket covering only his legs while his notebook is placed on his lap. Taehyung can see there's a photography being edited on the screen. "Hyung," Taehyung calls, nearly singing, and he hears Yoongi groan. "I'm sick, in case it isn't clear," Yoongi says, not taking his eyes away from his notebook. "Be polite, hyung," Namjoon says, throwing himself at Yoongi's side on the couch and carefully gabbing the sides of the notebook, moving it away from Yoongi the slighest, "We're here to make you feel better." "By taking away my work?" Yoongi asks, one eyebrow raised, intimidating, but apparently he is too weak to resist as Namjoon moves the notebook away, "Can I at least have my medicine and my coffee?" "I'll grab the coffee," Taehyung announces, turning on his heels to walk towards the kitchen. "And I brought the medicine," Hosok completes, and Taehyung is half way to grab the coffee when he hears that, and he can't help but look above his shoulder, waiting for Yoongi's reaction as Hoseok raises the plastic bag to show him. Yoongi swallows hard, eyes slowly running through Hoseok's face, trying to find something that Taehyung can't name. After a few torturning moments of silence, Yoongi speaks,"Thank you, Seok-ah." "Well, anytime, hyung," Hoseok says, and he is clearly trying his best to sound natural. Gladly, the awkward mood is shattered when Yoongi starts coughing and Hoseok hurries to hand him the medicine, also taking a bottle of water out of the bag. Taehyung goes back to his own duty, finding the coffee machine and pouring the hot liquid into the mug, waiting patiently as he hears the low sound of conversations coming from the living room. He is delighted to notice Yoongi's short laugh at something Hoseok said, and he is hopeful that things will soon go back to normal between them. "I have the power!" Taehyung exclaims as he returns with the mug, "Or, even better, I have the coffee!" Yoongi lets out a short, soft laugh and stretches out his hand, "Stop being silly and give me my coffee, will you?" "Aish, you're too impatient, hyung," Taehyung jokes, but complies either way. "Where is my coffee?" Hoseok complains, sounding fakefully wrathful, "Do I have to be sick to get my coffee?" Taehyung smiles charmingly at him, winking, "Yes, you must." "You're a brat," Namjoon declares, "We need Jiminie here to restrain you." "Ugh, don't even remind me of that," Taehyung says, finding his seat on Yoongi's armchair, not leaving Hoseok other choice but to sit by Yoongi's side. Oops. "It's barely been a month and I already feel like he's been out for a year." Hoseok smiles, "Your friendship is so cute. I love how you guys cherish each other. Some people should learn with it—" "I've come to the point where anything you say is irrelevant." Namjoon states, and Hoseok rolls his eyes. "So, Taehyungie," Yoongi starts, drawing everyone's attention to the younger, "How's everything been with the photoshoot and Jungkook?" Taehyung's shoulders tense up, "It's, uhm, fine, I guess. He's not being a jerk anymore." "That's a new," Namjoon says. Hoseok squints at Taehyung, a silent question in his eyes. Does Yoongi-hyung know about the interview? All Taehyung does is shake his head and the question is gone. "What about you, Yoongi-hyung?" Taehyung casually asks, shrugging slightly, "Any intention of forgiving him anytime soon?" Yoongi lifts up one eyebrow, "He never apologized." "What if he did?" Yoongi seems to ponder, "I'm not sure. It's not important, anyway." Oh, Taehyung mumbles in his own mind, but it is. It is, because Yoongi is affected by the question, because Yoongi cares a lot more than most people think, and Jungkook is his friend. Taehyung can't imagine himself having to choose between standing for one of his friends like that. He wishes Yoongi didn't have to go through this. The rest of the afternoon turns out to be a lot more comfortable than Taehyung's last afternoons. Being around his friends like that, even though Jimin isn't there is a warm sensation, something that guarantees him that they are all there for a each — not that he would ever dare to doubt that for a second. He just appreciates the reminder once in a while. It's evening when they decide to leave, and, just as Namjoon and Taehyung stand up, they notice Hoseok's lack of movement. "Hobi?" Namjoon asks. "I'm not sure I'm leaving Yoongi-hyung by his own now," Hoseok says, and Yoongi frowns, "What? Hyung, you know I'm right. You're just gonna jump into work as soon as we leave, and you need to take care of yourself rather than your photography." "My photography is my life." "Yeah, and you're gonna get both, you and your photography killed if you don't take care of yourself," Hoseok argues, and Taehyung remembers why he always admired the way Hoseok treats Yoongi, like he is some kind of treasure that needs to be protected. Of course, this is Hoseok, and that's just his usual personality, but something about his way around Yoongi stands out. Namjoon nods, "I agree with Hobi." "Hobi-hyung." "I agree with Hobi," Namjoon insists, "I can drive Taehyung back home. Yoongi-hyung should have someone taking care of him tonight." "I don't need a babysitter," Yoongi wrinkles his nose. "Sure you don't," Hoseok says, "You're getting one, anyway. You're okay with me staying here, right?" Now, that's a serious question, and the insecurity that causes Hoseok's voice to leave his lips almost in a broken way tenses up the entire atmosphere. Namjoon and Taehyung exchange a glance, unsure of what to do, and Hoseok's eyes are fixed on Yoongi's, forbbiding the elder from running away somehow without telling the truth. "Of course I am," Yoongi finally says, blinking, "I've always been." Namjoon clears his throat, clearly not intending to interrupt the moment, but also not exactly the biggest fan of watching romance scenes right in front of him, "So, guess this is our cue." "Get rest and get well, hyung," Taehyung tells Yoongi, firmly, and the elder smiles softly while nodding, pretending to roll his eyes, "Take good care of him, Hobi-hyung!" "I will!" Taehyung knows.*** The next two days, there isn't much action in Taehyung's life. He is informed by Hoseok's texts that Yoongi is getting better, and he guesses that, while so, Hoseok will be having more than one sleepover at his. Taehyung is glad that they are finally getting things together. About Jungkook, not much is done either. They don't talk about Jungkook apologizing anymore, and it's only three days after that Jungkook mentions the interview again. Trying to be the kindest as he can, Taehyung is fast to accept to help him during the afternoon. That's the history of how Kim Taehyung ends up tapping his pen on his lap repeatedly as he tries to study a little bit before Jungkook's arrival. Unhappily, Jungkook arrives in no time, leaving him nothing but five minutes of actual studying. Well, life is the way it is. This time, when Jungkook arrives, it's less awkward than the first time — which does not mean it isn't awkward at all, because it is. Jungkook's got a backpack on, but he simply drops it by his side as he sits down, and Taehyung isn't going to be the one to go and ask him about it. "How are you feeling about the whole studying for the university?" Taehyung asks, "Not asking as a interviewer, I'm just curious." Jungkook half groans, half snorts, "It's terrible. I know it's all going to be worth it, but I can't seem to take my mind off that damn books." "Well, you should, at the moment," Taehyung says, "The interview is going to be one of the most important parts if you want to reach the test stage, and, although you're already pretty good with words, I'm still sensing some lack of confidence there." "I just wish I could avoid it," Jungkook sighs, "How did you go in your interview? I mean, where did you get the confidence from?" "I pictured Jiminie, and Yoongi-hyung, and Hobi-hyung, and Namjoon-hyung," Taehyung explains, shrugging slightly, "It was all a matter of trusting them. If they thought I could do it, and if I trusted them, then I had to trust that I could do it." "What if they were wrong?" Taehyung smiles kindly, "Wouldn't matter. I would try again." Jungkook nods, "That's— uhm, that's nice." "So, should we start with the interview or—" "Actually," Jungkook starts, and he sounds nervous, "I really do appreciate your help with the interview, and I actually think I'm gonna need it, but there's still a week until it happens and I was hoping you could help me with something else today." Taehyung frowns, confused, "What is it?" Jungkook doesn't reply; instead, he grabs his cell phone from inside his pocket and types, leaving Taehyung hanging for a few seconds. Finally, then, he turns his phone to the elder, and Taehyung sees Yoongi's name on the screen. "I want to start apologizing," Jungkook says, "And I want to start by texting them. All of them." "Texting?" Taehyung asks, "Really?" "I know it sounds like a coward thing to do, but I'm not brave at all, Taehyung," Jungkook argues, "Besides, you said little by little, right? They all know me, they all know this — the texting — is already pretty much of a big deal for me. I won't stop at this, okay? Trust me, please. I'm gonna go talk to them, but I want to start simple." Taehyung bites his inner cheek; he doesn't agree with it, but he does see Jungkook's point, "Alright, then. Although, I might admit, when you say 'all of them' it makes me think you broke fifty hearts on your way." Jungkook laughs nervously, "No, fifty is too much, even for me. Besides you, Yugyeom and Mingyu, there's just three more. And I want to text Yoongi-hyung as well." "Okay. Let's start with Yoongi-hyung," Taehyung says, gesturing for the cell phone, "What do you want to say?" That's how Taehyung helps him. Starting with a really big text for Yoongi, which Taehyung doesn't bother to mention that will probably be read by Hoseok as well, they move along the list of hearts that Jungkook broke, and Taehyung sees the dongsaeng wincing at the mention of what he did when he's asked more than once. He assumes this is needed, though. Those people got hurt by Jungkook, it's his duty to own it. There's something about Jungkook's face as he tightens his grip on the cell phone as soon as they get to Mingyu's name, something that leaves Taehyung wondering what was different about their relationship, rather than the others. Perhaps it's about the whole fake interview thing. That seemed to hit Jungkook pretty hard, mainly because it pressed right against the dream wound. "We're done," Taehyung announces, as soon as they are, and he finds the way Jungkook sighs in relief nearly pleasant, "First step, check. I guess I can say that was really brave of you, Jungkook." "Yeah, thanks," Jungkook says, rubbing his face with his hands. Taehyung frowns. Something's off. "What is wrong?" He asks. "Nothing," Jungkook replies, but he receives Taehyung's questioning glance and clears his throat, "It's nothing, really. I was just thinking about some stuff." "What stuff?" Jungkook's jaw stiffens, but he answers anyway, "It's just— What are we now?" Taehyung's eyes widden slightly. He must admit he got caught by a huge surprise with the question, and, even worse, that he hasn't stopped to think about it. What are they? 'Friends' is way too strong to describe it, but they're not just people who know each other. "I'm not sure," Taehyung replies, lips pursing, "Why?" "I don't know," Jungkook shrugs, "Guess I just— I kind of wonder sometimes if things would have turned out different if I had given up on breaking your heart." Taehyung blinks, "What do you mean?" "You know what I mean." Taehyung is actually having some trouble finding it out, "Jungkook, is there any chance that you're trying to tell me you're having second thoughts on what you did to me, not only because of your new state of mind, but also because you think— you think it could've worked?" Jungkook remains in silence, but he stares at his feet instead of Taehyung, and that's all the answer the elder needs. "Oh," Taehyung mumbles, feeling his throat uncommonly dry, "Woah." "What is that supposed to mean?" "Honestly, Jungkook, I don't know," Taehyung says, and it leaves his lips in a tone that is definitely more agressive than he planned. He decides to ease it up from there. "This is just too much for my mind. You asked me whether something was too much before, and I said it wasn't, but, now? This? This is definitely too much." Jungkook's breath seems to be caught in his throat, "I never expected you to react nicely to this." "Nicely?" Taehyung echoes, standing up and running his fingers through his own hair. His heart is beating faster than ever inside his chest, threatening to burst out of his body at any second. "How am I supposed to even react to this at all, Jungkook? What are you saying, you like me now?" "That's not what I said," Jungkook argues, eyebrows furrowed, "I just said I was wondering—" "Which means you thought of it," Taehyung states, and Jungkook makes no mention of denying it, "I— Jungkook, I'm sorry, this is more than I can take right now. I'm fine with helping you apologize, I'm fine with apologizing you, but this is too big, even for me." Because I'm in love with you, Taehyung wants to scream, the words right there, on the tip of his tongue, never leaving, and yet, I can't allow you to play me again. Jungkook nods, and he stands up slowly, grabbing his backpack with hesitation, dejected, "Okay. I'm— I'm sorry I ever brought that up." Taehyung is massaging his own temple, eyes closed, trying his best not to focus on Jungkook. Not right now. Not with this in his mind. "I'll get going." "Jungkook," Taehyung stops him, taking a deep breath, opening his eyes for a few seconds, just to squint, "I don't— I don't intend to stop helping you, okay? Just— please, understand. I'm not capable of dealing with it right now. Not like this, not all of sudden." Jungkook nods, and Taehyung feels terrible, but there is nothing else he can do for him right now, "I understand. Thank you for listening to me." Taehyung blinks, simply watching as Jungkook leaves, closing the door carefully behind him. He sighs, trying his best to focus. Jungkook thought about what they could have been.
Jungkook thought of it.
Why did Jungkook think of it?
He hears the door bell and frowns, wondering whether Jungkook forgot something, but, as he walks towards the door and opens it, he doesn't find anyone standing there. Instead, he finds something on the flower, and he feels his jaw drop. It's a bouquet of flowers. It's slightly smashed, like it's been forgotten somewhere — like, inside a backpack — but the flowers are still pretty clear. He remembers the names. Those are tulips and hyacinth. Apology flowers. There's also a card by it's side. He is nearly afraid as he reaches for it. I don't know if this is a good idea, but I don't want to regret never handing this to you
This means I'm truly sorry, for everything
And I'll prove it
He is left speechless again.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Taehyung doesn't show up at the university the next day. Call him a coward, say he chickened out; he doesn't care. The thing is, Jungkook's statement has taken his mind to a whole new level of confusion, and everything just seems to be utterly messed up. Dealing with a Jungkook who's trying to apologize to everyone and be a better person was easy; Taehyung enjoyed it, the sensation of being able to help. Nevertheless, imagining the fact that Jungkook could ever consider something else with him caused his mind and heart to face each other directly, fighting fiercely. He isn't a jerk, though. He texts Jungkook about not attending, tells him that he is feeling rather sick, blames it on his visit to Yoongi. Jungkook replies with nothing but a "ok", which drives Taehyung practically insane. He is trying so hard to understand Jungkook's behavior — all of it —, but the dongsaeng keeps on making it more and more complicated. "It's okay," Taehyung tells himself during the morning, blankets wrapped around him, squinting at the wall as he thinks, "Tomorrow's the weekend already, I can delay the moment I have to face him." Delay. An easy word, an easy solution, although not an effective one. So what if he delays his meeting with Jungkook in two, three days? He's still going to have to meet with him at some point and be honest — well, not really. He has to fake everything, all of his feelings, if he doesn't want to be laughed at once again. It's one in the afternoon when Taehyung calls Jimin. It takes his best friend more than the usual to pick up. "Hello?" Jimin speaks, and he sounds sleepy. Taehyung widdens his eyes as he realizes why, "Oh, shit, Jiminie, I forgot about the different time zones." "Taetae?" Jimin asks, and Taehyung hums in agreement, "Did something happen?" "Well, yeah," Taehyung admits, pursing his lips, "Though I shouldn't be telling you right now. Didn't you say you have to wake up at seven to go to practice? How much time do you still have? Seven, six hours? I should let you sleep—" "Taetae," Jimin cuts him, sounding like he's wakening up a lot easier now, "I'm already awaken, okay? What happened?" Taehyung hesitates, "It's, uhm, about Jungkook." "What? Did he do anything to you?" "No, that's not it," Taehyung says, and he takes a deep breath as he tries to figure out the best way to explain it, "I've— I've been kind of talking to him, these days. Helping him." Jimin makes a long pause, nearly long enough for Taehyung to check whether the call has gone down or not, "Helping him, you say. What kind of help?" "He's trying to get into this really good university," Taehyung says, "And I've been helping him with the interview, since it's the most important step and all. So, while I was helping him, he said something to me." "What did he say to you?" "He said he has been wondering what it all would've been like if— uhm, if he never broke my heart, you know?" Taehyung tells him, and Jimin remains in silence, "Like, if the scheme never happened to me and we had stayed as—" "As a couple," Jimin completes for him, his tone suddenly so cold Taehyung's body freezes, "You're telling me Jungkook has been wondering how things would have been if you had remained as a couple." "Yes," Taehyung says, "And I want your opinion on it." "You know my opinion," Jimin argues, "He doesn't deserve you and he should go—" "Jiminie," Taehyung cuts as he feels his best friend's voice growning angrty, "Come on." He hears Jimin's sigh, and he knows he's getting the answer he's been looking for, "Listen, Taetae, you know very well what I think about him, okay? He made you suffer and you are my best friend, my brother. To me, he's the worst kind of trash that there is in the world at the moment. But— If what he told you is truth, if he's thinking about it, and if you're being affected by it, then I guess I have no other choice but to ask you: are you willing to try again?" Taehyung's shoulders tense, "That's a pretty tough question." "No, it's not." Damn Jimin and his power of reading Taehyung's mind. "What if I just make a fool out of myself once again?" Taehyung asks, "What if he's just playing me, one more time, and I'm falling for it like an idiot?" "You've already fallen, Taetae. You've fallen hard in love with him. And, hey, don't our friends say that it is impossible not to have a soft spot for you? I am the only person in the world with the superpower of not falling in love with you," Jimin says, causing Taehyung to laugh softly, "But, hey, maybe, just maybe, he's telling the truth. And then, maybe, just maybe again, he can make you happy. The thing is, can you tell whenever he lies or tells the truth?" Taehyung swallows hard, "No." "Can you trust him?" "I don't know." "Then, find out what you don't know," Jimin says, "If you have business to get finished with your mind, just do it and things will be a lot easier. If you need my help a thousand times in the way, I'm gonna be here a thousand and one more, alright?" Taehyung smiles, "Alright." "Now, may I go back to sleep?" "Yes," Taehyung confirms, nodding, "Thank you, Jiminie. I love you." Jimin hums, and Taehyung can imagine him nuzzling under the blankets, glad to be sleepy again, "Love you too, Taetae."*** The next day, Taehyung wakes up to the sound of his cell phone getting a text. He is nearly scared to see Jungkook's name on the screen. rom Jungkook: uh hey To Jungkook:hey From Jungkook: look i really didn't mean to make things awkward between us when i said all that and, well, with the flowers
To Jungkook:
it's not awkwardit's justcomplicated, i guess?i can't really handle that much feelings at the moment He figures being honest is the best way to get rid of all the fuss. Besides, Jungkook should get the message; he was the one to break Taehyung's heart in first place. From Jungkook: that's good i guess but are you s u r e things aren't awkward now? cause i'm about to ask something and i don't really want it to be awkward To Jungkook:just ask From Jungkook: are you busy tonight? Taehyung's breath gets caught up in his throat, but, before he gets the chance to reply, Jungkook texts him again. oH that sounded sO wrong for someone who didn't want to make it awkward let me explain i bought two tickets for a photography exhibition downtown so i could go with jin-hyung but he just called me and said he's in a hangover and i heard another voice so i guess he got himself someone last night so basically jin-hyung doesn't leave hangovers in less than twenty-four hours and he even apologized to me and said he couldn't come then i tried hobi-hyung and he doesn't wanna go and yoongi-hyung hasn't answered my text yet and i just this is a really important exhibition and i don't want to miss that ticket, and i'm not allowed to pass it forward for money, so i thought it was logical to give it to someone who i at least know you don't even have to come with me just get the ticket and attend the exhibition pretty please? Taehyung nearly laughs at the last text, but the whole thing must be described as hilarious. Here is he, thinking so much about how to even face Jungkook on Monday, and the boy appears with an opportunity to meet with him sooner. The situation itself is just absurd, but Taehyung knows he is weak for Jungkook — which, gladly, does not qualify him as an idiot. To Jungkook:okbut then so it doesn't have to be awkward i guess we probably shouldn't goyou knowtogether He doesn't understand why this tickets are so important, but, whatever the reason is, it's none of his business. He said he would still help Jungkook, and if this ends up as a way, he is glad for it. From Jungkook: yeah sure and please ignore the "pretty please" text it was a bad joke anyways when can i give you your ticket
To Jungkook:
just leave it with the doorman of your building and i'll grab it on my way From Jungkook: alright the address will be written down the exhibition starts at eight Taehyung sighs, putting the cell phone down, groaning as he looks at the ceiling. The only thing he wants is for all the doubts and turbulences to go away for good — he wishes he could be that certain about his wish for Jungkook to go as well. Propitiously, it's still early when their conversation gets to an end, and Taehyung isn't exactly looking forward to staying that much at his place anymore. Therefore, he wakes up properly to the world, doing everything he has to do at his place, and then he grabs his keys and leaves; not sure to where, but definitely somewhere better than his couch, which is starting to get more familiar than it should be healthy to. As cliche as it might sound, even when echoing inside his own mind, Taehyung ends up at a café — not the same café as the one he met Jungkook, he isn't that desperate — near his apartment, and, as he walks inside, the warm and sweet smell of cakes and hot drinks reaches him, causing him to smile slightly, heading towards the counter to order. There's just one person before him, a guy whose back is turned at Taehyung as he calmly tells the clerk his order, and, as he speaks, Taehyung disturbingly notices that he knows that voice; maybe not deeply, but definitely knows it. "Minjae-ssi?" He asks before he has the chance to contain himself, drawing the boy's attention to him — and yeah, it's definitely Minjae, "Uh, hi. I don't know if you remember me." "Oh, wait a second, don't tell me, I'm gonna remember it," Minjae says, and he sounds strangely enthusiastic, pretty different from the impression Taehyung got at the club, "It's Kim something... Kim... Kim Taehyung?" Taehyung purses his lips in a smile, "Yeah, you got it." Minjae smiles, satisfied, "Good. How have you been, Taehyung-ssi?" "All good," Taehyung replies, gesturing with his head, "You?" "Sweetly the same," Minjae says, "Hey, sorry about my attitude at the club. I usually regret whatever I tell people there, so..." "Oh, it's fine," Taehyung says, and he means it, "I mean, it's a club, right? People are going to try and flirt, always. I apologize for not flirting back, though. Wasn't really in the mood." Minjae nods, "Understandable. No more hard feelings?" Taehyung nearly laughs at the way he says that, like they've been enemies fighting each other for years getting only now to a cease fire, "Absolutely no hard feelings." "Here is your Capuccino," the clerk interrupts them gently, extending the cup to Minjae. "Thank you," Minjae says, handing her the money with a smile on his face. As he moves aside to give Taehyung room to order, Taehyung notices his lack of movement and realizes he is waiting for him so they can talk more. Oh, well. "Hey," Taehyung greets the clerk, sympathetic, "I'd like a Mocha, please." "So, Taehyung-ssi," Minjae proceeds to talk to him, causing Taehyung's eyes to run to him, "Are you showing up at the club any other day? Haven't seen you there since the last time." Taehyung shrugs, "I don't really know, it's not exactly my place. I went there as a company to Yoongi-hyung and the rest of my friends, but I don't think now is a very good moment to be partying." "Really?" Minjae asks, "What else would take your Saturday nights, if I may ask?" Not you, Taehyung wishes he could say, but he has no intention of sounding rude, "Usually, I study. Tonight, I have this photography exhibition to attend. It's downtown, starts at eight. Have you heard of it?" Minjae shakes his head, "I can't say I'm the most interested person in photography in the world. I intend to be an actor, so it's kind of useless." Taehyung frowns, slightly taken aback by the fact told by Minjae, "I intend to be an actor, too." "Really?" "Yeah," Taehyung replies, "I don't think there's ever a moment where we can stop learning just because it isn't part of our job, though. I like photography, mainly if I'm gonna be an actor and have plenty of cameras pointing at my face all the time." Minjae laughs softly, agreeing with a gesture of his head, "You do have a point." "Guess I do," Taehyung says, and the clerk arrives in front of him in a matter of seconds, warm cup of Mocha being handed to him in a bit, and he hands back the money, "Thank you." With a polite bow, the clerk moves away, leaving Taehyung with Minjae once again. He turns to him with a cordial smile. "I'm gonna go now, but it was rather nice talking to you," Taehyung says as he moves towards the exit, "Better than at the club, definitely." "I'm glad," Minjae smiles widely, "Oh, and, Taehyung-ssi?" "Yes?" "When does that photography exhibition starts, again?" Taehyung blinks, "Uh, eight. I don't know where to buy the tickets, though." "I'll take care of that," Minjae says, "Thank you for the suggestion." Taehyung leaves the place after that, rolling his eyes, disappointed at himself for not being able to flirt with a guy who seems actually pretty decent just because of the fact that he is in love with the most confusing person to ever walk on Earth.*** What do you wear to attend a photography exhibition? Taehyung thinks it should be obvious, but it isn't his fault that he doesn't know. Usually, when he goes out to exhibitions or similar things, he does it with actors, and he is used to getting dressed to walk with actors, but definitely not photographers. He ponders whether asking Yoongi would be a good idea, but then he gets to the clear conclusion that it would most definitely not; firstly, because Yoongi isn't supposed to know that Taehyung took Jungkook's offer, and, second, because Yoongi has the sense of fashion of a rock. Finally, Taehyung options for a simple grey t-shirt plus his brand new black sweatpants, which looks even better as he puts on a blue jacket, leaving it unzipped. As he looks at himself in the mirror, he imagines that, although he could look better, he isn't bad. The only problem is in his hair, where the blonde is still stained with red sediments, but he can let that pass. He checks the clock. Eight and a half hours. He guesses that's the proper time to leave; not there to see the beginning, but soon enough not to be late. He drives by Jungkook's building to grab the ticket and holds the urge to ask the doorman whether Jungkook already left for the exhibition or not. He isn't even sure what is the answer he would like to hear. Does he want to meet with Jungkook there? Is it going to make anything worse? By the time he arrives at the exhibition, there's plenty of people walking around the hallways already, staring at the pictures on the wall, analyzing, judging, measuring. There's most adults, but Taehyung spots one or two teenagers around, whispering to each other as they glance at the photographies. "Oh, you came," Taehyung hears that freaking familiar voice and tries his best not to freeze in place. "I did," he says, looking above his shoulder, trying his best to wear his actor mask. As he takes a good look at Jungkook, his words get caught in his throat — then that's what you wear to attend a photography exhibition. Jungkook is someone else now. He isn't in his casual clothes and he isn't in his leather jacket; what he chose today was a social undershirt with a modern blazer that isn't as fancy as the rest of the blazers Taehyung's ever seen, and his hair is blonde. Alright, maybe blonde is too much, but there's several strands of his hair in a much clearer tone, leaving a warm contrast with the rest of his clothes and the majority of his hair. "You look nice," Jungkook comments, and it doesn't sound mischievous at all. I look nice? Have you seen yourself? "You too," Taehyung simply says, so thankful that he opted for acting as his life career, "So, the pictures look great. Are there any specific photographers?" Jungkook smiles slightly, "No, not really. It's not a professional exhibition." Taehyung frowns, "What does that mean?" "It's all from amateur photographers," Jungkook tells him, and Taehyung's eyebrows raise, "I know, surprising, right? Everything's incredibly good. It's a nice thing they're doing this, giving talented people the opportunity to show their job when no one else does. Wanna hear the best part?" "What is it?" "A few invitations were sent to a few influent people, and, if they come here and appreciate anything, they can ask for the name of the photographer, since the picture itself has no signature, and, if the photographer gets interested, he can start working for the one who enjoys his job," Jungkook says, and there is something about his glowing eyes that causes Taehyung's fast brain to connect everything so damn quick. "So," Taehyung starts, trying his best not to sound anxious, "Which one of those is your picture? Jungkook squints at him, "How do you know one of them is mine?" "You're too excited about someone important choosing the best photographies, and you know yours is probably among the best," Taehyung states, "How about you show me?" Jungkook chews on his bottom lip, but he complies, gesturing with his chin so Taehyung follows him. They walk past a tiny crowd of people in front of one of the photographies, one that Taehyung recognizes as fire growning before the sunset, the flames licking the sun down. It's beautiful, and Taehyung thinks it's a shame that such a talent hasn't been found out yet. There's plenty of photographies of people in whatever the position they are — actually, it shapes the majority of it. Among them, there's the pictures of the nature, and, as Jungkook guides Taehyung, he feels his expectation growning wider. He wonders which kind of thing would be in Jungkook's masterpiece. "This is it," Jungkook finally says, and he stops in front of one of the photographies, "This one is mine." The air is immediately knocked out of his lungs as his eyes meet the picture, the amount of emotions on it drowning him in all the ways. It contains a cold atmosphere, represented by the image of the moon seeing throught the twigs of a tree, and there's a hand reaching for it, long fingers extended, trying to get to the moon, but stopped by the tree's wrathful and several arms. There isn't stars in the sky or clouds covering anything. There is just the sky, the moon, the tree and that one hand, and it wraps itself around Taehyung's heart for a second before being removed, leaving a freezing sensation behind. "Woah," Taehyung sighs, chin dropped, eyes glistening, "Jungkook-ah, this is— It's just amazing. I have no words." "It's not that much," Jungkook says, and he sounds little, "I tried getting a nice effect, but I'm not sure I made it." "You did," Taehyung states, blinking as he stares at Jungkook's face, and his acting is gone, "Jungkook-ah, I have no knowledge about photography or anything similar, but this just feels so truthful to the feeling. It definitely looks professional." Jungkook glances at him, squinting the slighlest, nearly like he is trying to found out whether Taehyung is telling him the truth or just being an amazing actor, "You mean it." The phrase is somewhere between an affirmation and a question, so Taehyung decides to clarify it, "I mean it, okay? I really do." Jungkook blinks, nodding, and a smile spreads slowly through his face — Taehyung detests how much it affects him, "Thank you, hyung. It means a lot." Taehyung clears his throat, "I'm glad it does. Is there any other good picture that we should go check?" Jungkook seems like he is about to reply, but, then, they are interrupted by a new, sudden voice joining the conversation, and Taehyung wishes he could punch himself with a rock at the moment. "Hey, Taehyung-ssi!" Minjae greets, excited. Taehyung swallows hard, staring at Minjae as he approaches them, "Hi, Minjae-ssi." "You were right, this exhibition is really nice to see," Minjae says, and he smiles at Taehyung like they have been friends for years. Taehyung isn't sure whether he wants to hug or kill Minjae for cutting the moment he was having with Jungkook. "It's a good thing you like it," Taehyung simply says, and the way Jungkook's cheek hollows as he presses his tongue against it inside doesn't go unnocited by him, "So, uhm, Minjae-ssi, this is Jungkook-ah." For some unknown reason, he feels the need to add "ah" to Jungkook's name, to make sure Minjae knows that he is way closer to Jungkook than to him — although he knows he shouldn't be doing it. Perhaps he is just tired to have Minjae trying to flirt with him. "Hi," Minjae says, sympathetic, as he stretches out his hand to shake Jungkook's. Something deep in Taehyung's mind tells him that, if the exhibition weren't so important, Jungkook wouldn't have politely, but agressively done the same, "It's nice to meet you. Are you Taehyung's boyfriend?" Taehyung nearly chokes with his own saliva, and he gets Jungkook's raised eyebrow as a sign of offense, but he decides to ignore it, "No. Jungkook-ah is also friends with Yoongi-hyung." "Oh, it turns out Yoongi has more friends than we all could ever have imagined," Minjae jokes, and he seems to be in a good mood. Maybe it's about the way Taehyung refered to Jungkook as a friend of a friend, or maybe he just doesn't get along with the first impression he has of Minjae, but, either way, Jungkook clicks his tongue and speaks in a sharp tone, "Yeah, Yoongi-hyung has a nice taste in friends. Why didn't I ever hear of you, Minjae-ssi?" "I just met Taehyung-ssi recently, which is probably the reason why," Minjae replies, "But it was really nice of him to suggest this place for me to come tonight, anyway." Jungkook nods, and, although he makes no mention to look at Taehyung or even change his posture to make him feel guilty, the elder feels himself getting smaller and smaller as the moments go by. "So," Taehyung starts, opting for not allowing the situation to shape itself away from his reach, "Minjae-ssi, I'm glad you took the suggestion." "Me too," Minjae says, excitedly, "I love the pictures! They're all very graceful." Jungkook lets out a muffled, humourless laugh at the word "graceful", and Taehyung has to gather all of his courage to send him a glare. "What?" He asks Jungkook, "Graceful is a nice way to describe it." "Not for the photographers who worked hard for their art to seem agressive enough to show their feelings and then get called 'graceful'," Jungkook argues back, shrugging, "But I guess it's fine. It's your opinion, after all. Now, excuse me, please, I have a few more photographies I'd like to see before leaving." What do you mean you're already leaving?, Taehyung holds himself back not to ask. The urge to know is huge, but his mistrust and even that thing inside of him that keeps on insisting that believing in Jungkook won't be worth it stop him properly. As Jungkook walks away, Minjae lets out a low whistle, "Wow, I get why you didn't flirt back at the club now." Taehyung lifts up an eyebrow, "What do you mean?" "Well, you clearly fancy him, so I'm not surprised that another guy wouldn't call your attention," Minjae explains, "Although I do think you're still too handsome for a guy like him." "Wait a second," Taehyung stops him, "How can you tell I like him? It's not that obvious, is it?" "No, not really, I'm just a professional at figuring out that kind of stuff," Minjae says, "So, what's it that stops you from being with him, since the guy is obviously pretty jealous of you?" "It's complicated," Taehyung says, "I can't trust him." Minjae's nose wrinkels, "You can't, or you don't?" Taehyung gulps, "I can't." "But you do." "No," Taehyung says, but Minjae's stare makes it pretty clear he is looking forward for a corretion, "Okay, maybe a little, but definitely not like I trust my friends or someone like that." Minjae nods, "I get it. I wouldn't miss it, if I were you, though. I can tell he's jealous of you, and I can also tell you like him. I wouldn't try something that simple into something complicated." "I'm not turning it, it is, in fact, complicated." "Then turn it into something simple," Minjae shrugs, "And, if it doesn't work, just move on. Stop overthinking, you know? I have lots of friends like you and I can assure you that going on and on about the same thing will simply take you nowhere." Taehyung frowns, but he says no more, watching as Minjae moves away slightly to appreciate the rest of the pictures on the walls. He feels his cell phone buzzing in his pocket and removes it carefully, finding Namjoon's name shinning on screen. From Namjoon-hyung: they made out To Namjoon-hyung:ok let's calm downwho made out From Namjoon-hyung: who do you THINK hoseok and yoongi-hyung To Namjoon-hyung:WHATOH MAN I CAN'T BELIEVE IT WHEN DID IT HAPPEN From Namjoon-hyung: okay calm down you freaking shipper i'm not 100% sure but i'm like 99% sure hoseok came back from yoongi's this morning and he is the one who's sick now BESIDES everytime he talks about yoongi-hyung he stutters now and his face gets all red
To Namjoon-hyung:
f i n a l l yoh but i'm gonna cry my eyes out to yoongi-hyung how dare he not tell me From Namjoon-hyung: "hey dude i have feelings for, i just made out with the guy i'm in love with"
To Namjoon-hyung:
it does sound kind of awkward tho From Namjoon-hyung: OH REALLY so you're like, the only one in our group who's lonely this weekend and who's in korea
To Namjoon-hyung:
what do you mean the only oneohI THOUGH YOU DIDN'T DO ONE NIGHT STANDS From Namjoon-hyung: apparently i do
To Namjoon-hyung:
nononono wait a secondWAIT A SECONDYOU'RE WITH SEOKJIN From Namjoon-hyung: man h o w
To Namjoon-hyung:
then that's why seokjin is in a hangoverbecause you took him homeARE YOU IN A HANGOVER TOO From Namjoon-hyung: i'm scared now how do you know he's in a hangover the only person he called to tell about it was j j........... jungkook YOU'RE WITH JUNGKOOK
To Namjoon-hyung:
am not..... at the moment From Namjoon-hyung: IT MEANS YOU WERE traitor how could i not hear about it
To Namjoon-hyung:
ok first of all chill hyunghe just invited me to a photography exhibition and i accepted it From Namjoon-hyung: photography exhibition is it what kids are calling it these days
To Namjoon-hyung:
three seconds until i block you From Namjoon-hyung: no you won't hey i gotta go now but make sure to text me about your date later
To Namjoon-hyung:
it is NOT a datettyl hyung Taehyung sighs while putting his phone down, mood completely lost, and decides maybe photography exhibitions just aren't his thing. He turns around and calmly walks towards the exit, freezing as he notices that there is something else there, at the sidewalk, hands in the pockets of his pants, eyes running through the stars. "Jungkook-ah," Taehyung calls, taking a deep breath, and Jungkook looks at him above his shoulder as Taehyung walks closer, "Can we talk?" "Yeah," Jungkook says, blinking, "But, first, I have to apologize. I didn't have the right to be rude at you or your friend in there. I'm not sure what got into me." Taehyung hesistates before talking, "It's usually named jealousy, actually." Jungkook slowly nods, "Again, I didn't have the right to be jealous of you with anyone. I'm sorry." "It's okay," Taehyung says, "I just— I'm trying to understand, you know? Why would you be jealous of me? Does that have anything to do with what you said the other day? You thinking of whatever could have happened if you didn't break my heart?" Jungkook purses his lips, "What if it does?" "Then, be honest with me," Taehyung requests, "Don't play games, don't put things into difficult words. If you feel anything or at least think that you feel anything, be honest with me now." The dongsaeng's eyes are fixed on his, and Taehyung's whole body is screaming for him to do something, to take an attitude, but he refuses to do it before hearing what he needs to hear from Jungkook. "I think I might like you," Jungkook finally admits, and he sounds like he's taking a huge weight out of his shoulders, "And I know it might sound pretty messed up, but I can't help but feel it." Taehyung nods, slowly diggesting the clear words for the puzzle inside his mind, "Do you think I should be with you?" Jungkook blinks, "I don't think you're gonna." "Let me ask this another way," Taehyung says, "Do you want me to be with you?" "It doesn't matter," Jungkook shakes his head, "After everything I did, what I want doesn't matter—" "Tell me anyway," Taehyung insists, and he takes a step forward, trying his best to be brave enough to do so. He is now standing close to Jungkook, nearly too close, "Just tell me." Jungkook takes a deep breath, seemingly nervous, and, although he doesn't reply, he breaks no eye contact with Taehyung, one of his hands going up to move a rebel strand of hair away from Taehyung's eyebrow. When Taehyung makes no mention to move away, Jungkook's fingers tug at Taehyung's jacket, and Taehyung tries to keep his breath steady and not seem too affected, but the gleam of restlessness on the dongsaeng's eyes say otherwise. Jungkook leans slightly forward, pressing their foreheads softly together, "I miss you, hyung." "Don't lie," Taehyung asks him, voice shaky, and Jungkook reaches for his hand, squeezing with tenderness. "I'm not lying," Jungkook assures him, focused, "I'm not asking you to believe me or trust me, but I'm not lying. And I know that, probably, right now, everything I say sounds like manipulation, but I just needed to say it out loud. I miss you." Taehyung's eyes shut, eyelashes held together tightly as he ponders about what he should do. He knows what his body and heart are telling him to do, and he knows what his mind is telling him to do. Somewhere between both of them, he finds a brief and unsatisfying, yet rational answer. Leaning to Jungkook the slightest, he brushes their lips together and feels the dongsaeng's body stiff. Taehyung doesn't move away for a few seconds, neither pushes the kiss further; he keeps it that way, his mouth covering Jungkook's for a few seconds, just feeling it, recalling it. Jungkook relaxes, eventually, but he doesn't try to open his mouth or deepen it; he simply moves away when he feels like it's the time to, and, when his eyes meet Taehyung's, they're shinning with something that sticks between determination and emotion. "I miss you, too," Taehyung says, "But I don't know if I can trust you again. Not— not like this." Jungkook nods, "I know. But I'm— I'm gonna prove it to you, like I said with the flowers, like I said with everything. I'm gonna go and apologize to each of the people whose heart I broke in person; that's enough with me being a coward." "I can't assure you I'm going to be with you after that," Taehyung says, weakly, "I can't give you my word." "It's okay," Jungkook says, "I'm still doing it. I'm going to prove everything I need to you, and I'm gonna show I actually do care about you. If, in the end of that you feel like we can be together, like that's something you can do," he pauses, fingers ghosting Taehyung's cheekbone for a second, "Then I'll be here, okay?" He moves away after that, eyes still full of emotion, but, this time, to leave. Taehyung's fingers brush his one last time before he actually steps away, and he sighs, feeling his heart fighting his mind with total force and winning the battle, little by little. Then, finally, Taehyung nods, "Okay." He wonders what kind of proof is waiting for him.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
The photoshoot comes to an end a few days before Jungkook's big interview. He manages to score fairly in the test, and then he moves forward to the next phase, and Taehyung gets to know all about it through some awkward texts Jungkook sends him. It's nearly cute, the way the dongsaeng seems to be a lot more shy when talking to him now, even during the last days of photoshoot — Taehyung would soon have enough of Jungkook looking away every time he had to fix a piece of clothing. At the same time, thinking that Jungkook could indeed be crushing on him now twists Taehyung's stomach repeatedly. He wishes he could be tougher than that. Once Taehyung meets with Yoongi and Hoseok again, he tries really hard not to smile like some kind of fanboy, but he fails; they haven't confessed anything or told their friends any news, but the whole atmosphere around them was already so couple-ish — even more than the usual. Namjoon sits by Taehyung's side at every moment, apparently refusing to touch Hoseok and get corrupted with the annoying in-love virus. When Taehyung points out that he is also in love, Namjoon claims that "the virus isn't active when the other half of the in-love isn't around", and then, when Yoongi and Hoseok ask what they are whispering about, Taehyung fakes a cough and changes the subject. Two days before Jungkook's interview, Taehyung gets bad news from America. "What?" Taehyung practically yells at Jimin's image on the screen, and the elder rolls his eyes, laughing softly. "Taetae, calm down—" "How do I calm down?" Taehyung requests, "You're hurt—" "It's just my ankle and it's not broken—" "It's still hurt!" Taehyung argues, rubbing his face with his hands, "And, above all, they want to keep you a prisioner." "They said I have to be here for three more weeks tops," Jimin replies, shrugging slightly, "It's not a big deal, right? We've been apart for longer than a month now, we can handle a bit more." Taehyung's eyes widden, "How dare you? I'm having an abstinence crisis here—" "Listen, Taetae," Jimin cuts him, unable to hide his smile, "I miss Korea, like, a lot, and I miss you, like, a lot more, but we're capable of being apart a little bit more. For the sake of business, remember?" Taehyung pouts, and yes, it is the most childish gesture he could possibly think of at the moment, "Alright, but just because this is your dream. Aish, I should punch those jerks. Forcing Jiminie to stay away hurt like that." "You're such a child," Jimin says, but his smile is still there, and Taehyung is satisfied, "By the way, we didn't talk about Jeon Jungkook anymore. How have things been?" The younger male frowns, "Fine, I guess? We haven't talked much since the photoshoot ended. His big interview is in two days." "Are you going with him?" Jimin asks, one eyebrow raised. "Aish, Jiminie, I thought you didn't like Jungkook." "I don't," Jimin admits, shrugging, "I don't mind him, though, if he's going to make you happy somehow. Perhaps he can win over my sympathy the same way he crushed it. Along with your heart." "Thanks for the reminder." "Thought you needed someone to give it to you," Jimin says, and Taehyung squints, "Yes, it does mean you should be careful about that guy. You can give yourself the right to be happy, but he doesn't get to play with you twice and make it out with all of his teeth, and I'm not really into punching people, so let's avoid that, okay?" Taehyung smiles fondly, "I can work with that. Either way, Jiminie, did Yoongi-hyung and Hobi-hyung tell you anything about them?" "No, but it's pretty obvious everytime that I call Yoongi-hyung and I can hear Hoseok-hyung and Holly playing in the background," Jimin smirks, "They're practically married." "Yes!" Taehyung exclaims, "Besides, I think we're getting some Namjoon-hyung and Seokjin-ssi very soon." Jimin's nose wrinkles, "Doubt that. Namjoon-hyung and that Seokjin guy are probably just going to be each other's one night stands that last more than just one night because, well, they're both hot." Taehyung is about to say something else, but an unknown voice interrupts him by calling Jimin, and he squints as he notices the voice speaks in english, which means Jimin's attention is immediately drawed, probably because it's something related to his work there. Taehyung doesn't understand what the person tells Jimin, but he sees his best friend nodding and turning sadly back to the screen, "I gotta go, Taetae. We can talk tomorrow, right?" "Of course," Taehyung nods, hiding his disappointment for having his moment with his best friend cut like that, "Love you, Jiminie." "Love you too, Taetae." Taehyung knows it's time for him to go out the house and forget about his problems once he realizes the emptiness inside him after Jimin's figure disappears from the screen. Unfortunately, forgetting his problems isn't part of the universe's plan. He gets properly dressed and even puts on a headband, because, well, Taehyung might be humble, but he is aware that he looks hot with that kind of accessory. He has heard that comment more than once during his life, and he is feeling like going out and simply looking nice today. Then, while he is walking, enjoying the feeling of trying so hard to forget about everything, he bumps into someone. "Yugyeom-ssi," Taehyung recognizes, eyebrows going up, "Hey." Yugyeom looks different today. Less confident, less impressive. Perhaps it has something to do with the fact that he isn't part of the dance team sent to America, or just because he's away from his gym, but suddenly, Taehyung sees nothing special, neither threatening. "Hey," Yugyeom replies, and, somehow, as he alternates his weight from one leg to another, he looks uncomfortable, offset. Taehyung doesn't comment on it; instead, he waits patiently for the younger male to speak, "Taehyung-ssi, do you mind if we talk?" Taehyung slowly shakes his head, "No, not at all. Why, though? Did something happen?" He knows what it is about before Yugyeom even puts it in words — he isn't stupid, after all. When Jungkook said he would apologize to everyone whose heart he broke, he should have known that that included Yugyeom, and that, eventually, they would come together at a time where they would talk about it. Perhaps that's a thing that brings people together, having their hearts teared apart by the same person. "Listen, Jimin told me about what Jungkook did to you, and I imagine you already know he did it to me and other people before," Yugyeom says, and Taehyung nods quietly, "What I wanted to talk to you about— Did you get his text?" Taehyung blinks, "His apology text?" "Yes." "No, I didn't," he says, and, before he can explain why, Yugyeom is back at talking. "Why wouldn't you?" Yugyeom asks, frowning, "He texted me, and he texted Mingyu—" "Wait a second," Taehyung requests, a flash suddenly striking inside his mind at the mention of Mingyu's name, "How do you know Mingyu? Is there a club for people whose heart was broken by Jungkook or what?" Yugyeom pauses for a second, "Why do you sound so defensive?" "Well, Mingyu is a jerk, so I sound defensive because I don't think you're a jerk to be associated to him somehow," Taehyung says, "Are you?" "Mingyu isn't a jerk," Yugyeom complains, and Taehyung's eyebrows lift up, "Jungkook was a jerk to all of us, anyone who gives it back is simply giving him what he asked for." Taehyung's eyes widen, "Woah. Tell me you're not saying what I think you are saying." "What do you think I'm saying, Taehyung-ssi?" "I think that you're saying that you're also responsible for the fake interview that Mingyu set for Jungkook to get lost at nowhere and feel extremely disappointed at himself for not actually getting a chance on his life dream," Taehyung replies, and he takes a step forward, posture nearly intimidating. Yugyeom might be a few inches taller than him, but he isn't older, which means Taehyung's odds of showing authority isn't about to be a complete failure, "Tell me I'm wrong." Contrasting what Taehyung thought that could happen at the next moment, Yugyeom lets out a laugh, which is not only low, but also humourless, "You have got to be kidding me. Why do you sound so mad about it? We didn't do that only for us, it was for you, too. Because Jungkook had broken another heart and we weren't having any of that bullshit. Come on, he didn't even send you an apology text like he did to us — which, I might say, is the most coward way of all to apologize to someone, so why are you standing up for him?" "I did not get an apology text because I was there when he sent you guys that," Taehyung starts, fists clenched, and that is enough for Yugyeom to frown, "Jungkook apologized to me in the most brave way, and the only thing I had to deserve his trust was help him when, apparently, everyone else thought it was stupid to. Do you have any idea of what the two of you could have done? Jungkook could have been kidnapped, or hurt somehow, or something worse, just because you were craving your own definition of justice." Yugyeom scoffs, "You're so naive, Taehyung. How can you trust him because of an apology, how could you think that helping him that day would make you anything but his slave? Even now, how do you know he isn't planning on breaking your heart again?" "Because I have faith in people," Taehyung strikes back, "Because I'm not giving up on someone that apologized and that has been trying to be better. He's trying to get your apology and you're here, all confident, telling me that you risked his life for your revenge." "We never risked his life," Yugyeom argues, "Mingyu's friends were still around to make sure Jungkook wouldn't get actually hurt. We never meant to hurt him, and we did not hurt him. All we did was scare him a little bit. Perhaps he noticed he deserved it." Taehyung squints, "You're both so cruel, Yugyeom. I have no respect for either of you. You used his dream to attract him and you humiliated him with that. How are you any better than him, now? Whether he did to you, how can you say you are not just like him?" "I never broke someone's heart on purpose." "But you did shake his confidence in his dream," Taehyung exclaims, "I know what he did cannot be justified, but he is trying to make things right, Yugyeom. He is trying, in his own way. What about you? What have you been doing that turns you into someone better?" Yugyeom seems like he is about to fight back, words at the tip of his tongue, but his cell phone bursts out into ringing, the song suddenly way too loud. He curses lowly before taking the phone out of his pocket, frowning as he sees the name on the screen. "Hello?" He picks up, and Taehyung doesn't miss the wrinkles on his forehead, "What, for real? Crap, that's so messed up. Why? Because I'm right in front of Kim Taehyung right now." Taehyung frowns, but doesn't step in. "Mingyu, don't give me that bullshit. How am I supposed to believe that?" Yugyeom proceeds, and Taehyung feels his stomach twitch in antecipation to know whay they are talking about, "And what did he tell you? Yeah, right. Well, I find it easier to believe that you're lying to me than trusting that he did that." "Is this about Jungkook?" Taehyung finally interrupts, "What did he do?" "Mingyu says he went to his house and apologized in person, said that he regret what he did and that he will do whatever it takes to make it up for all the damage he caused," Yugyeom replies, "What is this, Taehyung? What is he doing?" Taehyung's lips purse, "He's trying, Yugyeom. His goal is to make things right." Yugyeom rolls his eyes, going back to his phone, "It's Taehyung. He thinks Jungkook is trying to make things right. Do you believe that?" Taehyung squints, "I bet he doesn't. Wouldn't expect less from someone who set a fake interview who could've got Jungkook hurt just to have his little revenge." Yugyeom frowns, and Taehyung hears Mingyu's voice going a bit louder. Then, Yugyeom shrugs, handing Taehyung the phone, "How about you talk to him?" Swallowing thickly, Taehyung grabs the cell phone and places it against his ear, "Mingyu-ssi?" "You must be Kim Taehyung," Mingyu says, and his voice is deeper than Taehyung though it would be — not deeper than his own, though, "It does feel terrible to be in love with Jungkook, doesn't it?" "Oh, you've been in love?" Taehyung forces his best arrogant tone, "I couldn't tell, with everything you have been doing lately." "Don't overreact, I didn't do anything but the interview scenario, and it wasn't even that bad," Mingyu argues, and Taehyung feels the sudden urge to find him and punch him right on the nose, "Besides, I don't know what kind of humiliation he put you through, but I'm not about to forget the one I went through." Taehyung's nose wrinkles, "How long ago was that? Why are you being so resentful?" "Because I trusted him," Mingyu hisses, and there's a huge amount of pain in his voice, something that catches Taehyung off guard, "I trusted him and he broke me, and I told myself I would do something about it once I pulled myself back together." For once, Taehyung feels like he is completely right and utterly wrong at the same time. He's right in giving Jungkook a second chance, he's right in accepting his apologies, he's right in being who he is — but he is oh so wrong to think anyone else should be forced to be like him. The conclusion comes as a weapon cutting through his skin, and he feels oddly awkward to proceed with the conversation, but there is no way he can just back down from the challenge and pretend it never happened. Even if it is to apologize, he needs to keep on talking to Mingyu now; he needs everything to be clear. "What did you feel when he apologized to you?" Taehyung finally asks, and Yugyeom frowns in front of him, nearly like he's wondering what is the purpose of the question. "Honestly?" Mingyu asks, "I felt nothing. Not anger, not sadness, not pity. I don't feel anything for him anymore." "Does this mean—" "I'm done with him," the guy finishes, and Taehyung holds back the urge to let out a sigh at that statement, "And, if you're wise, you're gonna be done with him too, sooner than you think." "Do your life," Taehyung says, blinking and taking a deep breath, "I'll do mine." He hands Yugyeom back his cell phone and spins on his heels so he can move away from there, but then he feels a hand pausing at his shoulder and raises an eyebrow at Yugyeom. "I know it seems like Mingyu is saying all the wrong things and choosing the worst way to say things, and I know we haven't been the best people in the world," Yugyeom says, and, for a moment, he sounds guilty,"But we're telling you the truth when we say maybe you should just let him go. Doesn't matter what he does to make it up to you, it won't change that things happened." Taehyung's nose wrinkles as he shakes his shoulder away from Yugyeom's reach, "I'm really concerned for you if you think apology requests were made for nothing. I just really hope you don't get close to anyone who also thinks that way, or you won't ever be able to make a mistake." Yugyeom looks like he is about to argue, but Taehyung doesn't give him the chance too; instead, he walks away, not even feeling the slightest amount of guilty — everything that Yugyeom and Mingyu did to Jungkook won't be justified unless they also apologize to him. That's Taehyung's mind, and it won't be changed. While walking on the edge of the sidewalk, Taehyung shakes his head slowly, reaching for his phone and typing a message. To Jungkook:heard your apology tour has already started He also types "i'm proud of you", but endures the urge to send it, deleting the whole new text on second thought. He knows things should be taken slow from now from, more careful than ever, mainly when it's directly about Jungkook. He's still walking when a text arrives. From Jungkook: what, you talked to mingyu?
To Jungkook:
kind of?i bumped into yugyeom and he had mingyu on the phone From Jungkook: so basically you yugyeom and mingyu should i be scared To Jungkook:well not about me i'm pacific aftho u should probably search for 'jungkook's hate group' somewhere, since your ex seems to know your other ex From Jungkook: well to be fair i would've looked for someone who went through the same as me too To Jungkook:how are you feeling jungkook From Jungkook: i'm getting better i guess? it's refreshing to start doing the right thing and, uhm thank you for worrying
To Jungkook:
no problem He bites his lip, unsure of what else to say. Should he go on with the conversation or end it? Is it too much to ask Jungkook about how anxious he is to the interview? Is it too rude to leave it like that? Gladly, Jungkook finishes his concern as he sends one more text. From Jungkook: hyung, can i ask you something? To Jungkook:well sure From Jungkook: can u come with me to the interview? it's just that jin-hyung can't come, he's really busy lately and i'm not talking to yoongi-hyung until this afternoon, and i don't really think i can talk to him about that so suddenly and i know it probably sounds like you are my last option again, after the exhibition but i'm also kind of scared to tell you that well i really want to have you there To Jungkook:because i helped you with the sutyding? From Jungkook: because i trust you Taehyung's breath gets caught in his throat and he feels like giving into his feelings, letting go of this pride bullshit, but he can't. He can't be that person. He isn't. To Jungkook:i guess it's finejust text me the time and i'll be there
From Jungkook:
thank you, hyung really To Jungkook:anytime Taehyung sighs. He wishes he could go to Yoongi's, spend the afternoon there, maybe watch a movie with his friend, but, then, Jungkook just said he's going to talk to him later, and Taehyung isn't about to interrupt such an important occasion. Instead, he decides to send Namjoon a text, asking him whether it is okay for him to come over or not — which gets a reply in less than five minutes, a simple "i'll find a movie", and that does it for him. Namjoon and Hoseok's shared apartment isn't huge, but it is definitely cozy and welcoming. Taehyung feels like he's home whenever he visits, and perhaps Namjoon and Hoseok's way of accomodating him has something to do with it. Today, though, there isn't Namjoon and Hoseok. It's just Namjoon, a fresh made bow of chicken, and a zombie movie waiting for their attention. Taehyung is glad that he is equally comfortable around all of them; otherwise, it would have been pretty awkward, going inside a house where he only feels greeted by one of the owners. "Hoseok is at Yoongi-hyung's place," Namjoon replies as soon as Taehyung asks about the elder, "He's been there for, what, twenty four hours now? I don't think they're even gonna be pulled apart anymore." "Aw, you've been jelly, hyung?" Taehyung provokes. "Yeah, sure," Namjoon rolls his eyes, "I haven't been home that often, either." Taehyung grins, "Right, because of Seokjin and all." "You really are a brat, aren't you?" Namjoon squints, "How could you even know any of this is about Seokjin? I could easily be having other guy other than Seokjin." Taehyung knows that's a half-truth; Namjoon could definitely be having other guy other than Seokjin if it's about his looks, because he is gorgeous as heck — Taehyung still kind of wonders what is in the minds of those who don't find Namjoon's beauty mindblowing, seeing the fact that he has always seen one of the most beautiful people everytime he looked at Namjoon, even before he got to know the amazing person he was. The thing is, Namjoon is the kind of guy who tells when it's something casual, and hides when it's serious. If he's hiding everything about Seokjin, Taehyung knows pretty well there's no such a thing as another guy at the moment. "If you say so," Taehyung shrugs lightly, smirking. “You know what’s kind of strange?” Namjoon asks, and Taehyung shakes his head, “I’m going out with someone, Jiminie is in America, living his dream, Hoseok and Yoongi are basically married, and you’re in a complicated thing with Jungkook while making your dream come true through college,” he says, and Taehyung lifts up an eyebrow, trying to understand what’s a surprise about all that, “It’s the first time we’re all in different paths.” That strikes Taehyung hard. He has never thought about it; being apart from his best friends on his way in life. The simple idea of being away from them used to be outrageous inside his mind. What happened to them? “I’m not saying you have to worry, thought,” Namjoon says, smiling gently, “It’s normal, you know? People have their own lives and all. It doesn’t turn down our friendship at any level.” Taehyung nods slowly, “I guess you’re right.” He hopes so.*** The day after, Taehyung wakes up to a text from someone he doesn’t initially recognizes, which happens due the fact that the number isn’t saved among his friends. It’s just “Unknown Number” and a message below, and he kind of worries that a freak might have found him before actually reading the whole text. From Unknown Number: Hello, Taehyung-ssi. It’s Seokjin. Can we talk?
To Unknown Number:
uh how smoothyeah sure why notwhat do you wanna talk about From Unknown Number: Not by text. Can’t you meet me in an hour?
To Unknown Number:
i JUST woke upis two hours from now too much for you? From Unknown Number: I guess I can work with that. Meet me at the central café. To Unknown Number:ookay As in, okay, you’re weird. Taehyung wonders what he might have done wrong. The conversation is likely to be about Jungkook, and he ponders what Seokjin has to do with his complicated “relationship” with the younger male. Of course, they’re best friends, but Jimin isn’t calling Jungkook and intimating him to a meeting. That’s how, in two hours, he enters the café and swallows thickly as he sees Seokjin, looking as good as the last time, eyebrow going up immediately as they stares meet. It’s going to be a tough conversation, Taehyung can tell. “Hi,” Taehyung says, timidly, as he finds his seat in front of Seokjin, “Did you order?” “I’m not ordering anything,” Seokjin replies, and he sounds deep, deeper than his voice itself, “I’m just here to talk.” Taehyung holds back a nervousness laugh, aware that it might sound slightly rude. “Alright,” he says, “Talk.” “First of all, I don’t want you to think Jungkook sent me here or anything alike,” Seokjin starts, “He’s probably busy with one of his big apology projects right now, taking care of his own business and guessing that I’m doing the same. Which, well, I am, as his best friend.” Taehyung frowns, “What are you talking about?” “Are you trying to get back on him?” If Taehyung had ordered something, he would have choked on his coffee, “What?” “It’s a pretty simple question, Taehyung,” Seokjin proceeds, and Taehyung doesn’t miss the lack of formality, “Are you trying to do to Jungkook the same he did to you? Is that why you’re going around helping him, giving him hope?” “Woah, I didn’t know Jungkook’s best friend was an ass,” Taehyung strikes back, blinking, “I should tell Namjoon about this kind of behavior, you know? Try and figure out if he’ll still like you if he knows what kind of person you think I am.” Seokjin stares, unimpressed, “Is it so hard to answer my question?” “I am in love with Jungkook, Seokjin,” Taehyung hisses, and it’s the most aggressive he has ever sounded with someone older than him, “I am in love with him and I won’t stay away from him unless I want to just because you think the world was shaped to be mean to your friends.” “He told you what happened to him. And I don’t trust or believe you.” Taehyung, on the other hand, can’t trust or believe his own ears. “He told me because he trusted me,” Taehyung makes clear, standing up, not even caring about how rude he sounds or looks, “And his opinion is the only one that I care about at the moment, so, whatever you have to tell me, that you care about him, that you just don’t want him to get hurt, I know all of that bullshit. My best friend has felt like going after Jungkook because of what he did to me multiple times and I was the one to stop him. I am in love with Jungkook and, if it’s my decision, I will treat him better than any of his friends do, going to someone for him behind his back. Do you understand me?” He doesn’t wait for a reply. Instead, he walks away, steps heavy, eyes following him all the way outside the café. He feels his blood boiling inside his veins; he understands why Seokjin would be worried, but the way he talked? The way he looked at Taehyung? He was no criminal, he had done nothing but help, and he most definitely did not deserve any of that crap. It would be pretty easy to have Seokjin and Namjoon finished by telling that. It would be even easier to get Yoongi to yell at Seokjin. However, Taehyung isn’t that guy. He isn’t the person Seokjin is accusing him to possibly be. As Taehyung figures he is far away from the café, he takes his cell phone off his pocket and blocks Seokjin’s number, just for now, so he won’t text him anything stupid. He wonders if this feeling inside his chest, tightening, is the thought of having someone hurt Jungkook like that again, and, even worst, the idea that someone might have pictured him, out of all the people, to be that specific jerk. He decides it’s better not to tell anyone about that. Instead, he rolls his finger on the screen, finding Jungkook’s number. He is about to text him, ask about how it went with Yoongi, but he stops himself. They can’t talk at the moment. Seokjin could be talking to him. No, he has to wait. If Jungkook tells him anything tomorrow, at the interview, he will know already. Yeah, he can wait one day.*** He cannot. Well, actually, he spends the night okay, sleeps like an angel, but the rest of the day is just pure anxiety. He wants to meet with Jungkook fast, which is unfortunate, because the clock seems to be laughing at him, going as slow as it can. Happily, even the clock can’t make him wait forever, and the time to meet Jungkook comes. They meet up in front of the interview’s building, and Jungkook is looking as good as at the photography exhibition, except for the way he looks way less confident now, nervously looking around until he finds Taehyung, and Taehyung tries to avoid the wave of happiness that goes through his body as he notices that. “Hey,” Taehyung tells him, smiling brightly, “Are you excited?” “More like frightened,” Jungkook says, trying his best to smile, “And, oh, I talked to Yoongi-hyung last night.” “So?” Taehyung asks, eyes going wide with curiosity. “We’re fine,” Jungkook replies, and Taehyung’s smile grows bigger, “I told him about all the conversations I had with you, which I hope is fine—“ “It is.” “And then I apologized and said I couldn’t lose one of my best friends,” Jungkook finishes, ears slightly red, and Taehyung finds it adorable, “And now we’re okay.” “You sound relieved.” “He’s important,” Jungkook states, “Really, really important. He’s like Jin-hyung-important.” Taehyung fights the urge to frown at the mention of Seokjin’s name, “I’m really glad things are going well to you, Jungkook-ah.” He doesn’t realize what he has said before he says it. Jungkook’s eyes sparkle at the way Taehyung says his name, but he makes no mention of it, which Taehyung thanks mentally, not ready to face it at the moment. Then, Jungkook guides him inside the building, and Taehyung finds a seat at the reception room to wait for him. The interview takes forty minutes. During that while, Taehyung reads magazines, looks around, grabs a water from a machine and tries his best not to overthink anything. He doesn’t want to remember Seokjin’s eyes the day before and the way he talked to him like he was someone planning to do something bad to Jungkook, and he doesn’t want to think about whether he is willing to give Jungkook that kind of second chance or not either. Nonetheless, at some point, he finds himself thinking about all that. He asks himself if what he is doing can count as giving Jungkook false hopes. The dongsaeng is clearly more confident about his relationship with Taehyung now, but Taehyung has said before he can give him no guarantee. That should be enough, right? It should let him know there is no certain thing between them. He has no time to get to a conclusion. The door is opened the moment after, and Jungkook finishes saying goodbye to someone inside, and, then, once he’s out and he looks at Taehyung, his smile goes from ear to ear and his eyes are shinning. He got in. Taehyung is proud. Without thinking, Taehyung takes a few steps in his direction and opens his arms. Gladly, there is no awkward silence moment, because, in the next one, Jungkook’s chest is pressed against his and he can smell Jungkook’s hair. The dongsaeng’s chin is perfectly light on his shoulder, and Taehyung feels that weird sensation of being home, which he wishes he wouldn’t feel so deeply when around Jungkook. Taehyung’s cell phone buzzes inside his pocket, but he pays it no attention. He keeps on hugging Jungkook for a few more seconds, and, then, when they pull apart, he resists to cup the dongsaeng’s face. “You’re awesome,” Taehyung tells him, “You really are. I bet he loved you. Did you manage to feel comfortable?” “Yes.” “How?” “I imagined someone I trust in his place,” Jungkook says, and his eyes are deeply warm on Taehyung’s, “Which wasn’t hard, since I practiced with the same person.” Taehyung can’t help but smile, “You deserve this, Jungkook-ah. You’re gonna be the best photographer this world has ever seen.” Jungkook looks at him like he is about to kiss him, and Taehyung wants it, but the younger male simply shakes his head in disbelief, “I can’t believe I made it. I have to tell Jin-hyung, and Yoongi-hyung, and— Oh. No, first, I have to give you something.” Taehyung frowns, “Give me something?” “Yeah,” Jungkook replies, taking something off his pocket — an envelope — and handing it to Taehyung, “Here. This is basically my life. This contains everything I did, and each word about something I did to harm any of this guy’s hearts, I put something in front, something I wish I could have done to avoid myself from being that idiot. And I know a letter won’t change anything, and that I told you that I would prove to you that you can trust me, but I figured out I’m not a guy of that kind of thing, so this is kind of my best. My feelings for you, everything that has to be made clear, is at your part in this. And, because I didn’t think this was enough, I made something else.” Taehyung is already feeling overwhelmed with the whole new information when Jungkook hands him something else — a pen drive, this time. “I made this for you,” Jungkook says, “And it won’t be enough to thank you or tell you what I feel exactly, ever, and I should do lots of other things to win you back, but I figured grand gestures and all that stuff would force you into something that might not work,” he proceeds, “This, though, won’t be fake, or too much, or something mindblowing. This will be me. I’m giving myself to you at the moment, and my heart comes along.” Taehyung feels tears stinging at the corners of his eyes at the words, but he refuses to cry; he needs to see what Jungkook has to show, he needs to see who Jungkook really is once and for all. “I’m gonna go and tell Jin-hyung and Yoongi-hyung now,” Jungkook says, taking a deep breath, “I will text you later, okay? Just so hear your opinion on it. Whatever it is, I’ll take it, okay?” Taehyung can do nothing but nod. He goes home as fast as he can. He reads the letter first. It’s not just one paper, but he takes his time, paying attention to every detail. He reads Jungkook’s history over again, and then, he reads only the parts where Jungkook talks about what he wish he could have done — which are, fortunately, written in blue, so he can differ — until he finally reaches his own history. I wish I hadn’t make you and Yoongi-hyung fight.
I wish I had told you the truth that afternoon.
I wish I had been honest to you that night.
I wish I had realized how special you were with that touch.
I wish I had never done that. Taehyung’s eyes are watery once he finishes reading, and he rubs his hands on them, swallowing hard. He knows it could be another trick, but he can’t live his life thinking about what it real or not; not anymore. He moves forward to the pen drive. There’s only one folder, which he clicks on quickly, and then there’s ten pictures, each one of them with one place, some with flowers, some with plants, some with stones, some with skies; then, in the middle of each of them, theirs is a word, and, put side by side, they form a phrase. I am sorry. I am thankful. I like you, Taehyung. Taehyung covers his own mouth with his hand, admiring each pictures, noticing each small detail, and he knows it could all have been done by anyone, but it wasn’t. It wasn’t, because this isn’t simply art, or just pictures. This is Jungkook. All of him. Taehyung has finally made a decision. He is about to reach for his cell phone to text the boy when a text from another someone arrives. From Jiminie: taehyungie~ i’m going back tomorrow and i have huge news!
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Taehyung doesn't call Jungkook that night. He receives a video call from Jimin to tell about his big news and washes his face to make sure his emotional shaky state won't be evident, which would be rather useless, had Jimin been closer to him and not in America, because, when they were together, Jimin could notice anything. Gladly, it seems like his super powers have weakened, because his excitement as the call goes on isn't unstable for a second. "Taetae, I have something big for you!" Jimin exclaimed, and he sounded so enthusiastic Taehyung would be unffair not to mirror his emotions. "What is it, what is it?" "I told my manager and his friend you were an amateur actor today morning, and it turned out that his friend is also a manager, but he works for a set in Hollywood, and then I showed him one of your old plays and he liked you!" Jimin said, all at once, and Taehyung's eyes widened as he processed everything, "I told him I was coming back to Korea in one day to return in a month to America so I can conclude the trip properly and he said he is willing to let you audition for the next movie he is recruiting actors for! You won't be leaving in less than a year, and, then, you will have to stay in America for only a year for the movie!" The whole next morning, Taehyung is thinking about that. He wonders if this is a sign; a sign that he isn't supposed to be with Jungkook at all, because, right now, when things are supposed to work, they don't. He texts Hoseok. Asks him whether he is home or not. Unfortunately, he isn't, but, as the last part of Hoseok's text says, "Yoongi is at his place." They all know each other so much they have already learned there isn't an specific someone Taehyung needs to talk to sometimes. He just needs to talk to any of them. He heads to Yoongi's place in an hour. Yoongi receives him with a curious look, and, as Taehyung goes inside, he lets out what he came to talk about. "I'm in love with Jungkook," Taehyung says, slowly, and Yoongi watches as his chest goes up and down, "And I believe that he likes me. Am I being naive?" Yoongi smiles gently, following Taehyung to the living room, "Naive isn't the word, Taehyungie. You're giving him another chance, trusting him again, and having hope. None of those things are bad things." "What if he is lying?" Yoongi blinks, staring at him. At first, he says nothing, but he gestures for Taehyung to follow him, and, with a sigh, not feeling like protesting, Taehyung complies. They walk to Yoongi's room, where a sleepy Holly is getting some rest in bed, and Taehyung sits serenely by his side, caressing his small ears, smiling as the dog leans into his hand. "How many pictures did Jungkook give you?" Yoongi asks, sitting in front of his computer and typing something. Taehyung frowns, "Ten, why?" "Because this is how many pictures he took," Yoongi replies, moving away slightly so Taehyung can have a perfect view of the screen, and his eyes widden before the impressive amount of images that show up, and, as Yoongi scrolls down the cursos, he notices that Jungkook must have used a lot of time taking all of those, and Taehyung can't help but feel bad for his mistrust, "He sent me all of them and said he trusted me to choose the best ones before he went to meet you at the interview place. He really put all his effort into this, Taehyungie, and it's more than I have ever seen Jungkook do for anyone." "I—" Taehyung starts, but he is unable to proceed, words stuck in his throat. Yoongi seems to recognize the feeling, because he smiles kindly, reaching to squeeze Taehyung's shoulder softly. "It's supposed to work this time," Yoongi assures him, "Don't overthink anymore, alright?" Taehyung sighs, nodding, "I still think it's unffair of me to talk to you about it, despise Hobi-hyung's assurance." "It's not unffair," Yoongi shrugs, "I'm figuring things out with Hoseok now. It's a matter of time until I have no longer feelings for you." "How are you so sure?" Yoongi smiles, "I'm strong. I know stuff." "Yeah, but you have feelings," Taehyung argues, "Doesn't matter how much you try to make people believe you feel nothing, I know that you do." "Yeah?" Yoongi laughs, "Thanks, Taehyungie. Anyway, I think you have something to deal with. I'd get going if I were you." "Right," Taehyung says, feeling kind of nervous once again, "I'm leaving, then." "You can come back later, if you want, and bring Jungkook," Yoongi says, standing up and moving towards Holly, caressing the dog's belly, "Or not. I'm not really into watching couples interacting. In fact, do you mind if I ask you to stay away a few months?" Taehyung laughs, grabbing a pillow and pretending to throw it at Yoongi, "And I have to handle you and Hobi-hyung?" "Hoseok and I aren't in a relationship," Yoongi replies, and Taehyung scowls, "At least, not yet, alright? We're in that time of figuring out stuff and I shouldn't even be telling you this, for all that's worth. Besides, even if we reach the point to call ourselves a couple, we won't be a disgusting couple." "Bet you're gonna be the type of couple that makes out in public," Taehyung mocks, and it's his turn to dodge from a pillow. "That's you and Jungkook." "What do you take me for?" Taehyung asks, laughing, "But, seriously, I'll get going, and I'll text you later, okay?" "Yeah, alright," Yoongi says, "Good luck, Taehyungie." "Thank you, hyung."*** Taehyung heads to Jungkook's apartment right after. He isn't sure about what he is going to do once he arrives, neither what he is supposed to say, but he guesses it won't mind while he faces Jungkook. He decides that whatever he is going to do will be decided during the moment, so he won't have a single reason to regret. He stops in front of Jungkook's door, though, frozen, once he arrives. Eventually, he knocks. His whole body is screaming, and, at the same it, it feels like each part is finally agreeing with one another. When Jungkook opens the door, Taehyung's body, mind and heart definitely agree for the first time, and he has no time — or strenght — to ponder before he's cupping Jungkook's jaw, crashing their lips together and turning the dream into reality. Jungkook lets out a small "hmph" of surprise at first, and Taehyung moves away the slighlest, just allowing him to process what's going on for a second, because, at the next moment, it's Jungkook who's tugging at the collar of Taehyung's shirt and kissing him with all his will. There's flame, and there's truthfulness, and there's freaking fireworks exploding all over Taehyung's mind — for the first time, he doesn't mind the cliche —, and it's so much he thinks his heart might burst out of his chest. As he feels Jungkook's lips move under his, desperate, althought nothing but caringly, he realizes this is what he has been looking for. Not the Jungkook who kissed him boldly and flirty in front of his building, not the Jungkook who exhaled confidence all over the place just so he could look better. He wanted this, the honesty, the feeling that things are real. And, boy, they are real. "Hold on," Jungkook requests, more breath than sound, as he chuckles softly against Taehyung's mouth, "Does this mean—" "I'm giving us another chance," Taehyung finishes for him, watching Jungkook's sparkling eyes, and they are beautiful, "I trust you." Jungkook smiles and Taehyung has no time to say more — neither he wishes to — as Jungkook's mouth covers his once again, tongue sliding between his slightly aparted lips, and Taehyung nearly groans as Jungkook tils his head to give him better access to the kiss, deepening in a way that sends Taehyung's thoughts miles away. Taehyung eventually gets tired of giving his hands no use, therefore, he moves so his fingers are slipping from Jungkook's chin to his nape, tangling at the small hair strands, and Jungkook is spining them around, closing the door behind Taehyung so they aren't carelessly standing at the hallway anymore, and Taehyung's back is against the wall in seconds, with Jungkook's hands going from his arms to his waist and to his hips and everything's so intense and perfect that Taehyung finds himself afraid that it will dissolve as a fantasy any moment now. "Alright," Jungkook says, moving away a little, panting slightly, "We should calm down." Taehyung laughs softly, hands' grip loosened up as he supports his arms lazily on Jungkook's shoulders, "This is really good, though." "Indeed, it is," Jungkook agrees gently, leaning forward so he places a kiss on Taehyung's forehead, and the elder is pretty sure he is about to melt, "Thank you, hyung. Really, thank you for trusting me." "You don't have to thank me, Jungkook-ah," Taehyung assures him, "But, either way, since I know you've been looking for this exactly, I'm glad I managed to help." Jungkook smiles, "Hyung, I really want to do this right this time." "What do you mean 'do this right'?" "Go out with me," Jungkook says, and Taehyung feel his heartbeats increase a level, "Let's go on a date, and then have a proper night, with no lies or pretending, and actually get to know each other. Let's start dating for real, with no more hiding. Let's— Let's both be in love." Taehyung feels his smile reach his ears and nods, "Okay. Let's do this." Jungkook's smile mirrors his, "Good. Now, should we go inside? I mean, we are kind of inside, but I don't think you came here to spend the whole day leaning between the door and the wall." "Well, if it's the way we started it, I don't really mind—" "Hyung," Jungkook gives him a disapproval glance, but he chuckles softly anyway, holding Taehyung by the hand as he walks towards the living room. Everything seems different now; Taehyung feels like he is finally getting to know the real Jungkook, and it is both overwhelming and comforting. They side beside each other on the couch, hands close, and Jungkook seems to be thinking of something to say, but, as Taehyung notices his clear hesitation, he starts the conversation himself. "I really think this is gonna work out now, you know," he says, and Jungkook's eyes find his, his pupils slightly dilated, "I trust you and I'm in love with you, and you trust me and you like me. This is supposed to be succeed." Jungkook nods, "I have no doubt on that, hyung. Though I do think we should, you know, talk about it properly." "We can do that," Taehyung agrees, "What can we settle about it?" "We should take things slow," Jungkook says, and, before Taehyung has the chance to frown, he justifies himself, "Not hiding from anyone or anything like that, but, like, slow in acts, you know? We don't have to rush things like thousands of dates and meetings out of nowhere, neither kisses or anything further than kisses. We can take it all slow, get to know each other properly through this." Taehyung nods, because he imagines that has always been kind of how he wanted things, although he used to be willing to accept what Jungkook's actor-self offered before, "I'm perfectly okay with that. So, Jeon Jungkook, will you go out with me so we can talk about our lives and get to know each other accordingly?" Jungkook smiles, "Yes, hyung, I will go out with you so we can get to know each other accordingly." Taehyung smiles, satisfied, "Good to hear that." They remain in silence for a few seconds, and, although this would probably seem awkward at another situation, Taehyung feels comfortable, nearly like they are allowing the atmosphere to diggest all their decisions, just enough so it will work without rushing stuff this time. Then, once he figured the atmosphere is sufficiently adapted, he decides to bring something else out. "So, have you talked to anyone else on your apology list?" Taehyung asks, because he wants to show he actually does care about Jungkook's development, despise their brand new relationship." "Yes," Jungkook replies, "I actually went to talk to Yugyeom this time." "Really? What did he say?" "He said he didn't believe me and that he knew I was just trying to make a fool out of him once again," Jungkook says, and, although he doesn't sound satisfied, Taehyung doesn't find his voice tone upset either, "It's okay, though. I didn't think it would be easy at all." Taehyung smiles, poking his shoulder, "We making things hard for you, darling?" Jungkook stares at Taehyung blankly, nearly like he is trying to hold himself back — but then he gives up and bursts out in laughs, and Taehyung himself follows him, because the whole context is too funny to be ignored. "Darling? For real?" Jungkook asks, still laughing. "What, you don't like it?" Taehyung provokes, "I guess we should discuss pet names, shouldn't we?" "I honestly didn't take you for someone who did pet names," Jungkook confesses, "Besides, aren't we supposed to start actually dating before using those kind of things?" "Aren't we halfway through?" "Yeah, but it kind of ruins the point of taking things slow," Jungkook protests, but he doesn't mean it in any offensive way, and Taehyung knows it by the glow of humor on his face. Taehyung pouts, "Are you saying we won't be using any pet names?" "That's not what I said." "How about 'babe'?" Taehyung asks, and Jungkook frowns. "Pretty common," he says. "Aish, you want something unusual?" Taehyung ponders, "Sweetie?" Jungkook smirks, "Is that what you call unusual, hyung?" "Oh, I know!" Taehyung exclaims, and Jungkook doesn't seem able to contain a smile due the elder's enthusiasm, "What about 'beloved'?" "Beloved?" Jungkook echoes, and Taehyung nods excitedly, "That's, like, really old." "But people don't normally use it nowadays," Taehyung argues, "And it's cute. And it kind of fits you." Jungkook sighs, smiling gently, "Alright, then." He smiles, and so does Taehyung. They are fine. *** The next day, Taehyung wakes up somewhere that isn't his apartment — somewhere he has woken up before. His right arm is slightly aching, which could easily be explained by the fact that Jungkook's head has been supported on his forearm the whole night, but Taehyung isn't complaining. Jungkook looks peaceful while sleeping, nearly like he is having the calmest and most comforting dream to ever exist, and Taehyung can't help but smile at the thought. The thing is, he isn't worried about waking up beside Jungkook again, because it's different this time. Firstly, because Jungkook is a brand new person, who won't hurt him by any means. Besides, different from the other times, they did nothing during the night. Taehyung doubts any of his friends are going to believe him, but all he did was tell Jungkook that he was tired, and all Jungkook did was offer him to stay over, with no second intentions, and they didn't even kiss except for a peck before falling asleep. As they said, they are taking things slow, and Taehyung could definitely get used to it. "Hey," Taehyung whispers, poking Jungkook's face gently with his index finger, "Sleeping Beauty." Jungkook groans lowly, turning around so his face is pressed between Taehyung's arm and the pillow, and he says something that is muffled by the fabric. "I can't hear you," Taehyung says, smiling. "I said just because I'm okay with 'beloved', it doesn't mean you get to call me every cliche nickname in History," Jungkook mumbles, and it's all still kind of inaudible, but Taehyung gets the context. Taehyung chooses not to protest; instead, he whispers, "You're killing my arm." "You'd deserve it," Jungkook replies, but he moves slightly away, giving Taehyung the needed space to remove his arm safely, "Good morning." "Good morning, Jungkook-ah," Taehyung sings, "Slept well?" "Yeah, 'course, like a baby," Jungkook says, and Taehyung catches the glimpse of humor on his expression starting to emerge, "I'd love to sleep a bit more, actually." Taehyung laughs softly, "You can sleep all you want, but at least tell me bye." Jungkook blinks, "Bye? Why are you leaving early?" "Jiminie returns to Korea today," Taehyung explains, supporting his weight on his elbows as he softly sits with his back against the headboard, "I'm picking him up at the airport." Jungkook nods, "How was America?" "It was okay, as far as I see. He got hurt, though," Taehyung says, and Jungkook frowns, "His ankle, more specifically. That's why he is returning now." "Is he okay?" "Yeah, he is." "I'm glad, then," Jungkook says, "Do you have to go already, although? It's soon to soon for any possible flight." "Well, not exactly," Taehyung replies, "I was thinking of passing by somewhere to buy me a hair dye, though. I liked the way red looked on my hair, and I was thinking of coloring it before picking him up." Jungkook blinks, "I have some red hair dye." "Seriously?" "Jin-hyung dyes his hair all the time and I'm responsible for, well, doing the job," Jungkook explains, "I could dye it for you, if you want it." Taehyung's face lightens up, "That would be really nice! To think about it, it's something really couple-ish, isn't it? Coloring each other's hair?" "I've been coloring Jin-hyung's hair my entire life." "Don't ruin my fun," Taehyung protests, "Well, either way, I'd very much like if you dyed my hair, Jeon Jungkook-ssi." "Good to know, Kim Taehyung-ssi." Taehyung smiles, jumping out of bed before he has the chance to lose the enthusiasm, "Alright! Would you, by any chance, have a baggy shirt to borrow so I can keep this one without any inkblots? Besides, about that new toothbrush you borrowed me last night—" Jungkook laughs softly, "I do have the shirt, and, for your luck, I'm feeling generous today. Besides, the toothbrush used to be new until you used it, genius. You can have it." "Thank you, beloved," Taehyung practically sings, and, before Jungkook can complain, he is already moving towards the bathroom, "I'll buy you a new toothbrush as soon as I can. See you in a minute!" He notices Jungkook squinting, but then the dongsaeng laughs softly, throwing himself back at the pillows and burying his face there. Taehyung finds it adorable. While he is brushing his teeth, looking at his reflection on the mirror and running his fingers through his blonde hair strands, Taehyung thinks about the whole context of this new relationship with Jungkook. So far, the atmosphere has been exactly what he has been expecting, and he has no complains. Funny thing that he just got offered an even bigger opportunity that includes moving away from this new, healthy relationship for a year. What a mess the universe can be sometimes. Once Taehyung leaves the bathroom and Jungkook assumes his place, leaving after using about the same amount of time as the elder, they move on to the hair coloring process. Jungkook claims he is only used to Seokjin's hair and could easily end up ruining Taehyung's own, but the elder assures him that he trusts him — he shakes while saying so, though. This isn't some temporary hair dye, it's permanent, and he crosses his fingers hoping that it will look good. Gladly, it seems like Jungkook can do anything well, because Taehyung's hair looks fantastic once he washes the hair dye's excess out of his hair. He actually looks really nice, and he can see himself using a headband with that color and feeling awesome already. "It looks amazing, Jungkook-ah," he says, and he means it, "Thank you so much!" Jungkook smiles caringly, washing his hands, "No problem, hyung." Taehyung takes a look at the clock and sighs. He has about an hour now, and he doesn't want to get late, so he figures it's probably better to get going, "I have to go now, Jungkook-ah. Do you want to come?" Jungkook shakes his head, "Thanks, hyung, but I think this is a moment for you to meet with your best friend, and someone else being there will just feel wrong. Besides, I have a lot of paperwork to fulfill so I can send it all to the University within the next weekend." "You're gonna rock that," Taehyung says, "Let me know if I can help in anything, alright?" "Sure," Jungkook says, and he follows Taehyung to the door, unlocking it with a smile, "I guess I'll text you later." "I guess you will," Taehyung replies, and Jungkook rolls his eyes, smile still on his face, and Taehyung leans forward to kiss his cheek really quick, "Bye, beloved." Jungkook tries to hide his flushed face by hiding behind the door as Taehyung leaves, but Taehyung can nearly hear how flustered he is as he waves, "Bye, hyung."*** Taehyung keeps on staring at his cell phone as he waits for Jimin's airplane to arrive. He is anxious to meet with his best friend again, and even more to talk about everything they didn't have time to talk during the video calls. Somehow, although they were always talking to each other, it feels like Taehyung has been going through abstinence crisis — of Jimin. After twenty-three minutes of standing by, Jimin texts him and says he has arrived and is going to meet with him at the waiting point. Taehyung can recognize Jimin anywhere; that's why, even without the mouth mask or his usual outfit, Taehyung sees Jimin feets away, and, well, his first instinct is to re-act that cliche scene from every single romance movie where someone runs straight to another someone, despise Jimin being Taehyung's best friend instead of romantic interest and the fact that they aren't apart for more than two months. When Taehyung throws his arms around Jimin's shoulders and pulls him closer, hugging him with all the affection in his heart, he recognizes the familiar sensation of home that emanates from his best friend everytime they are together. He missed Jimin so much and it's barely been time enough for that, but he is pretty sure Jimin feels the same for the way he holds onto him at the moment, nearly fearing that they will be apart again if he moves away. However, Taehyung isn't worried; his brother is home now. "I missed you so much, Jiminie," Taehyung says, voice muffled, and Jimin laughs softly. "I missed you too, Taetae," Jimin replies, and, as they pull apart, he has a smile all over his face, "Woah, you dyed your hair red again. Was it today?" "Yeah, today morning," Taehyung says, "I actually asked Jungkookie to dye it for me—" "Jungkookie?" Jimin cuts him, and, for just a second, Taehyung freezes; until he sees Jimin smile, "So, you're working things out." Taehyung swallows thickly, "We are." "I'm really glad for you, Taetae," Jimin nods, and he sounds genuine, "Now, I really want to get back home and get some rest. My ankle has been killing me." "Oh!" Taehyung exclaims, suddenly remembering Jimin's hurt ankle, and only now he notices that Jimin's keeping one of his feet slightly lifted up from the ground, "I totally forgot about that! Don't give up on me." "I won't," Jimin laughs, "Just help me go to the car and we'll be fine." Taehyung does. Jimin takes the bag, because he insists to do so, but Taehyung helps him support his weight all the way to the car, and then he helps his best friend to get himself comfortable on the passenger seat before moving to the driver's seat. "You know you have to tell me about everything, right?" Taehyung asks, as soon as he spills the wheel, "How was everything? How is your ankle? Is everyone nice?" "Taetae, I literally talked to you everyday," Jimin laughs. "Still," Taehyung insists. "What we do have to talk about is your new job opportunity," Jimin says, and Taehyung's grip on the wheel tightens. Unfortunately, Jimin's superpowers haven't left him, because the tiny movement doesn't go unnoticed, "What is wrong? I thought you were waiting for this kind of chance." Taehyung sighs, "I have. My whole life, I was waiting for an opportunity to upgrade my skills somehow. Although, to be fair, I always imagined it as something that would start here, in Korea, and it was never so soon." Jimin's eyebrows furrow, "So? Come on, Taetae, I know you. Why don't you tell me what's actually bugging you about this?" Taehyung chews on his bottom lip, aware that he has to be honest, because Jimin has always been nothing but honest to him, and their friendship takes that kind of effort. Nonetheless, he must say he is scared. Above all, because Jimin doesn't like Jungkook, and it might mean his opinion is slightly biased against him. "It's Jungkook," Taehyung mumbles, more breath than sound, and he watches sideways as Jimin frowns, "I know this is stupid and I shouldn't be contemplating the idea of giving up America so I can stay here with him, but it's not like I can bring him along. He just got accepted in the University of his dreams, it wouldn't be fair of me." Jimin stares at him, almost blankly, "But it is fair to you to give up on your dream for him?" Taehyung takes a deep breath, "It's not giving up on my dreams, Jiminie. I can always have another opportunity. Isn't that the whole point of being in University, to begin with?" "What if you don't get another chance like this one?" Jimin argues, "You are really talented, Taetae, and I'm sure anyone who watched you acting would give you the most important role in any movie, but the thing is, we can't be sure anyone that important will be watching our college performances ever again. What if you lose this for him and it isn't worth it?" "You mean what if I lose this for him and he breaks my heart again." Jimin pauses, "Don't put words in my mouth." "I don't have to, I know you," Taehyung says, "I have known you for long enough to know what you mean. And, listen, hyung, I know it probably seems unffair to you that you went through all that to get me an audition and now I'm being ungrateful, and you know the last thing in the world I want is to be ungrateful to you—" "Apparently," Jimin cuts him, "The last thing in the world you want is to stay away from Jungkook. And, honestly, Taehyung, with everything that happened, the fact that you're already diving into this so deeply scares me." Taehyung parks the car. He turns in his seat, staring at Jimin through his eyelashes, and he nearly can't understand the sad and concerned glance that his best friend is sending him. "Jiminie—" "You didn't ask me not to leave," Jimin says, and he sounds worried, "And you didn't ask Yoongi-hyung not to leave when he had that five months trip. You didn't come with us, either, because college is here, and it was so important that you would be here and study to become a good actor that you handled the fact that you would stay away from us, because it would be good for both, us and you. Then why can't you let go of him for a year? Why is it so much less bearable when it's him?" Taehyung can't believe he was so worried over his history with Jungkook that he started letting that shake his life with Jimin. He only realizes now, while looking into his best friend's shaky eyes, and while feeling a knot inside his throat, how unffair he has been. Everything Jimin just said is truth — he handled worse before. He handled five months without Yoongi and two without Jimin and nothing had changed. Besides, the trip won't happen within a year. If his relationship with Jungkook is supposed to be so perfect, then a year shouldn't be enough to tear them apart. "I haven't looked at things from that point," Taehyung says, and it's nearly a whisper. Jimin blinks, the corners of his lips going down, and he reaches to hug Taehyung, which is a little uncomfortable because of the position they are in the car, but Taehyung doesn't feel like moving away. "I'm sorry, Taetae. I'm just really worried about you. You know I will support you in any decision you make, I just— I wanted you to be sure of what you're doing, because you deserve this opportunity," Jimin explains, and Taehyung feels terrible for making him feel like he hurt him by any chance, "And, if you're supposed to be with him, you guys you make it through the year, alright?" Taehyung nods, sighing, burying his face on the elder's shoulder for a moment, "Alright." "We should go," Jimin says, "I'm kind of tired and I would really like to get some sleep." Taehyung smiles as he moves away, nodding again and bringing his attention back to the wheel. He knows Jimin is right in everything he just said. He just needs to make that decison now. He wishes decisions were easier to be made, at least once.*** Yoongi, Hoseok and Namjoon drop by Taehyung and Jimin's apartment two hours later. Jimin sleeps through that entire time, and Taehyung tries to get some rest as well, laying beside his best friend, glancing at the ceiling, thinking of everything. He wonders whether Jungkook and Seokjin had a conversation about him yet, and he can't help but feel bothered by the possibilites of things Seokjin might have said. Today, Yoongi brought Holly, and Taehyung is the first to caress the dog, playing with him from the very first moment they arrive. Jimin receives a hug from each one of them, even from Yoongi, who pretends he hasn't missed Jimin as much as he actually did. Namjoon has the biggest smile on his face while hugging the younger male, and Hoseok starts making questions about his performances as soon as they pull apart. "Could you leave him, please?" Yoongi asks Taehyung, bending down beside him, gesturing at Holly, "He doesn't like you." Taehyung laughs softly, "I beg to differ." Yoongi squints, "You look weird today. What happened between you and Jungkook?" "Jungkook and I are fine," Taehyung replies, shrugging slightly, "It's just something Jimine told me. It's hammering my head." "Anything you would like to talk about?" Taehyung shakes his head, fingers running through Holly's belly, enjoying the way the dog seems to have fun with him, "Today isn't the right day. We should give Jimine a bit of attention." "I think he's getting plenty of attention already," Yoongi argues, but he doesn't protest any further, "I'm glad he is back, though." "Yeah," Taehyung nods, "Me too." They move towards the living room then, and Taehyung nearly feels like laughing as he sees Namjoon rubbing his face with his own hands, seemingly frustrated at something Jimin and Hoseok just said. "I'm telling you, I'm not dating him," Namjoon says, and Taehyung can't help but smirk, which Namjoon catches, "Not you, too. I'm being honest with you guys. Whatever is going on between me and Seokjin has an expiration date." "What, really?" Hoseok asks, "I was really betting in you two, though." "Well, you should have believed me from the beginning," Namjoon points out, "Besides, why are we talking about my romantic life when there's literally a couple standing here?" If Taehyung didn't know Yoongi any better, he could swear he saw the elder's face flushing instantaneously. "We are talking about your romantic life because it is funny," Hoseok argues, and Taehyung admires him for not getting flustered over that, "Yoongi-hyung and I aren't even a couple yet." "Yet!" Jimin yells, and Taehyung and Namjoon dissolve into an exaggerate fuss of screams following right after. Yoongi covers his ears and sends Hoseok a glance that is somewhere between a killing machine and a human weapon. "But, hey, I think we have another relationship to talk about now," Namjoon comments, and Taehyung knows he is screwed, "Taehyung-ssi, why don't you tell us about your relationship with Jeon Jungkook-ssi?" "There's nothing to tell," Taehyung says, and, just because he likes to watch everything fall apart when they're joking, he adds, "The only thing that happened was that I spent the night over at his place." Then, it's chaos. But it's a joke kind of chaos, and they laugh among the yells, and it's all comforting to Taehyung. That has been something he missed. But now Jimin is home and so are Yoongi, Hoseok and Namjoon. With them, he thinks, nothing can be that hard.*** Taehyung invites Jungkook over the next day. Jimin is home, playing video game with Taehyung, with his feet supported on the tiny extra chair they have, and they are having fun, all that history about the manager's contract put aside once Jimin tells Taehyung they have the whole week to decide. Then, at some point, Jimin says he wants to meet this new Jungkook, and Taehyung feels like he is inviting his boyfriend — or, correction, almost boyfriend — over to meet his parents. "You're not gonna scare him, are you?" Taehyung asks. "No," Jimin replies, and Taehyung squints, "What? Tell me you wouldn't do the same for me." Taehyung pouts, "But Jiminie—" "Taetae," Jimin cuts him, "I just want to meet my best friend's boyfriend—" "Almost boyfriend." "Properly, okay?" Jimin completes, "I'm not going to interfere in your relationship with him in any way, you really don't have to worry. Besides, if he's smart, he knows I don't like him, so I don't think he will give me a bad impression." "You're not my mom." "Our daily life says otherwise," Jimin argues, and that's when they hear someone knocking on the door. Taehyung wishes Jimin didn't grin like that, "Should I go or—" "I'll go," Taehyung jumps out the couch, sighing, "Out of all the best friends in the world, I had to choose the most creepy one." "I'm listening!" "You better!" Taehyung finds it almost funny, the difference between the way his calm expression as he opens the door and Jungkook's fearful look on the other side. Somehow, he thinks he managed to tell the boy mentally that Jimin is like his mother, but younger and with the possibility of talking about guys. "Hi, beloved," Taehyung jokes. "Can you not?" Jungkook raises an eyebrow, "It's embarassing enough already." "It's not embarassing." Jungkook takes a deep breath, "The last time I actually heard Jimin's voice, he was this close to punching me on the face." "This kind of thing happens," Taehyung says, and Jungkook rolls his eyes, "Come on." He grabs Jungkook's hand before the dongsaeng can protest and guides him to the living room, and, surprisingly, Jimin has gone back to playing video game, and perhaps it is supposed to be a silent threat, but he kills a zombie in the most violent way the game allows him to at the exactly second Jungkook steps on the room. Taehyung feels Jungkook's fist clench under his fingers. "I'm not doing this like it's my freaking parents," Taehyung says, throwing himself on the couch beside Jimin, pating the spot by his side as a gesture for Jungkook to join him, "You guys know each other, and there's no reason for hard feelings. Am I right?" "Sure," Jimin says, shrugging, killing another zombie with the same movement, and Taehyung hopes he runs out of ammunition really soon, "Congrats on the University, Jungkook-ssi." "Uh, thanks." Another kill. Taehyung is glad he isn't in a multiplayer game with Jimin at the moment. "Okay, this has been awkward enough," Taehyung says, standing up, and Jungkook looks at him, confused, "I'm sure the two of you will get along eventually. I think we should go out now." "Be more specific," Jimin requests, "You're not inviting me along." "I'm not inviting you along." "Well, you can make your own toasted bread tomorrow." "That's mean," Taehyung says, and Jimin shrugs, "Come on, Jungkook-ah. Let's have an ice cream or something." Jungkook seems as relieves as he would be if someone had just saved his life, and Taehyung hurries to grab a coat, and he messes Jimin's hair just a bit before leaving, singing a tiny "love you, Jiminie" before leaving with Jungkook by his side. He doesn't hear the "love you back", but he knows it is there, somewhere. Taehyung takes Jungkook to an ice cream shop nearby, and they order pretty fast, Taehyung's fingers always ghosting near Jungkook's, but never actually grabbing them. "Listen, Jungkook-ah," Taehyung starts, once he decides hiding things won't be part of their relationship, "I kind of have something to tell you. It's not bad or anything, but it's kind of important, and I think you should be part of my decision." Jungkook frowns, nodding, "Sure, you can tell me." "There's a manager in America who wants me in his next movie," Taehyung lets out, all at once, and pretends his heart doesn't ache in concern slightly as Jungkook's eyes widden, "Not as a main character, but it could be a huge opportunity, you know? Everyone started somehow. I guess this could be my way of starting. But this would force me to stay in America for a year — although I wouldn't be heading there in less than a year, either." Jungkook blinks, "Oh, woah. Congratulations, hyung." Taehyung sighs, "Tell me your opinion on it, Jungkook-ah. Tell me you're gonna support me or not, tell me it will change something or—" "It won't," Jungkook says, frowning, "What, you thought I was going to give up on us because of it? Didn't you just say you have a year before leaving? Besides, after all, it will be only a year, right? Distance relationship is a thing nowadays, we can do that." Taehyung blinks, not able to believe the conversation he had been antecipating so much happened that quickly and naturally, "So, nothing changes? I go to America and get to try my dream and we remain the same?" Jungkook blinks, serious expression dissolving into a smile as he notices Taehyung's concern. He reaches for Taehyung's hand and tangles their fingers together — finally —, squeezing the slighest, and the gesture itself fills Taehyung's heart with a warm feeling, "I told you before, hyung. I like you and I'm doing this right this time. This is your dream, I'm not gonna be the one to ask you to stop it for me. I'll be here to support you." Taehyung's eyes overflow with feelings, and he leans forward, lips brushing Jungkook's in a way that is more intimate inside than most of their moments, "Wanna know something else about me, beloved?" Jungkook smiles, "Yes." "Full name: Kim Taehyung. Life dream: becoming an amazing actor. Fact: pretty cute," Taehyung mirrors Jungkook's smile, and his eyes meet Jungkook's, sparkling, "Curiosity: helplessly in love with Jeon Jungkook." Jungkook's smile gets widder and he tils his head to kiss Taehyung. It's not deep or anything, but it carries so much feeling Taehyung thinks he might explode. Actually, that's how he guesses every single kiss with Jungkook is like, nearly like there is a whole universe inside of him, along with stars bursting out of his chest. He loves it. Taehyung smiles, because, this time, he is pretty sure they are ready for this. They are ready to be with each other.